z/OS

Version 2 Release 3

ISPF User's Guide Volume I

IBM

SC19-3627-30
 Note
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in “Notices” on page
213.

This edition applies to Version 2 Release 3 of z/OS (5650-ZOS) and to all subsequent releases and modifications until
otherwise indicated in new editions.
Last updated: 2019-06-21
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1980, 2019.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with
IBM Corp.
Contents

Figures................................................................................................................. xi

Tables..................................................................................................................xv

Preface.............................................................................................................. xvii
About this document................................................................................................................................ xvii
Who should use this document................................................................................................................ xvii
What is in this document?........................................................................................................................ xvii
How to read the syntax diagrams............................................................................................................xviii

z/OS information...............................................................................................xxiii

How to send your comments to IBM.................................................................... xxv

If you have a technical problem............................................................................................................... xxv

Summary of changes........................................................................................ xxvii

Summary of changes for z/OS Version 2 Release 3 (V2R3).................................................................. xxvii
Summary of changes for z/OS Version 2 Release 2 (V2R2).................................................................. xxvii
Summary of changes for z/OS Version 2 Release 1 (V2R1).................................................................. xxvii

What's in the z/OS V2R3 ISPF library?............................................................... xxix

Chapter 1. Overview of ISPF.................................................................................. 1

ISPF components.........................................................................................................................................1
ISPF functions.............................................................................................................................................. 1
View, Browse, Edit, edit macros, and models........................................................................................2
Dialog services........................................................................................................................................2
Utilities.................................................................................................................................................... 2
Dialog Test, Foreground, and Batch....................................................................................................... 2
TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs............................................................................................ 2
Software Configuration and Library Manager (SCLM)............................................................................3
Other IBM program development products.......................................................................................... 3
Online tutorial......................................................................................................................................... 3
Supported data types...................................................................................................................................3
Member name conventions....................................................................................................................4
Running ISPF................................................................................................................................................4
Starting ISPF...........................................................................................................................................5
The Primary Option Menu panel.............................................................................................................5
User profiles............................................................................................................................................8
Getting help............................................................................................................................................ 9
Ending an ISPF function or ISPF............................................................................................................ 9
Running a sample ISPF session................................................................................................................ 10

Chapter 2. The ISPF user interface.......................................................................15

Some terms you should know................................................................................................................... 15
Understanding ISPF panels....................................................................................................................... 16
Panel format......................................................................................................................................... 16
Panel types........................................................................................................................................... 17

iii
 Option selection................................................................................................................................... 19
Action bars............................................................................................................................................19
Point-and-Shoot text fields.................................................................................................................. 24
Function keys........................................................................................................................................25
Selection fields..................................................................................................................................... 26
Entering commands in ISPF...................................................................................................................... 26
Types of commands............................................................................................................................. 27
Multicultural support............................................................................................................................28
ISPF command syntax notation...........................................................................................................28
Command nesting................................................................................................................................ 30
Running in GUI mode.................................................................................................................................30
Starting a GUI session..........................................................................................................................30
What GUI mode looks like....................................................................................................................32
Switching between GUI mode and 3270 mode.................................................................................. 41
Special characters or symbols............................................................................................................. 41
ISPF GUI support of TSO line mode output and input........................................................................ 42
Bi-directional language support.......................................................................................................... 45
Ending a GUI session........................................................................................................................... 46
Closing the ISPF Client/Server Workstation Agent component..........................................................46
Splitting the screen horizontally or vertically............................................................................................46
The SPLIT command............................................................................................................................ 46
The SWAP command............................................................................................................................ 47
The SWITCH command........................................................................................................................ 49
3290 terminals..................................................................................................................................... 50

Chapter 3. Using personal data set lists and library lists....................................... 53

Personal list modes................................................................................................................................... 54
Personal data set lists................................................................................................................................55
Personal library lists.............................................................................................................................55
Reference data set list..........................................................................................................................55
Reference library list............................................................................................................................ 56
How to get a list of your personal lists.................................................................................................56
How to create a personal list............................................................................................................... 56
Retrieving data from personal lists...................................................................................................... 57
Using personal lists to create customized DSLIST displays............................................................... 57
Using personal lists to create customized z/OS UNIX list displays.................................................... 57
Personal data set list panel..................................................................................................................57
Personal data set lists panel................................................................................................................ 60
Shared personal lists................................................................................................................................. 63
Name retrieval with the NRETRIEV command..........................................................................................63
SCLM considerations for NRETRIEV.................................................................................................... 64
Command interface (fast path) to the personal list function................................................................... 65
Using function keys with personal lists..................................................................................................... 66
Example of an ISPF panel that uses a referral list.................................................................................... 67
Example of an ISPF panel that enables NRETRIEV.................................................................................. 68

Chapter 4. Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection.......................... 71

ISPF system commands............................................................................................................................ 72
ACTIONS...............................................................................................................................................72
AUTOTYPE............................................................................................................................................ 72
BACKWARD...........................................................................................................................................72
BOTTOM................................................................................................................................................72
CANCEL.................................................................................................................................................72
CMDE.................................................................................................................................................... 72
COLOR...................................................................................................................................................73
CRETRIEV............................................................................................................................................. 73
CUAATTR.............................................................................................................................................. 73

iv
CURSOR................................................................................................................................................ 73
DOWN................................................................................................................................................... 73
DSLIST.................................................................................................................................................. 73
DTEST....................................................................................................................................................74
END....................................................................................................................................................... 74
ENVIRON.............................................................................................................................................. 75
EPDF..................................................................................................................................................... 75
EXHELP................................................................................................................................................. 76
EXIT...................................................................................................................................................... 76
EXPAND................................................................................................................................................ 76
FKA........................................................................................................................................................77
FORWARD............................................................................................................................................. 77
HELP......................................................................................................................................................77
INT........................................................................................................................................................ 77
ISPDPTRC............................................................................................................................................. 78
ISPDTLC................................................................................................................................................ 78
ISPFTTRC..............................................................................................................................................79
ISPFVAR................................................................................................................................................79
ISPFWORK............................................................................................................................................ 80
ISPLIBD................................................................................................................................................ 80
ISPPREP................................................................................................................................................80
ISRRLIST...............................................................................................................................................80
ISRROUTE.............................................................................................................................................80
KEYLIST................................................................................................................................................ 81
KEYS......................................................................................................................................................81
KEYSHELP............................................................................................................................................. 81
LEFT...................................................................................................................................................... 81
LIST.......................................................................................................................................................82
LOG....................................................................................................................................................... 82
MSGID...................................................................................................................................................82
NOP....................................................................................................................................................... 82
NRETRIEV............................................................................................................................................. 83
PANELID............................................................................................................................................... 83
PFSHOW............................................................................................................................................... 83
PRINT....................................................................................................................................................83
PRINTG................................................................................................................................................. 84
PRINT-HI.............................................................................................................................................. 84
PRINTL..................................................................................................................................................85
PRINTLHI..............................................................................................................................................85
PSCOLOR.............................................................................................................................................. 85
RCHANGE............................................................................................................................................. 85
REFACTD...............................................................................................................................................85
REFACTL............................................................................................................................................... 85
REFADDD.............................................................................................................................................. 86
REFADDL...............................................................................................................................................86
REFLISTD..............................................................................................................................................86
REFLISTL.............................................................................................................................................. 86
REFOPEND............................................................................................................................................86
REFOPENL............................................................................................................................................ 86
RESIZE.................................................................................................................................................. 86
RETF......................................................................................................................................................86
RETP..................................................................................................................................................... 87
RETRIEVE............................................................................................................................................. 87
RETURN................................................................................................................................................ 87
RFIND................................................................................................................................................... 87
RIGHT................................................................................................................................................... 87
SAREA................................................................................................................................................... 87
SCRNAME............................................................................................................................................. 88

v
 SETTINGS............................................................................................................................................. 88
SPLIT.....................................................................................................................................................88
SPLITV.................................................................................................................................................. 88
START....................................................................................................................................................88
SWAP.................................................................................................................................................... 89
SWAPBAR............................................................................................................................................. 89
SWITCH.................................................................................................................................................90
SYSNAME.............................................................................................................................................. 91
TOP....................................................................................................................................................... 91
TSO........................................................................................................................................................91
TSOCMD................................................................................................................................................91
TSOGUI................................................................................................................................................. 91
TUTOR...................................................................................................................................................92
UDLIST..................................................................................................................................................92
UP..........................................................................................................................................................92
USERID................................................................................................................................................. 92
WINDOW...............................................................................................................................................92
WS......................................................................................................................................................... 93
WSCON................................................................................................................................................. 93
WSDISCON........................................................................................................................................... 93
ZCLRSFLD............................................................................................................................................. 94
ZKEYS....................................................................................................................................................94
Using the RETRIEVE, RETF, and RETP commands.............................................................................. 94
Using the RETURN command...............................................................................................................96
Using the jump function....................................................................................................................... 97
Using the scrolling commands.............................................................................................................98
Using the EXPAND command...............................................................................................................99
Using command tables to define commands...................................................................................... 99
SELECT action commands temporarily invoke a new dialog............................................................ 101
Assigning command aliases...............................................................................................................102
Overriding system commands........................................................................................................... 104
Passing commands to a dialog function............................................................................................ 104
Specifying command actions dynamically........................................................................................ 105
Using function keys..................................................................................................................................105
Defining function key values.............................................................................................................. 107
Changing the format of the function key area................................................................................... 107
Saving function key definitions.......................................................................................................... 109
Using the cursor-select key.....................................................................................................................109
How Program Access (PA) keys affect ISPF operation...........................................................................110
The AUTOTYPE function, for automatic data set name and member name completion...................... 111
How to use AUTOTYPE.......................................................................................................................112
Rules for specifying the 'Other Data Set Name' field ....................................................................... 112
Rules for Library fields - Project, Group, Type, Member................................................................... 112
Cursor position sensitivity..................................................................................................................112
Restrictions........................................................................................................................................ 113
Enabling applications to use AUTOTYPE........................................................................................... 113

Chapter 5. ISPF libraries and data sets...............................................................115

Naming ISPF libraries and data sets.......................................................................................................115
ISPF library names.............................................................................................................................115
Other partitioned, sequential or VSAM data set, or z/OS UNIX file names...................................... 116
Volume serials.................................................................................................................................... 118
Library concatenation..............................................................................................................................119
Concatenation during editing.............................................................................................................120
Concatenation during language processing...................................................................................... 120
Using member selection lists.................................................................................................................. 121
Displaying member lists.....................................................................................................................122

vi
 Ending member lists.......................................................................................................................... 123
ISPF member statistics......................................................................................................................123
Load module library member statistics.............................................................................................128
Member selection list commands......................................................................................................129
Member list positioning..................................................................................................................... 141
z/OS UNIX directory selection lists......................................................................................................... 141
Data set passwords................................................................................................................................. 142
Format definitions....................................................................................................................................142
Mixed mode............................................................................................................................................. 143
Partitioned Data Set Extended (PDSE)....................................................................................................143
Packed data sets......................................................................................................................................143
List and log data sets............................................................................................................................... 144
List data set........................................................................................................................................ 144
Log data set........................................................................................................................................ 144
Processing the log and list data sets................................................................................................. 145
How to specify log and list data set processing options................................................................... 145
Processing the log and list data sets during an ISPF session...........................................................145
Log and list data set processing at the end of a session...................................................................147
Data set processing options...............................................................................................................148
Foreground and batch output listings..................................................................................................... 150
Other temporary data sets...................................................................................................................... 150
Job statement information......................................................................................................................151

Chapter 6. Getting ready to run on MVS.............................................................. 153

Setting up ISPF libraries..........................................................................................................................153
Allocating required ISPF libraries........................................................................................................... 153
Allocating optional ISPF table libraries...................................................................................................155
Allocating optional file tailoring ISPF libraries....................................................................................... 156
Allocating optional image ISPF library....................................................................................................156
Allocating CLIST, REXX, and program libraries.......................................................................................157
Allocating DBCS libraries.........................................................................................................................157
Selecting the National Language for ISPF sessions............................................................................... 157

Appendix A. Installing the Client/Server component...........................................159

Installation considerations for the Client/Server component................................................................159
Assumptions.......................................................................................................................................159
Required hardware and software...................................................................................................... 160
Configuration parameters.................................................................................................................. 160
Downloading the Workstation Agent.......................................................................................................160
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) download.............................................................................................. 161
Manual download............................................................................................................................... 164
Running the installation program............................................................................................................165
The Workstation Agent window.............................................................................................................. 166
The System Register panel................................................................................................................ 167

Appendix B. Configuring communications for the ISPF Client/Server.................. 171

Configuring TCP/IP connections..............................................................................................................171
TCP/IP requirements fast path.......................................................................................................... 171
TCP/IP requirements detail............................................................................................................... 171
TCP/IP additional tips........................................................................................................................ 172
Configuring APPC connections................................................................................................................ 173
APPC requirements fast path............................................................................................................ 173
APPC requirements detail..................................................................................................................174
APPC additional tips...........................................................................................................................175

Appendix C. Listing formats............................................................................... 177

Source and index listings.........................................................................................................................177

vii
 Source listings.................................................................................................................................... 177
Index listings...................................................................................................................................... 178
ISPF log listings....................................................................................................................................... 180
Member list listings................................................................................................................................. 180
Member list listings for source libraries............................................................................................ 180
Member list listings for load libraries................................................................................................ 181
Formats for member list listings........................................................................................................182
Data set list listings..................................................................................................................................182
Format for data set list listings.......................................................................................................... 183

Appendix D. APL and TEXT character conversion................................................ 185

Appendix E. Abbreviations for commands and other values.................................187

Command abbreviations......................................................................................................................... 187
Field value abbreviations.........................................................................................................................187
Keyword/Operand, Scroll Amount, and Programming Language Abbreviations................................... 188
Scroll amount abbreviations.............................................................................................................. 188
Programming language abbreviations...............................................................................................188

Appendix F. Allocation data sets........................................................................ 189

SYSIN data set......................................................................................................................................... 189
SYSLIB data set....................................................................................................................................... 189
SYSPRINT data set.................................................................................................................................. 189
SYSTERM data set....................................................................................................................................190
SYSLIN data set....................................................................................................................................... 190
SYSPUNCH data set................................................................................................................................. 190
SYSUT1 data set...................................................................................................................................... 190
SYSUT2 to SYSUT7 data sets.................................................................................................................. 190

Appendix G. ISRDDN diagnostic utility............................................................... 191

The Current Data Set Allocations list...................................................................................................... 191
Using commands on the displayed list................................................................................................... 194
Allocation list primary commands..................................................................................................... 194
Allocation list line commands............................................................................................................200
Browsing storage and loaded modules...................................................................................................201
ARRAY command............................................................................................................................... 201
ARRAYP command............................................................................................................................. 202
BROWSE command............................................................................................................................ 203
CANCEL command............................................................................................................................. 203
CHAIN command............................................................................................................................... 204
DATA command.................................................................................................................................. 205
DISASM command............................................................................................................................. 205
DUMP command.................................................................................................................................206
FORMAT command.............................................................................................................................206
LIMIT command................................................................................................................................. 206
LOAD command..................................................................................................................................206
NARROW command........................................................................................................................... 207
RAW command...................................................................................................................................207
REFRESH command........................................................................................................................... 207
SETDATA command............................................................................................................................207
WIDE command................................................................................................................................. 207
Defining named storage locations...........................................................................................................208

Appendix H. Accessibility.................................................................................. 209

Accessibility features.............................................................................................................................. 209
Consult assistive technologies................................................................................................................ 209
Keyboard navigation of the user interface.............................................................................................. 209

viii
 Dotted decimal syntax diagrams.............................................................................................................209

Notices..............................................................................................................213
Terms and conditions for product documentation................................................................................. 214
IBM Online Privacy Statement................................................................................................................ 215
Policy for unsupported hardware............................................................................................................215
Minimum supported hardware................................................................................................................ 216
Programming Interface Information.......................................................................................................216
Trademarks.............................................................................................................................................. 216

Index................................................................................................................ 217

ix
x
Figures

1. Sample syntax diagram...............................................................................................................................xix

2. ISPF Primary Option Menu (ISR@PRIM) with license information..............................................................6

3. ISPF Primary Option Menu (ISR@PRIM)...................................................................................................... 6

4. Panel Formatpanelspanel formatformat, panel......................................................................................... 16

5. Primary Option Menu showing key features...............................................................................................18

6. Panel with an Action Bar Pull-Down Menu................................................................................................. 22

7. An Unavailable Choice on a Pull-Down.......................................................................................................23

8. Pop-Up Selected from an Action Bar Pull-Down........................................................................................ 24

9. Panel with an Action Bar and Point-and-Shoot Fields............................................................................... 25

10. The Workstation Agent window................................................................................................................31

11. The Initiate Workstation Connection Panel..............................................................................................31

12. WSA Connection Panel..............................................................................................................................32

13. ISPF Primary Option Menu Displayed in Personal Communications.......................................................33

14. ISPF Primary Option Menu Displayed Using ISPF Workstation Agent.................................................... 34

15. ISPF Dialog Test Display Panel Displayed on a 3270 Emulator.............................................................. 38

16. ISPF Dialog Test Display Panel Displayed Using ISPF Workstation Agent..............................................39

17. A Pull-Down Menu with an Unavailable Choice Displayed on a 3270 Emulator..................................... 40

18. A Pull-Down Menu with an Unavailable Choice Displayed Using ISPF Workstation Agent.................... 41

19. ISPF/TSO GUI Window............................................................................................................................. 42

20. ISPF/TSO GUI Window with Pull-Down Menu......................................................................................... 43

21. ISPF Task List............................................................................................................................................ 48

22. Splitting the 3290 Screen......................................................................................................................... 51

23. RefList Pull-Down Menu............................................................................................................................54

xi
 24. RefMode Pull-Down Menu........................................................................................................................ 54

25. Personal Data Set List Panel (ISRPDSNL)................................................................................................ 58

26. Personal Data Set Lists Panel (ISRPLTAB)............................................................................................... 60

27. Defining Function Keys to Issue Referral List Commands....................................................................... 66

28. Example Panel Definition Enabling NRETRIEV........................................................................................ 69

29. Tailor Function Key Definition Display Panel (ISPOPFA)....................................................................... 107

30. Use of the attention-select Attribute..................................................................................................... 110

31. Hierarchy of ISPF Libraries..................................................................................................................... 120

32. Member List Commands Pop-Up Window (ISRCMLEP).........................................................................123

33. Member List Display (ISRUDMM)........................................................................................................... 124

34. Member List Display cont. (ISRUDMM).................................................................................................. 124

35. Member List Color Change Utility Panel (ISRMLCP).............................................................................. 125

36. Enhanced Member List Initial Sort Panel (ISRMLIS)............................................................................. 126

37. Load Module Library Display (ISRUDMM).............................................................................................. 128

38. Library Utility before Print, Rename, and Delete (ISRUDMM)............................................................... 140

39. Library Utility after Print, Rename, and Delete (ISRUDMM).................................................................. 140

40. Log Data Set Defaults Panel (ISPLLP01)................................................................................................ 146

41. List Data Set Defaults Panel (ISPLLP02)................................................................................................ 146

42. Specify Disposition of Log and List Data Sets Panel (ISPPFT03).......................................................... 148

43. Local Print Command Edit Panel (ISPCHPLP)........................................................................................ 149

44. ISPF Client/Server Installation Notice (ISPWSD02)..............................................................................162

45. Second Client/Server Component Download Panel (ISPWSD04)......................................................... 163

46. ISPF Client/Server Component Install Program Panel (ISPWSD07).................................................... 164

47. Client/Server Component Download Panel (ISPWSD05)...................................................................... 164

48. Workstation Agent Install Program........................................................................................................ 165

xii
49. The Workstation Agent window..............................................................................................................166

50. System Register Panel............................................................................................................................ 168

51. Add System Pop-up Dialog..................................................................................................................... 168

52. Add User Pop-up Dialog..........................................................................................................................169

53. Sample Source Listing............................................................................................................................ 177

54. Sample Index Listing - Managed Source Library....................................................................................178

55. Sample Index Listing - Managed Load Library....................................................................................... 179

56. Sample ISPF Log Listing......................................................................................................................... 180

57. Sample Member List Listing for a Source Library...................................................................................181

58. Sample Member List Listing for a Load Library...................................................................................... 181

59. Sample Data Set List Listing................................................................................................................... 183

60. Internal Character Representations for APL Keyboards........................................................................185

61. Internal Character Representations for Text Keyboards....................................................................... 186

62. Current Data Set Allocations List panel..................................................................................................192

63. Data Set Attributes in ISRDDN............................................................................................................... 193

64. Additional DD Information......................................................................................................................193

65. Additional DD Information......................................................................................................................194

66. Current Data Set Allocations List in LONG Format.................................................................................195

67. Results of the MEMBER Command.........................................................................................................196

68. The Duplicates List Display.....................................................................................................................197

69. The CSVQUERY Results Panel................................................................................................................ 198

70. The System ENQ Status List Panel......................................................................................................... 199

71. ARRAY Storage Format........................................................................................................................... 202

72. ARRAYP Storage Format......................................................................................................................... 203

73. CHAIN Storage Format........................................................................................................................... 205

xiii
 74. Storage Viewed in FORMAT Mode.......................................................................................................... 206

75. Sample ISRDDN Named Storage File.....................................................................................................208

xiv
Tables

1. A sample ISPF session................................................................................................................................ 10

2. Finishing the sample session...................................................................................................................... 13

3. Entry Methods and Command Types..........................................................................................................27

4. Characteristics of the Line Command Field................................................................................................29

5. Examples of SELECT action commands................................................................................................... 101

6. Examples of a chain of command-parameter aliases..............................................................................103

7. Some more examples of defining alias values......................................................................................... 103

8. Examples of overriding a system command.............................................................................................104

9. Examples of passing commands to the dialog......................................................................................... 104

10. Examples of entries in an application command table..........................................................................105

11. Function key arrangement......................................................................................................................106

12. ZPFFMT system variable on PFSHOW....................................................................................................108

13. ZPRIKEYS values.....................................................................................................................................108

14. ZPFSET system variable, on PFSHOW....................................................................................................108

15. Member Selection List Differences.........................................................................................................121

16. Sort Fields for Source Libraries.............................................................................................................. 135

17. Sort Fields for Load Libraries..................................................................................................................136

18. MEMBER LIST Srchfor Options panel: search string examples.............................................................137

19. Required Partitioned Data Sets.............................................................................................................. 153

20. LRECL Limits during ISPF Initialization.................................................................................................. 154

21. Table Data Sets....................................................................................................................................... 155

22. File-Tailoring Data Sets...........................................................................................................................156

23. Image Data Set....................................................................................................................................... 156

xv
 24. TCP/IP workstation and host requirements...........................................................................................171

25. Determining the Internet address..........................................................................................................172

26. APPC workstation and host requirements............................................................................................. 174

27. Identifying a candidate name.................................................................................................................174

28. Determining the full qualified name.......................................................................................................176

29. Format of Source Library Member List Listing....................................................................................... 182

30. Format of Load Library Member List Listing........................................................................................... 182

31. Format of Data Set List Listing................................................................................................................183

32. Some examples invoking BROWSE........................................................................................................ 199

xvi
Preface
This document provides reference and usage information for programmers who develop applications with
ISPF. It also provides conceptual and functional descriptions of ISPF.

About this document

This document contains two parts. The first part provides introductory information about using ISPF:
• An overview of ISPF and the ISPF user interface
• How to enter commands and perform other actions
• How to use libraries and data sets
The second part contains the appendixes. These cover installing the ISPF Client/Server component, using
the ISRDDN diagnostic utility, and other reference material such as sample listings and command
abbreviations.
For detailed information about using ISPF menu options, see the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.

Who should use this document

This document is for application programmers who use ISPF. Users should be familiar with coding CLISTs,
REXX EXECs, or programs in the MVS™ environment.

What is in this document?

Chapter 1, “Overview of ISPF,” on page 1 describes the components, functions, and utilities provided
by ISPF, including the Primary Option Menu panel.
Chapter 2, “The ISPF user interface,” on page 15 describes the features of the ISPF user interface:
• Panel formats and features
• Action bars
• Commands
• The ISPF Workstation Agent, including the ISPF Graphical User Interface (GUI)
• Splitting the screen
Chapter 3, “Using personal data set lists and library lists,” on page 53 describes the four types of referral
lists, which are used to retrieve a stored data set or library to the currently displayed panel:
• Reference data set list
• Reference library list
• Personal data set list
• Personal library list.
Chapter 4, “Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection,” on page 71 describes ISPF system
commands, the function keys and their default assignments, and the cursor select facilities.
Chapter 5, “ISPF libraries and data sets,” on page 115 describes how to allocate, create, and use libraries
and data sets.
Chapter 6, “Getting ready to run on MVS,” on page 153 helps you prepare to use ISPF data-element
libraries.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 xvii

 Appendix A, “Installing the Client/Server component,” on page 159 provides information that you need to
know before you install the ISPF Client/Server component workstation software.
Appendix B, “Configuring communications for the ISPF Client/Server,” on page 171 provides information
on configuring your communications protocols so you can use the ISPF Client/Server.
Appendix C, “Listing formats,” on page 177 describes and displays the kinds of listings you can produce
using ISPF.
Appendix D, “APL and TEXT character conversion,” on page 185 describes how APL and TEXT characters
are converted by ISPF for internal storage.
Appendix E, “Abbreviations for commands and other values,” on page 187 lists commands, field values,
keywords/operands, and scroll amounts that can be abbreviated.
Appendix F, “Allocation data sets,” on page 189 provides information on ALLOC commands that ISPF
issues based on ISPF libraries, data set names, list IDs, options, and additional input libraries.
Appendix G, “ISRDDN diagnostic utility,” on page 191 explains how to use ISRDDN, a program that is
provided with ISPF as a service aid.

How to read the syntax diagrams

The syntactical structure of commands described in this document is shown by means of syntax
diagrams.
Figure 1 on page xix shows a sample syntax diagram that includes the various notations used to indicate
such things as whether:
• An item is a keyword or a variable.
• An item is required or optional.
• A choice is available.
• A default applies if you do not specify a value.
• You can repeat an item.

xviii z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 COMMAND_NAME required_variable
OPTIONAL_KEYWORD=  variable

KEYWORD=  default_choice
repeatable_item1
KEYWORD= choice2 fragment_name

choice3

required_choice1 repeatable_item2
optional_choice1 required_choice2
optional_choice2 required_choice3

DEFAULT_KEYWORD

KEYword

fragment_name
DEFAULT_KEYWORD

KEYWORD1

KEYWORD2

KEYWORD3 KEYWORD4
( variable1 )
variable2 variable3
,

( variable4-variable5 )
OPTIONAL_KEYWORD1

OPTIONAL_KEYWORD2

OPTIONAL_KEYWORD3

Figure 1. Sample syntax diagram

Here are some tips for reading and understanding syntax diagrams:
Order of reading
Read the syntax diagrams from left to right, from top to bottom, following the path of the line.
The ►►─── symbol indicates the beginning of a statement.
The ───► symbol indicates that a statement is continued on the next line.
The ►─── symbol indicates that a statement is continued from the previous line.
The ───►◄ symbol indicates the end of a statement.
Keywords
Keywords appear in uppercase letters.
COMMAND_NAME

Preface xix
 Sometimes you only need to type the first few letters of a keyword, The required part of the keyword
appears in uppercase letters.

DEFAULT_KEYWORD

KEYword

In this example, you could type "KEY", "KEYW", "KEYWO", "KEYWOR" or "KEYWORD".
The abbreviated or whole keyword you enter must be spelled exactly as shown.
Variables
Variables appear in lowercase letters. They represent user-supplied names or values.
required_variable

Required items
Required items appear on the horizontal line (the main path).
COMMAND_NAME required_variable

Optional items
Optional items appear below the main path.

OPTIONAL_KEYWORD=  variable

Choice of items
If you can choose from two or more items, they appear vertically, in a stack.
If you must choose one of the items, one item of the stack appears on the main path.

required_choice1

required_choice2

required_choice3

If choosing one of the items is optional, the entire stack appears below the main path.

optional_choice1

optional_choice2

If a default value applies when you do not choose any of the items, the default value appears above
the main path.

DEFAULT_KEYWORD

KEYWORD1

KEYWORD2

Repeatable items
An arrow returning to the left above the main line indicates an item that can be repeated.

repeatable_item1

xx z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 If you need to specify a separator character (such as a comma) between repeatable items, the line
with the arrow returning to the left shows the separator character you must specify.
,

repeatable_item2

Fragments
Where it makes the syntax diagram easier to read, a section or fragment of the syntax is sometimes
shown separately.

fragment_name

⋮
fragment_name
DEFAULT_KEYWORD
…
KEYWORD1

KEYWORD2

Preface xxi
xxii z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I
z/OS information
This information explains how z/OS references information in other documents and on the web.
When possible, this information uses cross document links that go directly to the topic in reference using
shortened versions of the document title. For complete titles and order numbers of the documents for all
products that are part of z/OS, see z/OS Information Roadmap.
To find the complete z/OS® library, go to IBM Knowledge Center (www.ibm.com/support/
knowledgecenter/SSLTBW/welcome).

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 xxiii

xxiv z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I
How to send your comments to IBM
We invite you to submit comments about the z/OS product documentation. Your valuable feedback helps
to ensure accurate and high-quality information.
Important: If your comment regards a technical question or problem, see instead “If you have a technical
problem” on page xxv.
Submit your feedback by using the appropriate method for your type of comment or question:
Feedback on z/OS function
If your comment or question is about z/OS itself, submit a request through the IBM RFE Community
(www.ibm.com/developerworks/rfe/).
Feedback on IBM® Knowledge Center function
If your comment or question is about the IBM Knowledge Center functionality, for example search
capabilities or how to arrange the browser view, send a detailed email to IBM Knowledge Center
Support at [email protected].
Feedback on the z/OS product documentation and content
If your comment is about the information that is provided in the z/OS product documentation library,
send a detailed email to [email protected]. We welcome any feedback that you have, including
comments on the clarity, accuracy, or completeness of the information.
To help us better process your submission, include the following information:
• Your name, company/university/institution name, and email address
• The following deliverable title and order number: z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I, SC19-3627-30
• The section title of the specific information to which your comment relates
• The text of your comment.
When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the comments
in any way appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
IBM or any other organizations use the personal information that you supply to contact you only about the
issues that you submit.

If you have a technical problem

If you have a technical problem or question, do not use the feedback methods that are provided for
sending documentation comments. Instead, take one or more of the following actions:
• Go to the IBM Support Portal (support.ibm.com).
• Contact your IBM service representative.
• Call IBM technical support.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 xxv

xxvi z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I
Summary of changes
This information includes terminology, maintenance, and editorial changes. Technical changes or
additions to the text and illustrations for the current edition are indicated by a vertical line to the left of
the change.

Summary of changes for z/OS Version 2 Release 3 (V2R3)

The following changes are made for z/OS Version 2 Release 3 (V2R3).

June 2019
Maintenance and terminology changes are made for z/OS Version 2 Release 3 in June 2019.

May 2018
Maintenance and terminology changes are made for z/OS Version 2 Release 3 in May 2018.

September 2017
Changed information
• TSO 8-character ID, see the following topic:
– “Member list display panel fields” on page 126
• Extended statistics usability, see the following topics:
– “ISPF member statistics” on page 123
– “Member list display panel fields” on page 126

Summary of changes for z/OS Version 2 Release 2 (V2R2)

The following changes are made for z/OS Version 2 Release 2 (V2R2).

New information
• Considerations for PDSE member generations are added under “Member selection list commands” on
page 129.

Summary of changes for z/OS Version 2 Release 1 (V2R1)

The following changes are made for z/OS Version 2 Release 1 (V2R1).
Extended attributes
The extended member list format display has been updated to add an I(Info) command to display a
panel with all the relevant extended information.
For changes to this document relating to this modification, see:
• Figure 32 on page 123
• “Library and data set list utility line commands” on page 138

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 xxvii

xxviii z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I
What's in the z/OS V2R3 ISPF library?
You can order the ISPF books using the numbers provided below.
Title
Order Number
z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference
SC19-3619–30
z/OS ISPF Dialog Tag Language Guide and Reference
SC19-3620–30
z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros
SC19-3621–30
z/OS ISPF Messages and Codes
SC19-3622–30
z/OS ISPF Planning and Customizing
GC19-3623–30
z/OS ISPF Reference Summary
SC19-3624–30
z/OS ISPF Software Configuration and Library Manager Guide and Reference
SC19-3625–30
z/OS ISPF Services Guide
SC19-3626–30
z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I
SC19-3627–30
z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II
SC19-3628–30

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 xxix

xxx z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I
 ISPF components

Chapter 1. Overview of ISPF

ISPF is a multifaceted development tool set for the z/OS operating system. Since 1975, MVS
programmers have used ISPF for host-based application development productivity. ISPF forms the basis
of many TSO and CMS applications and provides extensive programmer-oriented facilities as well.

ISPF components
ISPF helps programmers develop interactive applications called dialogs. Dialogs are interactive because
ISPF uses them to communicate with terminal users through a series of panels while the users do
application development tasks.
ISPF panels:
• Provide access to ISPF functions through menus
• Request information from users through data entry panels
• Provide information from users through scrollable data displays
These are the main components of ISPF:
• Dialog Manager (DM): The Dialog Manager provides services to dialogs and end users. These include
display, variable services, input and output, user and application profiles, table management, system
interface services, dialog testing and debugging aids, and other services.
• Program Development Facility (PDF): The Program Development Facility provides services to assist the
dialog or application developer. These include the edit and browse functions, data set and catalog
utilities, TSO or CMS command interfaces, and data set search and compare functions.
• Software Configuration and Library Manager (SCLM): The SCLM facility provides library management
capabilities such as versioning, auditing, and promotion. It also provides configuration management
capabilities to track how all of the pieces of an application fit together, including source code, objects,
load modules, test cases, documentation, and other items. The Build function tracks and invokes the
necessary compilers, assemblers and linkage editors.
• Client/Server component: The Client/Server component allows the users of ISPF applications to use a
workstation running Windows or UNIX to display the panels of an ISPF application. It does this using the
Graphical User Interface of the workstation. Because of this, there is no requirement to change your
existing ISPF applications to run in a GUI environment.

ISPF functions
ISPF can be used in these ways:
• Managers can use ISPF Edit, SCRIPT/VS, and the Hardcopy utility or another print utility provided by
their installation to prepare memos.
• Data processing administrators and system programmers can use ISPF to:
– Monitor and control program libraries
– Communicate with MVS through TSO commands, CLISTs, or REXX EXECs.
• Programmers can use ISPF to develop a batch, interactive, or any other type of program and its
documentation.
• Terminal users can call dialogs that use Dialog Manager (DM) component and Program Development
Facility (PDF) component dialog services to do the work of the application.
The View, Browse, and Edit functions, a wide range of utilities, foreground and batch compilers, program
library control, and other facilities are available to help you develop ISPF dialogs.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 1

ISPF functions

View, Browse, Edit, edit macros, and models

The View, Browse, and Edit functions allow you to look at the contents of a dialog. While editing a dialog,
you can change it by adding or deleting lines, typing over the existing source code, or copying lines from
another dialog to the one being edited.
To enhance the existing Edit function, you can write edit macros. Edit macros allow you to combine
several often-used functions so that you do not have to call each function separately. You can write initial
edit macros that are automatically run when the Edit option is selected. Other uses for edit macros
include:
• Overriding Edit commands
• Calling DM and PDF component dialog services
• Accessing cursor position and data location.
Also, ISPF provides online models that you can insert into the dialog. A model is an example of a service
call, panel format, table format, or message that contains the proper syntax and all the available
parameters for the programming language being used. Since these models are online, they can be called
directly into the member being edited.
See z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros for more information.

Dialog services
The PDF component provides View, Browse, Edit, and library access services that can be combined in a
dialog with any of the ISPF services. The library access services carry out functions involving members of
a programming library. These functions include adding, finding, and deleting members, and displaying
member lists.
The PDF component includes a separate edit model of each service call for each programming language
ISPF supports: CLIST, COBOL, EXEC, FORTRAN, PL/I, Pascal, C, and REXX. See z/OS ISPF Services Guide
for complete information about the PDF component dialog services.
Note: For information about library access services that apply to the Software Configuration and Library
Manager (SCLM), refer to the z/OS ISPF Software Configuration and Library Manager Guide and Reference.

Utilities
ISPF provides a wide range of utilities. Utilities enable you to:
• Display and print library and data set member lists
• Reset statistics for ISPF library members
• Define commands to be used with specific dialogs
• Compare data sets and search for strings of data
• Move, copy, and print library and data set members.

Dialog Test, Foreground, and Batch

ISPF provides special facilities for testing dialogs. The Dialog Test option allows testing of individual
dialog elements and complete dialogs.
After a program has been developed, you can either assemble it or compile and link it using either the
Foreground or Batch option. The Foreground option allows you to watch the program being compiled. The
Batch option frees the terminal, which helps when you compile a long program. If errors occur, you can
use the debugging capabilities of the Dialog Test facility to correct them.

TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs

While using ISPF, you can call TSO commands, CLISTs, or REXX EXECs by:
• Prefixing a command with TSO and entering it from any command line

2 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Supported Data Types

• Selecting the Command option and entering the TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec on the panel
• Entering a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX exec in the Line Command field on a data set list display or a
member list display.

Software Configuration and Library Manager (SCLM)

To help you maintain different levels or versions of a library member, ISPF includes the Software
Configuration and Library Manager (SCLM). SCLM is a tool that helps you develop complex software
applications. Throughout the development cycle, SCLM automatically controls, maintains, and tracks all of
the software components of the application. And you can lock the version being edited in a private library
and then promote it. See z/OS ISPF Software Configuration and Library Manager Guide and Reference for
more information.

Other IBM program development products

You might want to call another IBM program development product while using ISPF. The IBM Products
option allows you to call the Tivoli® Information Management, COBOL Structuring Facility, and Screen
Definition Facility licensed programs without leaving ISPF.

Online tutorial
Learning to use ISPF is made easier by the online help and tutorial facilities, which are available while
using ISPF.
For example, if you need help filling in the data requested by an ISPF utility, you can use the tutorial to
help you understand the data entry requirements for that utility.

Supported data types

ISPF supports partitioned (PDS), sequential (SEQ), and partitioned extended (PDSE) data sets. These data
sets can be used in any of the ISPF options, such as Edit and Browse. ISPF does not support:
• Data sets with a record format of variable block spanned (VBS)
• Direct access data sets
• Multivolume data sets for the ISRLEMX program, SCLM, and File Tailoring
• Generation data group (GDG) base data sets
• Deletion of data sets allocated with an esoteric device type
• Member aliases, except under the ISPF Move/Copy utility (option 3.3)
• PDSEs as the ISPF control file
• Unmovable data sets under the ISPF Move/Copy utility (option 3.3) or using the LMMOVE or LMCOPY
service
• Data sets allocated with the BUFNO parameter (ISPF handles its own buffering)
• Browse for packed multivolume data sets.
ISPF provides partial support for VSAM data sets and tape data sets.
• You can create and delete VSAM data sets and obtain VSAM data set information.
• VSAM data sets are supported for Edit, Browse, and View if the ISPF Configuration table has been
customized to enable such support.
• You can define an interface to an external utility such as DFSMSrmm that the Data Set List utility (Option
3.4) can use to process data sets stored on tape or some other removable media. The interface is
configured in the ISPF configuration table. It enables the Data Set List utility to call the tape or
removable media interface for these line commands:
I
Information

Overview of ISPF 3
Running ISPF

S
Short Information
D
Delete
R
Rename
C
Catalog
M
Member List
P
Print
X
Print Index
CO
Copy
MO
Move
ISPF provides support for z/OS UNIX directories and files in the ISPF Edit and Browse options as well as
in the ISPF services BROWSE, EDIT and VIEW. The z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (option 3.17) supports
processing of directories and files in a z/OS UNIX directory structure.
ISPF requires exclusive enqueues on data sets for many of its functions. If a data set is allocated as
SHAREd to a user and then is operated on by one of these functions, the allocation will be converted to
OLD by MVS dynamic allocation. This allocation of OLD may remain after ISPF frees its enqueue. This is a
restriction of the MVS operating system.

Member name conventions

Members created through ISPF must follow this naming convention:
• The first character must be alphabetic or special (@ # $)
• Characters 2-8 must be alphabetic, numeric, or special (@ # $)
Special characters are as defined in the U.S. English code page (037):

@ (X'7C'), # (X'7B'), $ (X'5B')

All member names created within ISPF are converted to uppercase. If you create members outside of
ISPF that do not meet these conventions, they are displayed in ISPF member lists and can be selected
from those lists. These member names can also be specified for the Browse service with the exception of
member names containing lowercase alphabetics. (ISPF converts the member name to uppercase before
searching for the member and therefore cannot process a lowercase member.) Member names not
meeting the ISPF naming convention are not supported for the other ISPF services.
Note: ISPF does not support using option M (member list) from a data set list and then selecting E to edit
a member whose name contains lowercase letters. ISPF uses the Edit service in this case, and its services
do not support lowercase member names.

Running ISPF
As an interactive dialog, ISPF communicates with you through panels and messages. Ordinarily, the first
panel you see when you enter the ISPF command is the ISPF Primary Option Menu, shown in Figure 2 on
page 6. Panels display data, selection lists, and data-entry fields, such as a data set name or an ISPF
command.

4 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Running ISPF

ISPF responds interactively to the information or command you enter by displaying another panel,
displaying a message, or carrying out a command. For more information about how panels and messages
are displayed, see “Understanding ISPF panels” on page 16.
One helpful aspect of your interaction with ISPF is the online tutorial. If you need information about using
the online tutorial, see the topic about ISPF Tutorial Panels in z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and
Reference.

Starting ISPF
To start ISPF:
1. Log on to TSO.
2. When the READY prompt appears, type ISPF or PDF and press Enter.
If your installation has established an alias for ISPF, such as SPF, you can enter that instead.
The ISPF and PDF commands are aliases of ISPF module ISRPCP. When you run ISRPCP or one of its
aliases with no parameters, ISPF is started through this command:

ISPSTART PANEL(default_primary_panel) NEWAPPL(ISR)

The default primary panel is usually ISR@PRIM, the ISPF Primary Option Menu (see Figure 2 on page
6).
You can specify any of the ISPSTART parameters when invoking ISPF, PDF, or ISRPCP. However, if you do
this you must ensure that you specify all the parameters that ISPSTART needs to run your application in
the correct environment. This is because only those parameters you specify are passed to ISPSTART. For
example, if you specify:

ISPF NEWAPPL(ABC)

ISPF is invoked with this command:

ISPSTART NEWAPPL(ABC)

Note that in this case ISPF does not pass PANEL(ISR@PRIM), part of its normal default string, to
ISPSTART. Because the ISPSTART command generated does not contain a PANEL(…), PGM(…) or CMD(…)
keyword, there is no primary panel to display.
For information about the syntax and options for ISPSTART, including the rules for specifying or overriding
the default primary panel, refer to the z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference.

The Primary Option Menu panel

Figure 2 on page 6 shows the first panel, the ISPF Primary Option Menu, with the license information.

Overview of ISPF 5
Running ISPF

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Primary Option Menu

0 Settings Terminal and user parameters User ID . : USERID

1 View Display source data or listings Time. . . : 11:38
2 Edit Create or change source data Terminal. : 3278
3 Utilities Perform utility functions Screen. . : 1
4 Foreground Interactive language processing Language. : ENGLISH
5 Batch Submit job for language processing Appl ID . : ISR
6 Command Enter TSO or Workstation commands TSO logon : ISPF
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing TSO prefix: USERID
9 IBM Products IBM program development products System ID : MVS8
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ r MVS acct. : IBMGSA
│ Licensed Materials - Property of IBM │ Release . : ISPF 7.3
│ 5650-ZOS Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2017. │
│ All rights reserved. │ s
│ US Government Users Restricted Rights - │
│ Use, duplication or disclosure restricted │
│ by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp. │
⋘────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 2. ISPF Primary Option Menu (ISR@PRIM) with license information

Press the Enter key to dismiss the license information. The full Primary Option Menu is displayed.

Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Primary Option Menu

0 Settings Terminal and user parameters User ID . : USERID

1 View Display source data or listings Time. . . : 11:49
2 Edit Create or change source data Terminal. : 3278
3 Utilities Perform utility functions Screen. . : 1
4 Foreground Interactive language processing Language. : ENGLISH
5 Batch Submit job for language processing Appl ID . : ISR
6 Command Enter TSO or Workstation commands TSO logon : ISPF
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing TSO prefix: USERID
9 IBM Products IBM program development products System ID : MVS8
10 SCLM SW Configuration Library Manager MVS acct. : IBMGSA
11 Workplace ISPF Object/Action Workplace Release . : ISPF 7.3
12 z/OS System z/OS system programmer applications
13 z/OS User z/OS user applications

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Figure 3. ISPF Primary Option Menu (ISR@PRIM)

ISPF Primary Options

When you select one of these options, ISPF displays the selected panel. These options are described in
detail in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II. Brief descriptions follow:

6 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Running ISPF

Option
Description
0
Settings displays and changes selected ISPF parameters, such as terminal characteristics and
function keys.
For more information, see the Settings (Option 0) topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.
1
View displays data using the View or Browse function. You can use View or Browse to look at (but not
change) large data sets such as compiler listings. You can scroll the data up, down, left, or right. If you
are using Browse, a FIND command, entered on the command line, allows you to search the data for a
character string. If you are using View, you can use all the commands and macros available to you in
the Edit function.
For more information, see the View (Option 1) topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.
2
Edit allows you to create or change source data such as program code and documentation using the
ISPF full-screen editor. You can scroll the data up, down, left, or right. You can change the data by
using Edit line commands, which are entered directly on a line number, and primary commands, which
are entered on the command line.
For more information, see the Edit (Option 2) topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II, and refer to
z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros.
3
Utilities perform library and data set maintenance tasks, such as moving or copying library or data set
members, displaying or printing data set names and volume table of contents (VTOC) information,
comparing data sets, and searching for strings of data.
For more information, see the Utilities (Option 3) topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.
4
Foreground calls IBM language processing programs in the foreground.
For more information, see the Foreground (Option 4) topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.
5
Batch calls IBM language processing programs as batch jobs. ISPF generates Job Control Language
(JCL) based on information you enter and submits the job for processing.
For more information, see the Batch (Option 5) topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.
6
Command calls TSO commands, CLISTs, or REXX EXECs under ISPF.
For more information, see the Command (Option 6) topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.
7
Dialog Test tests individual ISPF dialog components, such as panels, messages, and dialog functions
(programs, commands, menus).
For more information, see the Dialog Test (Option 7) topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.
9
IBM Products allows you to select other installed IBM program development products on your
system. Products supported are:
• Tivoli Information Management
• COBOL Structuring Facility foreground dialog (COBOL/SF)
• Screen Definition Facility II (SDF II) licensed program
• Screen Definition Facility II-P (SDF II-P) licensed program.
For more information, see the IBM Products (Option 9) topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.

Overview of ISPF 7
Running ISPF

10
SCLM controls, maintains, and tracks all of the software components of an application.
For more information, see the z/OS ISPF Software Configuration and Library Manager Guide and
Reference.
11
Workplace gives you access to the ISPF Workplace, which combines many of the ISPF functions onto
one object-action panel.
For more information, see the ISPF Object/Action Workplace (Option 11) topic in the z/OS ISPF User's
Guide Vol II.
X
EXIT leaves ISPF using the log and list defaults. You can change these defaults from the Log/List pull-
down on the ISPF Settings panel action bar.

Primary Option Menu action bar choices

The Primary Option Menu action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
This choice is available from most panels within ISPF. It displays many of the options listed on the
Primary Option Menu panel. See the topic about the Primary Option Menu in the z/OS ISPF User's
Guide Vol II for details on each choice.
Utilities
This choice is available from most panels within ISPF. It displays the options listed on the Utility
Selection panel (Option 3). See the topic about the Primary Option Menu in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide
Vol II for details on each choice.
Compilers
The Compilers pull-down provides access to the foreground and background compilers listed under
options 4 and 5, as well as the ISPPREP (Preprocessed Panel) utility and the ISPDTLC (Dialog Tag
Language Conversion) utility.
Options
The Options pull-down provides access to many ISPF settings, including CUA attributes and colors,
keylists, and point-and-shoot fields, and the Dialog Test Application ID pop-up. See the topic about
Settings (Option 0) in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II for details on each choice.
Status
The Status pull-down enables you to control what is displayed in the status area of the Primary Option
Menu.
Note: The current setting is shown as an unavailable choice. That is, in non-GUI mode it is colored
blue (the default) with an asterisk as the first digit of the selection number. In GUI mode, the choice is
grayed.
See the topic about the status area on the Primary Option Menu in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II for
more information about using these choices to tailor the status area.
Help
The Help pull-down provides access to the online help and tutorial topics for the main ISPF options.

User profiles
ISPF stores information in your user profile. This allows ISPF to insert a value in panel input fields by
using the values you last entered on either the same panel or a similar type of panel. Sometimes default
values are provided if you have not specified otherwise. Information maintained in your user profile
includes:
• Project name, group names, and type

1 This information is maintained separately for SCLM.

8 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Running ISPF

• Job statement information 1

• SYSOUT class for printed output 1
• Defaults for list and log allocation and processing
• Terminal characteristics and function key definitions
• Edit profiles, including mask, tabs, and bounds
• Current scroll amount for Browse, Edit, Data Set List, and member lists 1
• Processing options for each of the language processors
• Data set allocation/information parameters.
ISPF maintains this information automatically from one session to another. If you are a new user, you
have to enter certain information the first time. But then, you simply review the information and make
whatever changes you want before proceeding.
ISPF maintains sets of job statements for:
• JCL for printing the Log and List data sets
• The Hardcopy utility (3.6)
• The Outlist utility (3.8)
• The SuperC utility (3.12)
• The SuperCE utility (3.13)
• The Foreground Print Options panel (option 4, excluding SCRIPT/VS)
• The Batch option (5)
• The SCLM option (10)
• SCRIPT/VS draft output (4.9)
• SCRIPT/VS final output (4.9)
• Ending ISPF
Thus, you can provide different job statement parameters for each of these functions. For more
information, see “Job statement information” on page 151.

Getting help
The HELP command (F1/13) shows you general information about an ISPF system command, ISPF
option, or panel, or offers more information about a message that has been displayed in the upper-right
corner of the screen.
For short messages, HELP displays a one-line explanation. To get further information, enter the HELP
command a second time for the appropriate section of the tutorial. Long messages display (by default) in
a pop-up window. Enter END (F3/15) or RETURN (F4/16) to return to the screen that you were viewing
when you entered the HELP command.

Ending an ISPF function or ISPF

To end an ISPF function without ending ISPF, enter END or RETURN.
Note:
1. If you are using the Hardcopy utility (option 3.6) or the Batch option (option 5), entering END or
RETURN submits your job for processing. Type CANCEL (or press F12) to leave the Hardcopy utility
without submitting a job.
2. If a SuperC or Search-For member list is displayed, END processes any members you have selected.
Enter CANCEL or RETURN to leave one of these member lists without processing your selections.
To end ISPF from the ISPF Primary Option Menu, you can use the:
• EXIT command (F3)

Overview of ISPF 9
Running a sample ISPF session

• END command
• RETURN command
• Exit option (X).
If the display screen is split, taking one of the actions listed ends ISPF on the active logical screen only.
See z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference for more information.

Exit option (X)

The Exit option ends ISPF using any defaults for processing log and list data sets that you have specified
using the Log/List pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel action bar. If you have not specified any defaults
and if a log or list data set has been generated, the Exit option displays the Specify Disposition of Log and
List Data Sets panel.

Using the Exit option (X) with the jump function

If the current primary options panel has been coded to select the EXIT command for the X selection, you
can use the jump function. Enter =X from any panel to immediately leave the current primary options
panel. If there is only one ISPF logical screen active and that logical screen has only one primary option
panel in effect, =X exits ISPF entirely.
ISPF recognizes =XALL as an extended version of =X. When you enter =XALL, ISPF propagates an =X to all
active logical screens to request the termination of all logical screens and the exit of ISPF entirely.
Note: In the situation where a logical screen is running an application that does not support the =X
command, ISPF suspends the =XALL termination processing at that logical screen. If you perform
additional processing in that logical screen before you terminate it, the =XALL termination processing
remains suspended. When that application is terminated, =XALL processing continues for any remaining
logical screens.

Running a sample ISPF session

This topic provides an example of an ISPF session. For new users, it is a quick introduction to ISPF. For
users with previous ISPF experience, it is a quick review. It can also be used to demonstrate that ISPF has
been properly installed and is operational.
The scenario requires the installation of a data set named ISP.SISPSAMP. This data set is included on the
ISPF basic distribution tape and should contain these four members:
ISRASM
Sample assembler source
ISRCOBOL
Sample COBOL source
ISRFORT
Sample FORTRAN source
ISRPLI
Sample PL/I source.
During this scenario, member ISRASM is copied from ISP.SISPSAMP to a user data set. The other three
members are not used.

Table 1. A sample ISPF session

Action Result
1. Log on to TSO. READY is displayed on your screen.
2. Type ISPF (or the appropriate alias) and press Enter. The ISPF Primary Option Menu is displayed.

10 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Running a sample ISPF session

Table 1. A sample ISPF session (continued)

Action Result
3. On the Option line, type 3 to select the Utilities option. The Utility Selection Panel is displayed.
Then press Enter.
4. On the Option line, type 2 to select the Data Set utility. The Data Set Utility panel is displayed.
Then press Enter.
5. On the Option line, type A to allocate a new data set. The Allocate New Data Set panel is displayed. Note:
Specify an ISPF library by typing this information, but The Project name must be defined as a valid high-
substitute your first name in the Group field: level identifier on your installation. Generally, user-
ids are defined as such. If this is not true for your
Project . . your_user_id installation, ask your system programmer what
Group . . . name
Type . . . . ASM project names are valid for your system.

Now press Enter.

6. Type the information shown. Data set your_user_id.name.ASM is allocated on

scratch volume. The Data Set Utility panel is
Note: Leave ALL fields blank except:
displayed.
Space units . . . . . . TRKS
Primary quantity. . . . 2
Secondary quantity. . . 1
Directory blocks. . . . 1
Record format . . . . . FB
Record length . . . . . 80
Block size . . . . . . 3120

Now press Enter.

7. Select option A again and specify this ISPF library, The Allocate New Data Set panel is displayed.
again substituting your first name in the Group field:

Project . . your_user_id
Group . . . name
Type . . . . OBJ

Press Enter.

8. Leave everything the same. Just press Enter. Data set your_user_id.name.OBJ is allocated. The
Data Set Utility panel is displayed.
9. Press F3. The Utility Selection Panel is displayed.
10. Press F3 again. The ISPF Primary Option Menu is displayed.
11. Type 3.3 to select the Move/Copy utility, bypassing The Move/Copy Utility panel is displayed.
the Utility Selection Menu. Press Enter.
12. Now you will copy a data set. On the Option line, type A panel titled COPY FROM ISP.SISPSAMP(ISRASM)
C to select Copy data set or member(s). Then, is displayed.
under From Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set:,
enter this data set name:

Data Set Name . . . 'ISP.SISPSAMP(ISRASM)'

Press Enter.

Overview of ISPF 11
Running a sample ISPF session

Table 1. A sample ISPF session (continued)

Action Result
13. Under To ISPF Library:, type these values: Member ISRASM is copied from data set
ISP.SISPSAMP to ISPF library
Project . . your_user_id your_user_id.name.ASM. Then, the Move/Copy
Group . . . name
Type . . . . ASM Utility panel is displayed.

Press Enter.

14. Press F3. The ISPF Primary Option Menu is displayed.

15. Now you will browse member ISRASM. On the Option The View Entry Panel is displayed. Select Browse
line, type 1 to select View and press Enter. Mode.
16. Type these details under ISPF LIBRARY: A member list is displayed, showing ISRASM as the
only member in the your_user_id.name.ASM library.
Project . . your_user_id
Group . . . name
Type . . . . ASM

Note: Leave the Member field blank.

Press Enter.

17. Move the cursor to the left of ISRASM. Then type S to A panel titled BROWSE your_user_id.name.ASM
select ISRASM and press Enter. (ISRASM) is displayed. This is the first page of
member ISRASM.
18. Press F8 to scroll ahead one page. The second page of ISRASM is displayed.
19. Press F7 to scroll backward one page. The first page of ISRASM is displayed.
20. Type FIND COMMENT on the Command line and The cursor moves to the first occurrence of the
press Enter. character string COMMENT and the string is
intensified. Also, the message CHARS 'COMMENT'
FOUND is displayed in the upper-right corner of the
screen.
21. To find the next occurrence of COMMENT, press F5, The cursor moves to the second occurrence of
the RFIND command. COMMENT and once again the string is intensified.
22. Press F3. The member list is displayed.
23. Press F3 again. The View Entry Panel is displayed.
24. Press F3 one more time. The ISPF Primary Option Menu is displayed.
25. Now you will edit member ISRASM. On the Option The Edit Entry Panel is displayed.
line, type 2 to select Edit and press Enter.
26. Type ISRASM in the Member field and press Enter. A panel titled EDIT
your_user_id.name.ASM(ISRASM) is displayed. This
is the first page of member ISRASM.
27. On the Command line, type FIND COMMENT and The cursor moves to the first occurrence of the
press Enter to find the line containing the character string character string and the line number is intensified.
COMMENT.
28. Delete COMMENT by pressing the End key. COMMENT is erased. Any characters to the right of
COMMENT are erased, also.
29. Press F5 to find the next occurrence of COMMENT. The cursor moves to the second occurrence of
COMMENT and the line number is intensified.

12 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Running a sample ISPF session

Table 1. A sample ISPF session (continued)

Action Result
30. Move the cursor to the sequence number of the line The line is repeated.
below COMMENT, then move the cursor up one line.
Repeat the COMMENT line by typing R over the first digit of
the line number and pressing Enter.
31. Try out more Edit commands if you like, but HAVE FUN!
remember: this program will be assembled later.
32. Press F3. Member ISRASM is saved in data set
your_user_id.name.ASM and a listing of the member
is placed in the ISPF list data set. The Edit Entry
Panel is displayed.
33. Press F3 again. The ISPF Primary Option Menu is displayed.
34. Move the cursor to Help on the action bar. Press The beginning of the ISPF tutorial is displayed.
Enter. On the resulting pop-up window, select 18. Follow the directions to learn more about ISPF.
When you have finished, press F3 to return to the
ISPF Primary Option Menu.

Table 2. Finishing the sample session

Action Result
35. With the ISPF Primary Option Menu on the screen, The ISPF Specify Disposition of Log and List Data
press F3. Sets panel is displayed.
36. Select the process option to print and delete both the Data sets will be printed, then deleted through
log and list data sets, and fill in the job statement batch jobs submitted by ISPF. The job name is
information as required by your installation. Press Enter. displayed at the bottom of the screen.
37. You are now out of ISPF. To leave TSO, type LOGOFF This is the end of this usage scenario.
and press Enter.

Overview of ISPF 13
Running a sample ISPF session

14 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

Chapter 2. The ISPF user interface

ISPF provides an action bar-driven interface that exploits many of the usability features of Common User
Access (CUA) interfaces. For more information about CUA, see Object-Oriented Interface Design: IBM
Common User Access Guidelines.
These action bars give you another way to move around in ISPF, as well as the ability to nest commands.
Command nesting allows you to suspend an activity while you perform a new one rather than having to
end a function to perform another function.
This chapter primarily explains the action bar-driven interface and the use of ISPF's graphical user
interface (GUI). If you use a non-programmable terminal to access ISPF and you do not want to use the
command nesting function, you can make selections by typing in a selection number and pressing Enter.

Some terms you should know

These terms are used in this document:
action bar
The area at the top of an ISPF panel that contains choices that give you access to actions available on
that panel. When you select an action bar choice, ISPF displays a pull-down menu.
command procedure
A CLIST or REXX exec
data set
A sequential or partitioned data set
ellipsis
Three dots that follow a pull-down choice. When you select a choice that contains an ellipsis, ISPF
displays a pop-up window.
function key
In previous releases of ISPF, a programmed function (PF) key. This is a change in terminology only.
library
A partitioned data set
menu
A selection panel
mnemonics
Action bar choices can be defined with a underscored letter in the action bar choice text. In host mode
you can access the action bar choice with the ACTIONS command and parameter x, where x is the
underscored letter in the action bar choice text. In GUI mode you can use a hot key to access a choice
on the action bar; that is, you can press the ALT key in combination with the letter that is underscored
in the action bar choice text.
modal pop-up window
A type of window that requires you to interact with the panel in the pop-up before continuing. This
includes canceling the window or supplying information requested.
modeless pop-up window
A type of window that allows you to interact with the dialog that produced the pop-up before
interacting with the pop-up itself.
point-and-shoot text
Text on a screen that is cursor-sensitive. See “Point-and-Shoot text fields” on page 24 for more
information.
pop-up window
A bordered temporary window that displays over another panel.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 15

Understanding ISPF Panels

pull-down menu
A list of numbered choices extending from the selection you made on the action bar. The action bar
selection is highlighted; for example, Utilities in Figure 6 on page 22 appears highlighted on your
screen. You can select an action either by typing in its number and pressing Enter or by selecting the
action with your cursor. ISPF displays the requested panel. If your choice contains an ellipsis (…),
ISPF displays a pop-up window. When you exit this panel or pop-up, ISPF closes the pull-down and
returns you to the panel from which you made the initial action bar selection.
push button
A rectangle with text inside. Push buttons are used in windows for actions that occur immediately
when the push button is selected (available only when you are running ISPF in GUI mode).
select
In conjunction with point-and-shoot text fields and action bar choices, this means moving the cursor
to a field and simulating Enter.
terminal
Any of the supported display devices

Understanding ISPF panels

A panel is a predefined display image that you see on a display screen. ISPF formats all panels to fit on a
24-line by 80-character screen. On a 3278 Model 3 or 4, data that you can scroll occupies the full length
of the screen (32 or 43 lines). On a 3278 Model 5, ISPF normally displays information in default mode;
that is, 24 lines by 80 characters, with the same size characters as other models. "Browse" and "Edit"
data that is wider than 80 characters is displayed with the smaller native mode characters, that is, up to
132 per line. You can use the Settings option (0) to override the automatic switching of modes.

Panel format
Figure 4 on page 16 shows how ISPF formats the first three and last few lines of each display:

Action Bar
───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Panel ID Title Short Message

Long Message
Option ===> Scroll ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap

Figure 4. Panel Format

Note: The "Panel display CUA mode" field on the ISPF Settings panel determines where the Command or
Option line and long messages are displayed. The default setting selects "Panel display CUA mode",
which causes the Command or Option line to be displayed on the bottom of the panel. The default setting
also selects "Long message in pop-up", which causes long messages to be displayed in a pop-up window
directly above the Command or Option line. To display the command or option line and long messages at
the top of the panel, select option 0, deselect the "Panel display CUA mode" field, and deselect the
"Command line at bottom" field. See z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference for more
information about the "Panel display CUA mode" and "Command line placement" fields.
The fields on Figure 4 on page 16 function as follows:
Action Bar
The action bar provides access to pull-down menus that give you a new and faster way to move
around in the product as well as access to command stacking. See Figure 6 on page 22 for more
information about using the action bar.

16 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Understanding ISPF Panels

Panel ID
This area can be overlaid by the system commands SYSNAME, USERID, SCRNAME, or PANELID. The
data displayed can be up to 17 characters wide. If none of these commands is in effect, data from the
panel title line is displayed.
Note: For more information about the system commands PANELID, SCRNAME, SYSNAME, USERID,
and the order of priority that determines what is displayed in this 17-character area (if you specify
more than one of these commands), see “ISPF system commands” on page 72.
Title
Identifies the function being carried out and, where appropriate, the library or data set information.
Short Message
Shows:
• Current line for Browse, and column positions for View, Browse, and Edit.
• Current row position in a table display if the short message area is not overlaid by a function-
requested message.
• Successful completion of a processing function.
• Error conditions (with an audible alarm, if one is installed). See z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide
and Reference for information about coding an alarm.
Command/Option
Allows you to enter a command or, on a menu, to enter either a command or an option.
Scroll
Indicates the scroll amount (if scrolling applies). You can type over it to change it. The valid scroll
amounts are:
nnnn
A number of lines or columns (between 0 and 9999).
CSR
Move the line or column that contains the cursor to the edge of the scrollable area. For example, if
you scroll right, the cursor will be positioned at the left side of the scrollable area. If you scroll
down, the cursor will be positioned at the top of the scrollable area.
DATA
Scroll by one line or column less than a full page. For example, if you scroll up, the line that was
displayed at the top of the page becomes the bottom line in the new page of data.
HALF
Scroll by half the number of lines or columns in the scrollable area.
MAX
Scroll to the limit of the data. For example, if you enter MAX and scroll down, the last page of data
is displayed. If you enter MAX and scroll up, the first page of data is displayed. Note that MAX only
applies to the next scroll command. When the MAX scroll command has been processed, the
scroll amount reverts to the previous setting.
PAGE
Scroll by the full height (if scrolling up down) or width (if scrolling left or right).
Long Message
Displays an explanation of error conditions in a pop-up window when you enter the HELP command
(see “Getting help” on page 9). On some displays, data may be overlaid temporarily by a long
message.
Function Keys
Displays settings for the function keys. These settings are controlled through the Function keys pull-
down on the action bar on the ISPF Settings panel.

Panel types
When using ISPF, you see three basic types of panels:

The ISPF user interface 17

Understanding ISPF Panels

• Menus (selection panels)

• Data-entry panels
• Scrollable data displays.

Menus
A menu, or selection panel, allows you to type a number or letter in the Option field and press Enter to
select one of the listed items. The number or letter can be typed in either uppercase or lowercase.
Allowable numbers and letters are shown in high intensity. You can also enter ISPF commands. See Figure
5 on page 18 for an example of a menu.
Note: If the word BLANK or blank is listed, leave the Option field blank and press Enter to select that
option. Do not type the word blank.

1 Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Primary Option Menu
2
0 Settings Terminal and user parameters User ID . : USERID
1 View Display source data or listings Time. . . : 13:13
2 Edit Create or change source data Terminal. : 3278
3 Utilities Perform utility functions Screen. . : 1
4 Foreground Interactive language processing Language. : ENGLISH
5 Batch Submit job for language processing Appl ID . : ISR
6 Command Enter TSO or Workstation commands TSO logon : ISPF
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing TSO prefix: USERID
9 IBM Products IBM program development products System ID : MVS8
10 SCLM SW Configuration Library Manager MVS acct. : IBMGSA
11 Workplace ISPF Object/Action Workplace Release . : ISPF 5.9
12 z/OS System z/OS system programmer applications
13 z/OS User z/OS user applications

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
3 F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

1
Action bar. You can select any of the action bar choices and display a pull-down.
2
Options Menu. The fields in this column are point-and-shoot text fields.
3
Function Key bar. Displays the Function Keys that are active on the current panel.
Figure 5. Primary Option Menu showing key features

Data entry panels

A data-entry panel is a panel on which you specify information, such as data set names, job statement
parameters, and language processing options. If you do not enter a required value or if you enter
inconsistent values, ISPF prompts you with a message.
Some data-entry fields retain their previous values. If so, the next time you use the panel, you do not have
to type them again. Just press Enter. If you do not want those values, type over them and then press
Enter.
The retained values come from your user profile, which ISPF automatically builds and maintains across
sessions. See “User profiles” on page 8 for more information about user profiles.

18 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Understanding ISPF Panels

Edit modes and defaults are also maintained in the Edit portion of your user profile. See z/OS ISPF Edit
and Edit Macros for more information.

Option selection
You can select an ISPF option three ways:
• Select a choice from one of the pull-downs on the action bar. See Figure 6 on page 22 for more
information.
• Select one of the point-and-shoot fields. See “Point-and-Shoot text fields” on page 24 for more
information.
• Type an option number on the Option line and press Enter.
Many options have a secondary list of options. To bypass the second menu, type two selections,
separating them with a period, on the ISPF Primary Option Menu. For example, entering 3.1 on the ISPF
Primary Option Menu is the same as entering 3 on the ISPF Primary Option Menu and 1 on the Utility
Selection Panel.
An even faster way to select an option is to bypass both the ISPF Primary Option Menu and the secondary
menus. To do this, include your options in the ISPF (or alias) command. For example:
ISPF 2
To go directly to the Edit option.
ISPF 3.1
To go directly to the Library utility (3.1).

Action bars
Action bars give you another way to move through ISPF. Most ISPF panels have action bars at the top; the
choices appear on the screen in white by default. Many panels also have point-and-shoot text fields,
which appear in turquoise by default. The panel shown in Figure 5 on page 18 has both.
If you use a non-programmable terminal to access ISPF and you do not want to take advantage of the
command nesting function, you can make selections by typing a selection number and pressing Enter.
If the cursor is located somewhere on the panel, there are several ways to move it to the action bar:
• Use the cursor movement keys to manually place the cursor on an action bar choice.
• Type ACTIONS on the command line and press Enter to move the cursor to the first action bar choice.
• Press F10 (Actions) or the Home key to move the cursor to the first action bar choice.
If mnemonics are defined for action bar choices, you can:
– In 3270 mode, on the command line, type ACTIONS and the mnemonic letter that corresponds to an
underscored letter in the action bar choice text. This results in the display of the pull-down menu for
that action bar choice.
– In 3270 mode, on the command line enter the mnemonic letter that corresponds to an underscored
letter in the action bar choice text, and press the function key assigned to the ACTIONS command.
This results in the display of the pull-down menu for that action bar choice.
– In GUI mode, you can use a hot key to access a choice on an action bar or on a pull-down menu; that
is, you can press the ALT key in combination with the mnemonic letter that is underscored in the
choice text to activate the text.
Use the tab key to move the cursor among the action bar choices. If you are running in GUI mode (see
“Running in GUI mode” on page 30, use the right and left cursor keys.
Note:

The ISPF user interface 19

Understanding ISPF Panels

1. ISPF does not provide a mouse emulator program. This document uses select in conjunction with
point-and-shoot text fields and action bar choices to mean moving the cursor to a field and simulating
Enter.
Some users program their mouse emulators as follows:
• Mouse button 1: position the cursor to the pointer and simulate Enter
• Mouse button 2: simulate F12 (Cancel)
2. If you want the Home key to position the cursor at the first input field on an ISPF panel, type
SETTINGS on any command line and press Enter to display the ISPF Settings panel. Deselect the "Tab
to action bar choices" option.
3. If you are running in GUI mode, the Home key takes you to the beginning of the current field.
When you select one of the choices on the action bar, ISPF displays a pull-down menu.
The action bar choices available vary from panel to panel, as do the choices available from their pull-
downs. However, Menu and Utilities are basic action bar choices, and the choices on their pull-down
menus are always the same.

Menu action bar choice

The following choices are available from the Menu pull-down:
Settings
Displays the ISPF Settings panel
View
Displays the View Entry panel
Edit
Displays the Edit Entry panel
ISPF Command Shell
Displays the ISPF Command Shell panel
Dialog Test
Displays the Dialog Test Primary Option panel
Other IBM Products
Displays the Additional IBM Program Development Products panel
SCLM
Displays the SCLM Main Menu
ISPF Workplace
Displays the Workplace entry panel
Status Area
Displays the ISPF Status panel
Exit
Exits ISPF

Utilities action bar choice

The following choices are available from the Utilities pull-down:
Library
Displays the Library Utility panel
Data Set
Displays the Data Set Utility panel
Move/Copy
Displays the Move/Copy Utility panel
Data Set List
Displays the Data Set List Options panel

20 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Understanding ISPF Panels

Reset Statistics
Displays the Reset ISPF Statistics panel
Hardcopy
Displays the Hardcopy Utility panel
Download
Displays the panel that enables you to download workstation clients and other files from the host
Outlist
Displays the Outlist Utility panel
Commands
Displays the Command Table Utility panel
Reserved
Reserved for future use by ISPF; an unavailable choice
Format
Displays the Format Specification panel
SuperC
Displays the SuperC Utility panel
SuperCE
Displays the SuperCE Utility panel
Search-for
Displays the Search-For Utility panel
Search-forE
Displays the Search-ForE Utility panel
Figure 6 on page 22 shows the pull-down menu displayed when you select Utilities on the ISPF Primary
Option Menu action bar.

The ISPF user interface 21

Understanding ISPF Panels

1
The selected action bar choice is highlighted.
Figure 6. Panel with an Action Bar Pull-Down Menu

To select a choice from the Utilities pull-down menu, type its number in the entry field (underlined) and
press Enter or select the choice. To cancel a pull-down menu without making a selection, press F12
(Cancel). For example, if you select choice 9, ISPF displays the Command Table Utility pop-up, as shown
in Figure 8 on page 24.
Note: If a choice displays in blue (the default) with an asterisk as the first digit of the selection number (if
you are running in GUI mode, the choice will be grayed), the choice is unavailable for one of these
reasons:
• Recursive entry is not permitted here
• The choice is the current state; for example, the Status is currently set to Session in Figure 7 on page
23.

22 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Understanding ISPF Panels

Figure 7. An Unavailable Choice on a Pull-Down

Interaction of command and action bar choice

If you enter a command on the command line before selecting an action bar choice, the command is
processed and the pull-down menu is not displayed. The CANCEL, END, and RETURN commands are
exceptions. These three commands are not processed and the cursor is repositioned to the first input field
in the panel body. If there is no input field, the cursor is repositioned under the action bar area. If you are
running in GUI mode and select an action bar choice, any existing command on the command line is
ignored.

The ISPF user interface 23

Understanding ISPF Panels

Figure 8. Pop-Up Selected from an Action Bar Pull-Down

Point-and-Shoot text fields

Point-and-shoot text fields are cursor-sensitive; if you select a field, the action described in that field is
performed. For example, if you select Option 0, Settings, in Figure 9 on page 25, ISPF displays the ISPF
Settings panel.
Note:
1. If you have entered a command on the command line, it is processed before any point-and-shoot
command unless you are running in GUI mode.
2. As the cursor-sensitive portion of a field often extends past the field name, you may want to make this
area visible. To display point-and-shoot fields in reverse video, use the PSCOLOR command to set
Highlight to REVERSE.
3. You can use the Tab key to position the cursor to point-and-shoot fields by selecting the "Tab to point-
and-shoot fields" option on the ISPF Settings panel (Option 0).

24 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Understanding ISPF Panels

1 Menu Utilities Compilers Options Status Help

──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISPF Primary Option Menu
2 3
0 Settings Terminal and user parameters User ID . : MBURNS
1 View Display source data or listings Time. . . : 12:29
2 Edit Create or change source data Terminal. : 3278
3 Utilities Perform utility functions Screen. . : 1
4 Foreground Interactive language processing Language. : ENGLISH
5 Batch Submit job for language processing Appl ID . : ISR
6 Command Enter TSO or Workstation commands TSO logon : ISPF
7 Dialog Test Perform dialog testing TSO prefix: MBURNS
9 IBM Products IBM program development products System ID : ISD1
10 SCLM SW Configuration Library Manager MVS acct. : IBMGSA
11 Workplace ISPF Object/Action Workplace Release . : ISPF 5.5

Enter X to Terminate using Log/List defaults

Option ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

1
Action bar. You can select any of the action bar choices and display a pull-down.
2
Options. The fields in this column are point-and-shoot text fields.
3
Dynamic status area. You can specify what you want to be displayed in this area.
Figure 9. Panel with an Action Bar and Point-and-Shoot Fields

Function keys
ISPF uses CUA-compliant definitions for function keys F1-F12 (except inside the Edit function). F13-F24
are the same as in ISPF Version 3. By default you see the CUA definitions because your "Primary range"
field is set to 1 (Lower - 1 to 12).
To use non-CUA-compliant keys, select the "Tailor function key display" choice from the Function keys
pull-down on the ISPF Settings (option 0) panel action bar. On the Tailor Function Key Definition Display
panel, specify 2 (Upper - 13 to 24) in the "Primary range" field.
These function keys help you navigate in ISPF:
F1
Help. Displays Help information. If you press F1 (and it is set to Help) after ISPF displays a short
message, a long message displays in a pop-up window.
F2
Split. Divides the screen into two logical screens separated by a horizontal line or changes the
location of the horizontal line.
Note: If you are running in GUI mode, each logical screen is displayed in a separate window.
F3
Exit (from a pull-down). Exits the panel underneath a pull-down.
F3
End. Ends the current function.
F7
Backward. Moves the screen up the scroll amount.
F8
Forward. Moves the screen down the scroll amount.

The ISPF user interface 25

Understanding ISPF Panels

F9
Swap. Moves the cursor to where it was previously positioned on the other logical screen of a split-
screen pair.
F10
Actions. Moves the cursor to the action bar. If you press F10 a second time, the cursor moves to the
command line.
F12
Cancel. Issues the Cancel command. Use this command to remove a pull-down menu if you do not
want to make a selection. F12 also moves the cursor from the action bar to the Option ==> field on the
ISPF Primary Option Menu. See z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference for cursor-
positioning rules.
F16
Return. Returns you to the ISPF Primary Option Menu or to the display from which you entered a
nested dialog. RETURN is an ISPF system command.

Selection fields
ISPF uses these CUA-compliant conventions for selection fields:
A single period (.)
Member lists that use a single period in the selection field recognize only a single selection. For
example, within the Edit function you see this on your screen:

│EDIT USER1.UTIL.CNTL Row 0000001 of 0000023 │

│ Command ===> Scroll ===> CSR │
│ Name Prompt Size Created Changed ID │
│ . ADDUSER 42 1996/12/02 2014/05/13 21:47:40 IBMUSER │
│ . ADDUSERS 21 1996/03/11 2014/02/06 07:05:30 USER3 │

You can select only one member to edit.

A single underscore (_)
Selection fields marked by a single underscore prompt you to use a slash (/) to select the choice. You
may use any nonblank character. For example, the "Panel display CUA mode" field on the ISPF
Settings panel has a single underscore for the selection field:

Options
Enter "/" to select option
_ Command line at bottom
_ Panel display CUA mode
_ Long message in pop-up

Note: In GUI mode, this type of selection field displays as a check box; that is, a square box with
associated text that represents a choice. When you select a choice, the check box is filled to indicate
that the choice is in effect. You can clear the check box by selecting the choice again.
An underscored field (____)
Member lists or text fields that use underscores in the selection field recognize multiple selections.
For example, from the Display Data Set List Option panel, you may select multiple members for print,
rename, delete, edit, browse, or view processing.

Entering commands in ISPF

ISPF provides flexibility by accepting various types of commands and having many methods for entering
them. Table 3 on page 27 provides an overview of the entry methods and commands available.

26 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Understanding ISPF Panels

Table 3. Entry Methods and Command Types

TSO Cmds, PDF
CLISTs, and DM Primary PDF Line WS
Entry Methods REXX EXECs Commands Commands Commands Commands
ISPF Command Shell X X
(option 6)
Option field X X X (1)
Command field X X X X (1)
X
Line Command fields
(1-6 characters)

X X
Line Command fields
(9 characters)

Note: (1) Available when prefixed by "WS"

For example, to use the TSO ALLOCATE command, you could enter:

Command ===> TSO ALLOCATE

Also, CLIST names and REXX exec names can be preceded by a percent (%) symbol, as in:

Option ===> TSO %CLIST

This symbol informs TSO that the command is a CLIST or REXX exec, not a TSO command.
You can also use two command entry methods not shown in the table: the PA keys and the function keys.
PA1 (ATTENTION) and PA2 (RESHOW) are hardware keys that you cannot redefine. You can use function
keys to enter all commands.

Types of commands
Three types of commands operate at three levels:
• TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs
You invoke high-level commands through the MVS/TSO operating system. These include TSO
commands, CLISTs, REXX EXECs, and the commands assigned to the PA1 and PA2 keys.
• DM component commands
You call middle-level commands through the DM component of ISPF.
• PDF component primary and line commands
You call low-level commands through the PDF component of ISPF.

TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs

ISPF gives you access to the MVS/TSO operating system by letting you enter TSO commands, CLISTs, and
REXX EXECs from within ISPF. z/OS TSO/E Command Reference contains descriptions of all TSO
commands.
You can enter most TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs from all three panel types: data entry;
menu; and scrollable data display. However, some TSO commands, such as LOGON and LOGOFF, can
cause unwanted results when you enter them from ISPF. This is also true of CLISTs and REXX EXECs that
contain these TSO commands. The rules for entering TSO Commands, CLISTs and REXX EXECS are
described in the Command (Option 6) topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.

The ISPF user interface 27

multicultural support

DM component commands
DM component commands are valid from all three types of panels. However, the validity of some
commands depends on the type of panel displayed or the type of terminal you use. For example, the scroll
commands (UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT) are valid only on scrollable data displays, and the SPLITV
command is valid only on a 3290 display terminal.
For a description of the ISPF commands, default function key settings, and the PA1 and PA2 keys, see
“ISPF system commands” on page 72.

PDF component primary and line commands

These commands are valid only when you call them within the PDF component. Exceptions are the
primary and line commands for Edit (option 2), which are defined in z/OS ISPF Edit and Edit Macros, and
those for SCLM (option 10), which are defined in z/OS ISPF Software Configuration and Library Manager
Guide and Reference. The ISPF primary option that you are using determines which commands are valid.
For example, the CAPS primary command is valid only when using the Edit option.
For information about which commands are valid for a particular option, see the relevant topic in the z/OS
ISPF User's Guide Vol II that describes the option.
PDF component primary commands can affect a complete data set or PDS member, but the line
commands can affect only one or more specified lines within a data set (unless you specify all the lines in
the data set). For example, the Edit COPY command can copy a complete data set, whereas the C or CC
Edit line command can copy only lines or blocks of lines within a data set.

Multicultural support
Note: The term "multicultural support" has replaced the previous term "National Language Support" (or
"NLS").
Multicultural support gives countries the option of translating commands and keywords so that users can
enter them in the country's national language. In addition, panels, messages, and literal modules are
provided with the product. The supported languages are German, Swiss-German, and Japanese.
When multicultural support is enabled, users can be required to enter certain keywords in the national
language and not in English.
When the Danish, French, Korean, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, Spanish, Brazilian-Portuguese,
or Italian session language is specified, its respective literal module is used. However, the ISPF product
panels and messages are displayed in English.

ISPF command syntax notation

The notation conventions for ISPF command syntax follow.
• Uppercase commands and their uppercase parameters show required entry.
• Lowercase parameters show variables (substitute your values for them).

Stacking commands
To enter more than one command, you can stack them by typing a special delimiter between them. The
default delimiter is a semicolon. Use the Settings option (0) to change the delimiter. For example, to stack
two Edit CHANGE commands, use:

Command ===> CHANGE ALL ABC XYZ;CHANGE ALL PQR GHIJK

The system variable for the delimiter is ZDEL. See the topic about system variables in the z/OS ISPF Dialog
Developer's Guide and Reference for more information about ZDEL.

28 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 multicultural support

Dual command processing

You can enter information on a command or option line in combination with pressing a related function
key. The command is called first. For example, typing 4 on the command line and pressing F7 (UP
command) is the same as typing UP 4 on the command line and pressing Enter.
If the command you type is unrelated to the command assigned to a function key you press, ISPF passes
the entry to the function in control, which either processes or ignores the entry. For example, if the Edit
function is in control, ISPF may display an error message. However, if the Tutorial is in control, the
command is ignored. ISPF processes any stacked valid commands.

Line command fields

Line command fields can take many forms. Some have headings, some do not. Most are blank, but some
contain single quotation marks or sequence numbers. For some, you type one character; for others, you
type up to nine characters (even typing over data set names). Table 4 on page 29 shows the functions
that provide the line command fields.

Table 4. Characteristics of the Line Command Field

Heading Characters Initial
Functions Providing Line Command Fields Displayed Allowed Contents
Member Selection List None 1-9 Blank
Edit (option 2) None 6 Quotes or
numbers
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) Command 9 Blank
Command Table utility (option 3.9) None 4 Quotes
Format Specification utility (option 3.11) None 1 Blank
SCRIPT/VS (option 4.9) Line Cmd 1 Quotes
Dialog Test (option 7): None 4 Quotes
Variables (option 7.3)
Tables (option 7.4)
Traces (option 7.7)
Breakpoints (option 7.8)

The line command field for member selection lists is blank and has no heading. This includes typical
member lists, which have a 1-character line command field, and the member list displayed when you use
option M of the Data Set List utility, which has a 9-character line command field.
Quotes appear when you create a new data set or member, or when you insert one or more lines.
Sequence numbers appear if you have NUMBER ON in your Edit profile.
Data set lists with 9-character line command fields allow you to type over data set names, thus extending
the length of the fields to allow you to type long TSO commands, CLIST names, and REXX exec names. For
information about entering TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs in a line command field, see the
Data Set List Utility (Option 3.4) topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II. Also, the rules for entering TSO
Commands, CLISTs and REXX EXECS from within ISPF are described in the Command (Option 6) topic in
the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.

PDF component line commands

Most PDF component line commands use only one letter, such as S, for selecting a member from a
member list. Others, such as many of the Edit line commands, use more than one letter and sometimes
allow you to add a number so the command affects more than one line. For example, the UC line
command plus the number 3, as in UC3, converts three lines to uppercase.

The ISPF user interface 29

Running in GUI mode

Another type of line command is the block line command, which affects the block of lines between and
including the lines on which the commands are entered. For example, the UCC line command, when
entered beside two different lines, converts all lines between and including the two commands to
uppercase.

Command nesting
You can use the action bars to suspend an activity while you perform a new one.
For example, if you are editing a data set and want to allocate another data set, select the Data set choice
from the Utilities pull-down on the Edit panel action bar. ISPF suspends your edit session and displays the
Data Set Utility panel. When you have allocated the new data set and ended the function, ISPF returns
you directly to your edit session.
By contrast, if you used the jump function (=3.2), ISPF would end your edit session before displaying the
Data Set Utility.

Running in GUI mode

In addition to the standard interface seen in terminals and terminal emulators, ISPF can be run from a
workstation using the display functions of your workstation operating system. In the ISPF library this is
called running in GUI mode.
The ability to run in GUI mode is provided via the ISPF Client/Server component, also known as the ISPF
Workstation Agent (WSA). The WSA is an application that runs on your local workstation and maintains a
connection between the workstation and the ISPF host. The WSA also allows you to edit host data on your
workstation and workstation data on the host. In ISPF this is called distributed editing. For more
information about distributed editing, see the 'Download Data Set to Workstation Utility (Option 3.7)'
section of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.
The ISPF WSA is supported on these platforms:
• Microsoft Windows
• AIX®

Starting a GUI session

Before you can start a GUI session, you must have performed these actions:
• Successful installation and initialization of TCP/IP or APPC.
'Appendix B: Configuring Communications for the ISPF Client/Server', in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol
I, contains procedures to help you to test whether you have satisfied this requirement.
• Successful installation of the ISPF Workstation Agent component.
See 'Appendix A: Installing the Client/Server component', in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I for
additional information.
• Initialization of the ISPF WSA component.
To initialize the WSA:
– If you have created a shortcut on your desktop that automatically launches the WSA, double-click the
icon.
If you do not have a shortcut icon:
1. Go to a command line in your operating system (Windows or UNIX).
2. Change to the directory that contains your WSA executable file.
3. Enter WSA.
The Workstation Agent window is displayed on your workstation.

30 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Running in GUI mode

Figure 10. The Workstation Agent window

This window represents the executing ISPF C/S workstation program. For more information about
this window, see “The Workstation Agent window” on page 166. You can minimize this window but
you cannot close it while ISPF is running in GUI mode.
Note: If you do not close the WSA window after you end an ISPF C/S session, you will not have to
repeat this step to start another ISPF C/S session; that is, as long as the ISPF C/S component has
been started, you can start a workstation session.
To start a GUI session:
1. Display the Initiate Workstation Connection panel, using any of these methods:
• From the Primary Option Menu panel, select Option 0 (Settings), select Workstation from the Action
Bar, then enter 1 (Workstation Connection).
• From other panels, select Menu from the Action Bar, enter 1 (Settings), then select Workstation from
the Action Bar and enter 1 (Workstation Connection).
• On the Command line in any panel, enter the WSCON command.

Figure 11. The Initiate Workstation Connection Panel

2. If necessary, type 1 in the Workstation Connection field. The remaining fields in this panel usually
contain values saved when the WSA was installed and configured. For more information about the
Workstation Connection panel, see the Settings (Option 0) topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.
3. Press Enter. The Incoming Connection dialog box is displayed.

The ISPF user interface 31

Running in GUI mode

Figure 12. WSA Connection Panel

4. Click Yes to accept the connection. The panel that was active in ISPF before you opened the
Workstation Connection panel is now displayed in the GUI dialog box.

What GUI mode looks like

This topic describes changes that you see when you run ISPF in GUI mode.
Figures Figure 13 on page 33 through Figure 18 on page 41 show the differences between ISPF panels
displayed on a 3270 emulator and a GUI display. Emulator screens shown are from the Personal
Communications Workstation Program. The GUI display panels are shown as they would be displayed on
a workstation running Windows.
Figure 13 on page 33 shows the ISPF Primary Option Menu in 3270 mode.

32 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Running in GUI mode

Figure 13. ISPF Primary Option Menu Displayed in Personal Communications

Figure 14 on page 34 shows the same panel on a workstation using ISPF WSA.

The ISPF user interface 33

Running in GUI mode

Figure 14. ISPF Primary Option Menu Displayed Using ISPF Workstation Agent

Action Bars and Pull-Down Menus

Action bars are responsive entities at the workstation; that is, pull-down menus display without
issuing an interrupt to the host so you can browse the action bars quickly and easily. If you have
entered a command on the command line, this command is ignored when you select a pull-down
choice.
Title Bars
Various types of data can be displayed in the title bar. What data appears in the title bar depends on
which of these values ISPF finds data in first:
• The value defined in the application dialog variable ZWINTTL is used if the panel is displayed in a
pop-up.
• The value defined in the application dialog variable ZAPPTTL.
• The value specified in the title variable on the TITLE parameter of the ISPSTART command.
• The value specified in the title variable on the TITLE parameter of the WSCON service.
• The value specified in the "GUI Title" field on the Initiate GUI Session panel available from option 0.
• Your user ID.

34 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Running in GUI mode

If PANELID is set to On, the panel ID displays in front of the window title (or your user ID, if no window
title is defined) rather than on the first line of the panel.
Push Buttons
Function keys display as push buttons if FKA or PFSHOW is set to On. You can determine whether the
F= prefix is shown on the push button by specifying PREFIX or NOPREFIX on the FKA command.
Point-and-shoot output and text fields display as push buttons.
Note: If you entered a command on the command line, this command is ignored when you push a
point-and-shoot push button.
Point-and-shoot input fields are cursor-selectable.
Cursor Movement
The up and down cursor keys move the cursor vertically through a group of input fields, point-and-
shoot fields, and pull-down choices. Use the right and left cursor keys to move through the choices on
an action bar.
You can group pushbuttons and checkbox fields together by using Cursor Groups. If you choose to use
Cursor Groups in an application, the cursor up and cursor down keys move the focus through each of
the fields within a group, and the TAB key moves the focus out of the group.
You can also set Radio buttons in an application. When the focus is within a radio button group, the up
and down keys move the focus and the selection through the radio button choices.
Messages
Long and short messages are displayed as they are in non-GUI mode. If the message would appear in
a pop-up window, it will be displayed in a message box. The message box will have CANCEL and HELP
push buttons as well as the appropriate CUA-defined icon:
• An i in a circle (the international symbol for information) signifies an informational message.
• An exclamation point (!) signifies a warning message.
• A red circle with a diagonal line across it signifies an error message.
Note: You can force long messages into pop-ups using ISPF option 0.
Mnemonics
You can use a hot key to access a choice on an action bar or on a pull-down menu; that is, you can
press the ALT key in combination with the letter that is underscored in the choice to activate the
choice.
Check Boxes
A selection field that is marked by a single underscore on the host displays as a check box (that is, a
square box with associated text that represents a choice) if the attribute for the entry field has
CKBOX(ON) and it is a valid check box field.
When you select a choice, some operating systems display a symbol (such as ✓) in the check box to
indicate that the choice is in effect. You can clear the check box by selecting the choice again. Some
operating systems (AIX and HP-UX) treat the check box as a pushbutton.
List Boxes
A control that enables you to display scrollable lists of choices in boxes. You can select a choice by
tabbing to the desired choice and pressing Enter, or by positioning the mouse pointer on the desired
choice. A single click selects the choice, a double click selects the choice and processes an Enter
action. The vertical scroll bar of the list box enables you to scroll through the choices. The horizontal
scroll bar enables you to scroll horizontally through the choices.
Drop-down Lists
A variation of a list box. A drop-down list only displays one item until you take action to display the
other choices. You can select a choice by tabbing to the desired choice and pressing Enter, or by
positioning the mouse pointer on the desired choice. A single click selects the choice, a double click
selects the choice and processes an Enter action. The vertical scroll bar of the drop-down list enables
you to scroll through the choices.

The ISPF user interface 35

Running in GUI mode

Combination Boxes
A combination box combines the functions of an entry field with a drop-down list. It has an entry field
and contains a list of choices to select from to complete the entry field. The list of choices is hidden
until you take action to display it.
You can also type text directly into the entry field. The text does not have to match one of the list
choices.
The width of the combination box is the width of the input field.
Separator bars
You can provide visual distinction between two adjacent areas within a pull-down menu by coding a
separator bar between the two areas.
Accelerators
You can use an accelerator to invoke an application-defined function from a pull-down menu. An
accelerator is a key or combination of keys that you define.
Radio buttons
A radio button is a control that shows a fixed set of mutually exclusive choices, one of which is usually
chosen.
To select a radio button, you can use your mouse pointing device to press the desired button. You can
also use the TAB key to move the focus of your session to the currently selected radio button group,
then use the cursor keys to move to the desired choice within the group. If the focus is on a radio
button choice, the TAB key moves the focus to the next field or group of fields following the first radio
button choice. After one of the radio buttons is selected, you cannot blank it back out. Some
applications handle this situation by using a radio button choice of NONE.
Unavailable Choices
Radio button, checkbox, and push button choices can display as unavailable choices. The unavailable
choice is colored gray and audible feedback occurs if you try to select it.
Function Keys
Function keys display as push buttons.
Panel Display CUA Mode
When you are running in GUI mode, the "Panel display CUA mode" option on the ISPF Settings panel
is set to On.
Enter Key
An Enter key appears as a push button, by default, on all panels. You can control the display of this key
from the GUI Settings panel (option 0).
Color, Intensity, and Highlighting
The Global GUI Color Change Utility allows you to map host colors to workstation colors. For more
information, see the information about the Global GUI Color Change Utility in the Settings (Option 0)
topic of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II. Character-level color, intensity, and highlighting are not
supported; field-level intensity and highlighting are not supported.
Split Screen
When you split a screen, the new screen is displayed as a new physical window that is added to the
window list. Each modeless window is single-threaded to MVS. SPLIT without parameters always acts
as SPLIT NEW in GUI mode. Splitting a screen after the maximum number of screens is reached acts
as a SWAP command. If you have only two split screens, SWAP simply toggles between the two. If you
have more than two split screens, SWAP displays the Swap List.
PRINT Command
The PRINT, PRINT-HI, PRINTL, PRINTLHI, and PRINTG commands are not available in GUI mode.
WINDOW Command
The WINDOW command is not available in GUI mode.

36 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Running in GUI mode

WS Command
The WS command modelessly invokes the command you specify to provide a seamless interface
between host and workstation applications. For example, this command opens a modeless window
and invokes the workstation editor on the file named "myfile":

WS e.exe myfile

APL/TEXT Character Sets

The ZGE variable is set to Off when you are running in GUI mode. Any character defined with the
GE(ON) attribute displays as a blank.
Graphic Areas
Graphic areas are not supported. When a GRINIT statement is encountered, you receive a message
that panels with graphics cannot be displayed. You may choose to continue. When a panel with
graphics is encountered, a pop-up is displayed that allows you to specify that the panel be displayed
on the host emulator session or on the workstation without the graphic.
Note:
1. If you are in split screen mode, the graphic area panel cannot be displayed on the host session.
2. If you specified GUISCRD or GUISCRW values on the ISPSTART invocation that are different from
the actual host screen size, GDDM cannot be initialized, and the GRINIT service ends with a return
code of 20.
Input Fields
See “Sample screens” on page 37 for more information about how input fields are displayed in GUI
mode.
Note: Blank fields and trailing blanks are displayed as nulls in GUI mode to avoid the need to delete
blank characters when replace mode is not available.
Fonts
All GUI displays use the font that you specify in the Font option on the Workstation Agent window. If
the GUI display of your panels does not appear as you expect, try using a monospace font.
Codepages and Character sets
Users invoking ISPF GUI from a terminal or emulator that does not support code pages (indicated in
the terminal query response) should specify code page and character set parameter values if values
other than English are preferred when translating host data to workstation data.
Use the CODEPAGE and CHARSET parameters of the ISPSTART command, and the Host Codepage
and Host Character Set fields on the ISPF Settings Initiate Workstation Connection panel, to set your
chosen values. See the topic about Extended Code Page Support in the z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's
Guide and Reference for code page and character set values supported by ISPF.
Images
ISPF supports image files in Graphics Interchange Format (GIF) when running in GUI mode.
ISPF ships sample files in the sample library SISPSAMP. The panel ISR@PRIM uses three of the
images (ISPFGIFL, ISPFGIFS, and ISPEXIT).
To use images, store the image files on the host in a partitioned data set and allocate this image data
set to ddname ISPILIB before invoking ISPF. For more information about allocating this image library
see “Allocating optional image ISPF library” on page 156.

Sample screens
Figure 15 on page 38 shows the ISPF Dialog Test Display Panel displayed on a 3270 emulator.

The ISPF user interface 37

Running in GUI mode

Figure 15. ISPF Dialog Test Display Panel Displayed on a 3270 Emulator

Figure 16 on page 39 shows this panel displayed on a programmable workstation using ISPF WSA.

38 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Running in GUI mode

Figure 16. ISPF Dialog Test Display Panel Displayed Using ISPF Workstation Agent.

Notes about how GUI panels are displayed:

1. Input fields appear as input boxes.
2. If an input field wraps multiple lines on a 3270, the field scrolls horizontally in the GUI input box. Blank
lines are displayed for those lines of the input field that would have wrapped on a 3270 display.
3. For a panel not displayed in a pop-up window, only the area needed to display the information is used.
That is, ISPF does not add blank space at the bottom of the panel. ISPF does display blank space
coded into the panel.
4. ISPF maintains the original window size on a pop-up window. If the panel exceeds the width or depth
of the physical display, scroll bars are automatically added to allow you to view the hidden portions of
the screen.
Figure 17 on page 40 shows a pull-down with an unavailable choice (Session) displayed on a 3270
emulator.

The ISPF user interface 39

Running in GUI mode

Figure 17. A Pull-Down Menu with an Unavailable Choice Displayed on a 3270 Emulator

Figure 18 on page 41 shows this panel displayed on a programmable workstation using ISPF WSA.

40 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Running in GUI mode

Figure 18. A Pull-Down Menu with an Unavailable Choice Displayed Using ISPF Workstation Agent

Switching between GUI mode and 3270 mode

You can switch logical screens back and forth between GUI mode and 3270 mode by issuing the SWITCH
3270 or SWITCH GUI commands. See “The SWITCH command” on page 49 for more information.

Special characters or symbols

This topic describes techniques that can be used to display special characters or symbols while running
ISPF in GUI mode. Although some are similar, the techniques are platform specific. In each case, the text
refers to a number (sometimes in hexadecimal form) which is the code point of the character or symbol
within the current (in use) code page. Note that the code point for a symbol may have different values
depending on the code page being used.
Windows
Use Microsoft's Character Map program to find the special character that you want to insert into your
document or entry field. The Character Map program is available from the Start menu under the
Accessories folder.
After you have found the special character, select it by clicking with your mouse. Notice that the key
sequence used to generate the character displays in the lower right portion of the window. You can
use this key sequence in an entry field or GUI editor to display the character. Alternatively, you can

The ISPF user interface 41

Running in GUI mode

use the Character Map program to copy the character to the clipboard, then paste it into your
document.
When entering a character using its key sequence, remember that you must use the numeric keypad.
For example, the key sequence for the host 'not' sign (¬) is ALT+0172. To enter this key sequence,
press and hold the ALT key, then press the numbers 0172 on the keypad, then release the ALT key.
Note that the leading zero is important and must be specified in order to display the character using
the current (in use) character set. Without the leading zero, the OEM (or DOS) character set is used.
Also note that within an entry field, some key sequences only work if NumLock is ON.
See the online help for the Character Map program for more information about using the program.
AIX
On AIX you can enter a key sequence to generate a special character or symbol. For example, the key
sequence for the host 'not' sign (¬) is ALT+172. To enter this key sequence, press and hold the ALT
key, then press the numbers 172 on the keypad, then release the ALT key. Note that within an entry
field, some key sequences only work if NumLock is ON.

ISPF GUI support of TSO line mode output and input

When running ISPF in GUI mode, users connected by TCP/IP on a z/OS UNIX system, and all users
connected by APPC, have the option to display all non-fullscreen TSO data in an ISPF/TSO GUI window.
This window is scrollable and it contains an input field for entering required user responses. The data in
the window can be selected and copied to a file of your choice.
This support enables you to minimize the emulator window from which you logged on without missing any
messages that might appear in the emulator window.
Figure 19 on page 42 shows the ISPF/TSO GUI window.

Figure 19. ISPF/TSO GUI Window

The ISPF/TSO window has one item on its action bar: Edit. Clicking on this option causes a pull-down
menu to appear.

42 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Running in GUI mode

Figure 20. ISPF/TSO GUI Window with Pull-Down Menu

The options on the menu are as follows:

Copy
Enables you to copy the lines of the window that you have marked. You designate a line to copy by
clicking on it in the window.
Select All
Mark all of the lines in the window for further action. The ISPF/TSO window is scrollable, and can
contain 30,000 bytes of data in Windows, and 60,000 bytes of data in the other supported
environments.
Deselect All
Unmark all lines in the TSO window.
Clear
Erase everything in the ISPF/TSO window.
The ISPF/TSO Window title contains the system name of the host system that you logged on to and your
User ID. The system name is the SYSNAME value defined by your system programmer in the IEASYSxx
member of SYS1.PARMLIB. For ISPF to display the line mode data in this ISPF/TSO Window, you must log
on to TSO using a logon procedure that invokes the alternate entry point IKJEFT1I. For more details on
installation requirements for TSO line mode support, refer your system programmer to z/OS ISPF Planning
and Customizing.
When you make a connection to the workstation to run ISPF in GUI mode, an additional connection is
made for the ISPF/TSO Window. The window is created on your workstation when the first TSO message
needs to be displayed. All messages are appended to this scrollable window until you end your ISPF
session. At that time, the ISPF/TSO Window is closed and all TSO data from that point on is displayed on
the 3270 emulator session.
Note: You cannot close the ISPF/TSO Window during the ISPF GUI session.
When running ISPF in GUI mode, if TSO input is required from the user, the ISPF/TSO Window is displayed
in the foreground and the input field is enabled for you to enter your data.
Note: A maximum of 256 characters can be entered in this input field. When input is not being requested,
the input field is disabled.
The ISPF/TSO window has a maximum capacity of approximately 32000 bytes of data in a Windows
environment, and 60000 bytes of data in all other ISPF-supported operating environments. After these
limits are reached, a message is displayed informing you that the ISPF/TSO window will be cleared before
appending the next line of data. This gives you a chance to use the data in the window. Using the options

The ISPF user interface 43

Running in GUI mode

under the Edit menu item, you can select lines from the window, copy them, and paste them to any file of
your choice. After you respond OK to the informational message, the window is cleared and any following
TSO data is appended from the top of the window.

Restrictions for the TSO GUI line mode support

Applications issuing TGETs must ensure that their TGET buffer is large enough for the user's response.
The maximum allowable response is 256 characters. Normally, exceeding this limit results in a return
code of 12 or 28 being returned. With the TSO GUI line mode support, a zero (0) return code is returned,
and only the amount of data that fits in the supplied buffer is returned.
Users running in a Session Manager environment in the 3270 session will see any cross memory
messages that appeared in the ISPF/TSO Window displayed again in the session manager screen after the
ISPF GUI session ends.

Fullscreen TSO data

Fullscreen TPUTs will continue to be displayed in the 3270 emulator session. Required input to satisfy a
fullscreen TGET must be entered in the 3270 emulator session. For example, if the user from ISPF GUI
mode invokes SDSF through its fullscreen TPUT interface (that is, the user enters TSO SDSF from an ISPF
command line) the SDSF screens are displayed in the 3270 emulator screen.
However, if the user invokes SDSF through the ISPF interface ISPEXEC SELECT PGM(ISFISP)
NEWAPPL(ISF) then the SDSF screens are displayed in the ISPF GUI mode window just like any other
ISPF panel.
Users running fullscreen applications like RMFMON, CSP, and OMVS from an ISPF GUI session with GUI
TSO line mode support should first suspend the ISPF/TSO Window. This forces all fullscreen and line
mode data to appear in the 3270 screen until the completion of the fullscreen application. The ISPF/TSO
Window should be resumed at the completion of the fullscreen application processing.
You can query the current status of the ISPF/TSO Window using the CONTROL TSOGUI QUERY service.
You can suspend and resume the window using one of these methods:
1. ISPF CONTROL Service

CONTROL TSOGUI QUERY|OFF|ON

QUERY
Calls for the current status of the ISPF/TSO window. One of these return codes is shown:
0
Either the user is not running ISPF GUI with TSO line mode support, or TSOGUI is off. All TSO
input and output is directed to the 3270 session.
1
All TSO line mode output is displayed in the ISPF/TSO window. Line mode input must be
entered into the ISPF/TSO window's input field.
OFF
Specifies that the ISPF/TSO window is suspended. All fullscreen and line mode data appears in the
3270 window until CONTROL TSOGUI ON is issued.
ON
Specifies that the ISPF/TSO window is resumed. All TSO line mode output and input is directed to
the ISPF/TSO window.
Note:
a. If you do not run ISPF GUI with TSO line mode support, issuing CONTROL TSOGUI results in no
operation being performed (NOP).
b. CONTROL TSOGUI defaults to ON during ISPF GUI session initialization.

44 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Running in GUI mode

Example CLIST:

PROC 0
ISPEXEC CONTROL TSOGUI QUERY
SET &TSOGUIST= &LASTCC
IF (&TSOGUIST = 1) THEN +
DO
ISPEXEC CONTROL TSOGUI OFF
END
ISPEXEC SELECT CMD (OMVS)
IF (&TSOGUIST = 1) THEN +
DO
ISPEXEC CONTROL TSOGUI ON
END

2. ISPF TSOGUI command

The TSOGUI command is found in the ISPF command table as:

SELECT PGM(ISPISM) PARM(TSOGUI,&ZPARM)

You can enter TSOGUI OFF or TSOGUI ON from any ISPF command line.

Bi-directional language support

The ISPF workstation agent supports two bi-directional (bidi) languages: Arabic and Hebrew. This
enablement of the workstation agent is supported on Windows.

Shortcut keys
With bi-directional versions of the Windows operating systems, support for special key sequences called
shortcut, or "hot" keys, is provided to control bi-directional behavior within an application.
The ISPF workstation agent supports these existing hot key combinations whenever possible. However,
the workstation agent does provide some new or modified hot key combinations. The new or modified hot
keys follow.
Note: The abbreviations "LtR" and "RtL" refer to the orientation of a field or application. LtR means Left to
Right orientation. RtL means Right to Left orientation.

Screen reverse (Alt+Enter)

The term "screen reverse" is a remnant of ISPF's native 3270 support. Within a Windows application, this
hot key combination reverses the application window, not the whole desktop screen. Alt+Enter is used to
toggle the orientation of the screen.
Note: On an Arabic 102 keyboard, the Enter key is called New Line.

Auto reverse (Alt+Numpad5)

This key combination is used to automatically reverse the orientation of specific entry fields. Use Alt
+Numpad5 to toggle between Auto Reverse ON and Auto Reverse OFF.
When Auto Reverse is ON, all numeric only entry fields switch to LtR orientation, and alphanumeric entry
fields switch to RtL orientation.
When Auto Reverse is OFF, all entry fields have the same orientation as the application screen.

Field reverse (Ctrl+Left/RightShift)

This combination has been modified from its normal Windows processing.
On the Windows operating system, the key combination Ctrl+Left/RightShift performs a field reverse. The
effect of this is to change the keyboard language so that it matches the new typing direction. In a standard
Windows application, this keyboard language change is global to the whole application window.
On a native 3270 display, the keyboard language change (resulting from a field reverse) affects only the
target field, not the whole screen.

The ISPF user interface 45

Splitting the Screen

The ISPF workstation agent follows the behavior of a native 3270 display when this key combination is
used on Windows.

Bi-directional file transfer limitations

Data files that contain all LtR text are not affected by the limitations described in this topic. Neither is the
workstation build function.
The ISPF Workstation Agent does not perform any transformations on the contents of files that are
transferred to or from the host in text mode. The implications of this depend on how the files are edited on
the workstation. If your host files contain Arabic or Hebrew text, consider these points before editing
them on the workstation:
• Host data is stored in Visual form. If you download a file to the workstation and edit it with an editor that
expects the file contents to be in implicit form, the file can become corrupted.
• On Arabic Windows, the contents of a data file can become corrupted if the file is downloaded to the
workstation then uploaded back to the host. This is because the host Arabic code page (420) supports
shaped characters, while the Windows Arabic code page (1256) does not. Therefore, it is possible to
lose shaping during the file transfer process.
Attention: If your host files contain Arabic or Hebrew text, do not edit them in GUI mode. Instead,
edit these files on the host using the ISPF editor in its non-GUI mode.

Ending a GUI session

You can end a GUI session in one of these ways:
• Terminate the ISPF session.
• Issue the WSDISCON command. See “WSDISCON” on page 93 for more information.
• Invoke the WSDISCON dialog service. See the z/OS ISPF Services Guide for more information.
After invocation of WSDISCON, the GUI screen continues to display back in the 3270 emulator session.

Closing the ISPF Client/Server Workstation Agent component

If the ISPF WSA component window is closed while ISPF is running in GUI mode, ISPF issues a 989
abend on the host, unless the "3270 mode after losing workstation connection" field is selected on the
GUI Settings panel. If this field is selected, the GUI session continues in your 3270 emulator session.
If the GUI session has been ended and the Client/Server WSA component is no longer needed, the
Workstation Agent window can be closed.

Splitting the screen horizontally or vertically

While using a dialog, you can use the SPLIT command to partition the display into two or more logical
screens. The logical screens are treated as though they are independent ISPF sessions.
The maximum number of screens available to you depends on the value of the
MAXIMUM_NUMBER_OF_SPLIT_SCREENS keyword in the ISPF Configuration table. ISPF ships with a
default figure of 8. Support for up to 32 split screens is available for all terminal types except the 3290.
Note: If you are running in GUI mode, when you split a screen, the new screen is displayed as a new
physical window. If you want, representations of every screen can be displayed at once. Although a 3270
screen can only display two screens at one time, there can be other screens (up to 32) that are not visible.
You can select which logical screen to display by using the SWAP LIST command to display a list of logical
screens.

The SPLIT command

You enter split-screen mode by using the SPLIT command. You also use this command to reposition the
horizontal line that separates the two logical screens on a 3270 display. On a 3270 display the location of

46 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Splitting the Screen

the cursor identifies the active logical screen. On a 3270 display, the horizontal divider line that separates
the logical screens is not considered part of either logical screen. If the cursor is placed on this horizontal
divider line and a function key is pressed, the result is the same as if the ENTER key was pressed and the
cursor is positioned on the active logical screen's command line. Because ISPF runs in both host and GUI
modes, the SPLIT command behaves differently in each.
SPLIT command without parameters, in 3270 mode
If only one screen is currently being used, the physical display is divided into two logical screens with
a divider at the cursor. If two or more screens exist, the divider line is moved, but no new screen is
started.
SPLIT command without parameters, in GUI mode
A new logical screen is added each time the command is given, until the maximum number is reached.
After the limit is reached, a message appears when the command is issued again.
SPLIT NEW command, in 3270 mode
A new logical screen is added each time the command is given, until the maximum number is reached.
After the limit is reached, a message appears when the command is issued again. Each new logical
screen is added below the cursor, where the split line appears. If two or more screens already exist,
the new one replaces the screen in which the SPLIT command was not entered.
SPLIT NEW command, in GUI mode
This command behaves the same as the SPLIT command without parameters.
End split-screen mode by ending the application on all but one logical screen. The remaining logical
screen is then expanded to the full size of the display screen.

The SWAP command

Although you can alternately use any logical screen, only one of the logical screens is considered active at
a time. The location of the cursor identifies the active screen. You make a screen active by using the SWAP
command and its parameters to choose the desired screen.
The parameters on the SWAP command (LIST, PREV, NEXT, screen_name, and n) control which screens
you see displayed.
SWAP command without parameters in 3270 mode
If only one screen exists, this command has no effect. If more than one screen exists, this command
moves the cursor between the two logical screens that are displayed.
SWAP command without parameters in GUI mode
If only two screens are present, the cursor moves to the one that it is not currently on. If more than
two screens exist, this command defaults to the SWAP LIST command and causes the ISPF task list to
display in a pop-up window. See SWAP LIST command in GUI mode for more information.
SWAP PREV|NEXT|screen_name|n commands in both modes
Entering SWAP PREV changes the focus (for GUI mode) or display (for 3270 mode) to the next lower
screen number from the one where the command is entered. Repeatedly issuing the same command
causes each lower-numbered screen to display until screen number 1 is reached, then the counter
wraps back to screen number 32 (or your installation's maximum number).
Entering SWAP NEXT changes the focus (for GUI mode) or display (for 3270 mode) to the next higher
screen number from the one where the command is entered. Repeatedly issuing the same command
causes each higher-numbered screen to display until screen number 32 (or your maximum) is
reached, then the counter wraps back to screen number 1.
Entering SWAP screen_name changes the focus (for GUI mode) or display (for 3270 mode) to the
screen named screen_name if it is active.
Entering SWAP n changes the focus (for GUI mode) or display (for 3270 mode) to the screen
numbered n (ZSCREEN variable) if it is active.
SWAP LIST command in 3270 mode
This command displays the ISPF Task List, from which you can select which screen to display. The
screen you select replaces the screen on which you entered the command.

The ISPF user interface 47

Splitting the Screen

SWAP LIST command in GUI mode

This command displays the ISPF Task List (Figure 21 on page 48), from which you can select which
screen to focus on.

Figure 21. ISPF Task List

All of the fields on the ISPF Task List panel are point-and-shoot fields. The results when choosing one
are as follows:
Start a new screen
Starts a new logical ISPF screen.
Start a new application
This field is used in conjunction with the Application Name field. If you choose "Start a new
application" you must enter an application name in the "Application Name" field.
Application Name
The name of an application you want to start by choosing the "Start new application" field on
the ISPF Task List panel. This application is started in a new logical screen. ISPF invokes the

48 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Splitting the Screen

application through the ISPF START command, so any application name and parameters that
are valid for the START command are valid in the Application Name input field. If you need
more space to enter the application name and parameters, press the Expand PF key to display
a pop-up window that contains a longer input field.
For example, if a user types "keylist" in the Application Name input field and presses Enter, the
ISPF KEYLIST application is invoked in a new logical screen.
Select a screen from the list of active sessions
Provides a list of active sessions for you to choose from.

The SWITCH command

In addition to using the swap command to change the focus of your session from one screen to another, if
you are running the ISPF Client/Server you can use the SWITCH command to change the way the screen is
displayed, either GUI mode or 3270 mode.
From any GUI screen you can enter the command SWITCH 3270. The GUI screen disappears and the
screen is then displayed full-screen on your 3270 display. The 3270 screen is now operational. If you had
been in split screen mode, the remaining GUI screens remain in GUI, but are disabled. To swap back and
forth between the GUI and 3270 sessions now, you must use the SWAP commands (SWAP x, SWAP LIST,
and so forth). The SWAP LIST panels ISPSLIST and ISPTLIST have a field indicating the session type (GUI
or 3270).
If you want to switch your 3270 screen back to GUI mode, enter SWITCH GUI on the command line.

Rules for splitting and swapping 3270 and GUI screens

The rules for splitting and swapping screens when you have combinations of both 3270 and GUI screens
are as follows:
• If you have only one 3270 screen and enter split, the new logical screen is displayed in GUI mode.
• If you have two or more 3270 screens and enter split from one of them, the next 3270 screen is
displayed full-screen, but no new screen is started.
• If you enter split from a GUI screen, a new GUI screen is started (until the maximum number is
reached).
• If you enter split new from either a GUI or 3270 screen, the new logical screen is displayed in GUI
mode.
• If you have one 3270 screen and one GUI screen, then entering swap from either of these screens
causes a swap to the other.
• If you have two GUI screens and one 3270 screen, swap from one of the GUI screens swaps you to the
other GUI screen. Swap from the 3270 screen does nothing.
• If you have one GUI screen and two 3270 screens, swap from one of the 3270 screens swaps to the
other 3270 screen. Swap from the GUI screen does nothing.
• If you have two GUI screens and two 3270 screens, swap from one of the GUI screens swaps you to the
other GUI screen. Swap from one of the 3270 screens swaps you to the other 3270 screen.
• If you have more than two GUI screens and enter swap from one of them, the SWAP LIST panel
appears.
• If you have more than two 3270 screens and swap from one of them, you swap to the next 3270 screen.
• Entering SWAP PREV|NEXT|screen_name|n commands in either GUI or 3270 mode swaps as
described in “The SWAP command” on page 47.
• After a GUI screen is enabled, you can swap to other GUI screens using your mouse pointer.

SWITCH command restrictions

At the completion of ISPF command processing, ISPF does not reprocess the panel from which the
command was invoked. The panel is simply relaunched to the screen without processing, for example, the
panel's )INIT section. Therefore, if certain constructs are defined within the panel sections based on the

The ISPF user interface 49

Splitting the Screen

ZGUI variable (nonblank indicating connected in GUI mode), these constructs are not defined properly
until after the Enter key is pressed following the SWITCH invocation.
These are some known restrictions for the SWITCH command:
• When switching to GUI mode, the first panel displayed in GUI mode cannot contain group boxes and
images that are defined on the panel. After the user presses the Enter key, causing the panel to be
reprocessed, then these constructs are visible in GUI mode.
• When switching to 3270 mode, the name of any group boxes defined on the panel that the SWITCH was
issued from display on the screen in 3270 mode. After the user presses the Enter key, causing the panel
to be reprocessed, these group box names disappear and any panel text under these names reappears.
• If a 3270 screen already exists when the SWITCH 3270 command is invoked from another GUI screen,
the screen from which the SWITCH was invoked is displayed in the full 3270 emulator session without a
split line, regardless of the user's "Always show split line" setting. The other 3270 sessions are hidden
and are available for display if the appropriate swap command is entered.
• If pop-up windows are displayed in GUI mode when the SWITCH 3270 command is invoked, those pop-
up windows are suspended on the 3270 session and the panels are displayed as full-screen panels. If
new addpops are then invoked, these new panels are displayed as pop-ups.
• The user cannot switch to 3270 mode when running in batch GUI mode.
• When running in GUI mode, if at least one screen has been switched to 3270 mode, then the user is not
allowed to change the screen format in ISPF Settings.
• If you started GUI mode from ISPSTART and specified GUISCRD or GUISCRW values different than your
actual emulator session, then you are not allowed to switch to 3270 mode.

3290 terminals
On 3290 terminals, in addition to splitting the screen horizontally, you can use the SPLITV command to
split the screen vertically, for a total of four logical screens. In the case of the 3290 terminal, four is the
maximum number of screens possible. (The SPLITV function is not active if the data being displayed on a
screen is more than 80 characters wide.) Figure 22 on page 51 shows the effect of SPLIT and SPLITV,
starting in single-screen mode.

50 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Splitting the Screen

Figure 22. Splitting the 3290 Screen

Note:
1. ISPF logical screens are separate subtasks that do not share subpool 0 (attached with SZERO=NO
parameter.) Thus, VSAM data sets cannot be accessed from more than one logical screen.
2. If you are in a VSAM application, perform a split screen operation, then enter another VSAM
application in the second session, you must be sure to end the second session before you end the first
session, or an abend can occur.
3. On 3290 hardware, using the jump function to move from screen to screen might result in the loss of
data that has been typed but not processed. The use of the 3290 hardware jump is not recommended.
4. In split-screen mode, if you type a command on the command line and swap screens before pressing
Enter, the command is erased.
5. You cannot start ISPF in GUI mode if you are configured to run ISPF in 3290 partition mode.

The ISPF user interface 51

Splitting the Screen

52 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

Chapter 3. Using personal data set lists and library
lists

Personal lists are named lists of data sets, z/OS UNIX files and ISPF libraries that you can use to speed up
access to frequently used data sets. You can use personal lists to fill in panel fields quickly and to create
data set lists that are built from more than one level name. Personal data set lists contain data set
names, volumes, and z/OS UNIX files. Personal library lists contain lists of ISPF library names and
concatenations.
ISPF provides four types of personal lists:
Personal data set list
Lists of up to 30 data set names and z/OS UNIX files. For data sets, each name can include a member
name or a volume name, or both. z/OS UNIX file path names can be for regular files, directories, or
symbolic links to directories or regular files. Personal data set lists can also contain workstation file
names and data set name levels. See “Personal data set lists” on page 55.
Personal library list
Lists of up to eight ISPF library names or ISPF library concatenations. ISPF library names contain
three qualifiers called project, group, and type. Personal list entries can optionally contain a member
name. See “Personal library lists” on page 55.
Reference data set list
A special kind of personal data set list in which ISPF saves the names of the most recently used data
sets, data set name levels, and z/OS UNIX files and directories. This list is always named REFLIST. See
“Reference data set list” on page 55.
Reference library list
A special kind of personal library in which ISPF saves the names of the most recently used ISPF
libraries. This list is always named REFLIST. See “Reference library list” on page 56.
You can have a personal data set list with the same name as a personal library list. ISPF reserves the
name REFLIST as the name of the reference lists, so there is a personal data set list called REFLIST, and a
personal library list called REFLIST.
Reference lists are active lists of data sets, z/OS UNIX files, and libraries that you have referenced in your
ISPF session. ISPF adds a data set name to the data set reference list when you enter a data set name in
the Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Name field. ISPF also adds a z/OS UNIX file pathname to the
data set reference list when you enter a pathname in the Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set, or z/OS
UNIX File Name field. A library is added to the library reference list when you enter a library in the ISPF
Library field. Only data sets and libraries that are successfully allocated by ISPF's ALLOCATE routine are
added to the reference lists.
Note: Reference lists can be manipulated just like any other personal list, but ISPF might dynamically
change reference lists when new data sets or libraries are referenced by ISPF.
Current lists are the most recently opened or the last list to which something was saved from within the
personal list panels. One named data set list, and one named library list, are the current lists at any time.
The current list is used for the NRETRIEV key, and in the RefList pull-downs. The current list names are
shown in the RefList pull-down choices, and in the lists of personal lists.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 53

 Figure 23. RefList Pull-Down Menu

Note: The RefList pull-down is unavailable from Utilities options 8, 9, and 13; it does not offer library list
choices from options 4 and 6.
You can use personal lists for data set selection from the View Entry, Edit Entry, and most of the Utilities
panels. You can access lists in two ways:
• From the RefList pull-down menu on the action bar of the View Entry, Edit Entry, and most Utilities
panels, as shown in Figure 23 on page 54.
• Through the command interface (or fast path) described in “Command interface (fast path) to the
personal list function” on page 65.

Personal list modes

The action taken when you select a data set from a list depends on how you have the Mode set. All
personal lists can be set to either Retrieve or Execute mode from the RefMode pull-down on the action
bar of the View Entry, Edit Entry, and most Utilities panels, as shown in Figure 24 on page 54. List
Retrieve displays in blue (the default) with an asterisk as the first digit of the selection number (if you are
running in GUI mode, the choice is grayed), which indicates that RefMode is currently set to Retrieve.

Figure 24. RefMode Pull-Down Menu

54 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 The RefMode pull-down offers you these choices:
List Execute
Sets personal data set lists and personal library lists to Execute mode; that is, when you select an
entry from the list, the information is placed into the ISPF Library or Other Data Set Name field, and
ISPF proceeds as if you also pressed the Enter key.
List Retrieve
Sets personal data set lists and personal library lists to Retrieve mode; that is, when you select an
entry from the list, the information is placed into the ISPF Library or Other Data Set Name field, but
the simulated pressing of the Enter key is not performed. This allows you to set other options before
you press Enter.

Personal data set lists

You can build lists of personal data sets that contain up to 30 data set names and z/OS UNIX file path
names. You can have as many lists as you like as long as each has a unique name. Personal data set lists
are a good way to group (by project, for example) those data sets and z/OS UNIX file path names that you
use frequently. You can use personal data set lists to avoid typing in data set names and z/OS UNIX file
path names and to create customized data set lists similar to those using ISPF Option 3.4. To create or
use a personal data set list, perform one of these actions:
• Select the Personal Data Set List choice from the RefList pull-down on the View Entry, Edit Entry, or
Utilities panel action bar
• Enter the REFACTD command from the command line.
• Use the "Save As" action when viewing the data set reference list (REFLISTD command).
The REFACTD command displays the Personal Data Set List panel, as shown in Figure 25 on page 58. If
you have one or more personal data set lists, ISPF displays the current list. If you have no personal data
set lists, ISPF displays the reference list called REFLIST, which is updated by ISPF whenever a new data
set is used by ISPF.

Personal library lists

You can build personal library lists of up to eight ISPF libraries. You can have as many lists as you like as
long as each has a unique name. Personal library lists are a good way to group (by project, for example)
those libraries that you use frequently. To create or use a personal library list, select the Personal Library
List choice from the RefList pull-down on the View Entry, Edit Entry, or Utilities panel action bar. You can
also use the REFOPENL command from any ISPF command line and use the Save As action to save the
reference library list as a personal library list.
Note: Personal library lists are not available from RefList pull-downs for any options that do not support
library names. For example, the data set list utility and data set print utilities do not support personal
library lists.
Personal library list can be used with the NRETRIEV name retrieve command.
Personal library lists are used, created, and maintained with facilities similar to those of personal data set
lists. Select the library list options from the RefList pull-downs to access the library list functions. As with
personal data set lists, the list named REFLIST is the reference list that contains the most recently
referenced ISPF libraries and library concatenations.

Reference data set list

The Reference Data Set List is a special personal data set list that contains a list of up to 30 data set
names (and the volumes on which they are located), data set level names, and z/OS UNIX file path names
that you have referenced (that is, entered on panels or called with services) throughout ISPF. Data set
names are also added to the list when ISPF refers to them; for example, during a MOVE/COPY operation
or a DELETE function. ISPF adds z/OS UNIX file path names to the Reference Data Set List whenever they
are referenced in Edit, Browse, or View, or on the z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility entry panel. Data Set

Using personal data set lists and library lists 55

 Level names are added when entered on option 3.4 (Data Set List), option 11(Workplace) or as a
parameter on the command DSLIST.
The reference data set list is a personal data set list with the name REFLIST. The name REFLIST is
reserved by ISPF to refer to the reference list, but you can use the list just like any other list. If you save a
personal list under the name REFLIST, the reference list reflects the names you save into it, but it is still
updated when other data set are referenced by ISPF.
You can control the automatic updating of the reference list with data sets or z/OS UNIX files and
pathnames with the option Automatically update reference list by using the settings panel on any
personal list, the settings panel on Workplace, or the DSLIST Settings panel of the data set list facility
(ISPF option 3.4).
The automatic updating of the reference list with the data set name level can be controlled with the
option Update REFLIST with Dsname Level on the settings panel of the personal lists or the workplace.
ISPF does not automatically store workstation files in the data set reference list; however you can add
them manually.

Reference library list

The reference library list is a special personal library list named REFLIST that contains a list of up to 30
library names that you have referenced through panels or ISPF services. The reference library list is
updated by the system when ISPF uses ISPF libraries. In all other respects, it functions like a regular
personal library list.

How to get a list of your personal lists

To see a list of your personal lists, perform one of these actions:
• Select the List of Personal Data Set Lists or the List of Personal Library Lists choice from the RefList pull-
down on the Edit Entry, View Entry, or Utilities panel action bar.
• Select the Open List of Lists choice from the File pull-down on the Personal Data Set List or Personal
Library List panel action bar.
• Type MORE on the command line of the Personal Data Set List panel or the Personal Library List panel.
• Enter the REFOPEND (for data set lists) or REFOPENL (for library lists) on any ISPF command line.

How to create a personal list

There are several ways to create personal lists:
• Type data set names into an empty list.
1. Select the New choice from the File pull-down on the Personal Data Set List panel action bar or use
the NEW primary command to display an empty temporary list.
2. Type in the data set names.
3. Save the list.
• Use the reference data set list as a starting point.
1. Display the reference data set list by selecting the Reference Data Set List choice from the RefList
pull-down on the View Entry, Edit Entry, or Utilities panel action bar.
2. If you want to save this entire list as a personal data set list, select the Save as... choice from the File
pull-down on the Reference Data Set List panel action bar.
3. If you want to save some subset of the reference data set list, see the next item for more
information.
• Use an existing list as a base, edit it, and save it.
1. Display an existing list.
2. Modify this list by typing over data set names or adding new ones. Do not select any lists.

56 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 3. Select the Save choice from the File pull-down on the Personal Data Set List panel action bar.
Note: Closing the list display by pressing Exit or End will Save the list. It is possible to have a single
list open on multiple screens. It is therefore recommended that a list only be open on one screen if
modifications are to be made. This will prevent the loss of updates when an unchanged list display is
closed after a modified one.
• Use an existing list as a base and save it under another name.
1. Display an existing list.
2. Modify this list by typing over data set names or adding new ones. Do not select a choice.
3. Select the Save as... choice from the File pull-down on the Personal Data Set List panel action bar
and assign a unique name to this list.
4. ISPF displays the new list.
• Issue the REFADDx command and specify a new list name.
– Issuing 'REFADDD NEWLIST' from the command line creates a new personal data set list called
NEWLIST. The list will contain the last referenced data set name.
– Issuing 'REFADDL NEWLIST' from the command line creates a new personal library list called
NEWLIST. The list will contain the last referenced library specification.

Retrieving data from personal lists

You have three choices for retrieving data from personal lists.
• Use the NRETRIEV function key. Assign a function key to the value "NRETRIEV". On panels where
NRETRIEV is available (such as edit, view, and some of the utilities), pressing the NRETRIEV key fills in
the library name fields, data set name field, or workstation name field based on where the cursor is
when the key is pressed. See “Command interface (fast path) to the personal list function” on page 65
for more information.
• Use the RefList pull-down on the View Entry, Edit Entry, Utilities, or other panels that have the RefList
pull-down available. From within these options, you can point to a data set or library name and press
Enter to retrieve or use the name you selected. See “Personal list modes” on page 54 for more
information.
• Use the command interface (fast path commands) described in “Command interface (fast path) to the
personal list function” on page 65.

Using personal lists to create customized DSLIST displays

You can use any personal data set list or personal library list to create a data set list (similar to ISPF
option 3.4) which contains multiple level names. The easiest way to use a Personal Data Set List to create
a DSLIST is to type DSLIST listname on an ISPF command line. Listname is the name of the personal
data set list. If you are already viewing a DSLIST, you can add names listed in a personal data set list by
typing APPEND listname on the command line.
You can also create a list with the L action while displaying a list or a list of lists.

Using personal lists to create customized z/OS UNIX list displays

You can use any personal data set list to create complex lists of z/OS UNIX files and directories, similar to
those displayed using ISPF option 3.17 (the z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility). The easiest way to use a
Personal Data Set List to create a z/OS UNIX list is to type UDLIST listname on an ISPF command line
(listname is the name of the personal data set list). ISPF uses each pathname entry in the personal list
to build the displayed list of files and directories.
Note that a pathname containing glob characters is permitted in a personal list.

Personal data set list panel

Using personal data set lists and library lists 57

 File View Options Help
──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Personal Data Set List

Enter a list action to perform or select a data set entry to retrieve.

Action: S=Save A=Save As D=Delete this list E=Extended Edit L=DSLIST U=UDLIST

Action Name Description Created Referenced

REFLIST
More: +
Select Data Set, DSLIST Level or z/OS UNIX file Volume WS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Command ===>
F1=Help F3=Exit F11=ChgView F12=Cancel

Figure 25. Personal Data Set List Panel (ISRPDSNL)

You can work with your personal data set lists in three ways:
• Use the choices in the File, View, or Options pull-downs.
• Select one of the point-and-shoot options (for example, Save As).
• Type an action mnemonic in the Action field and press Enter. Actions are listed at the top of the panel.
Note: The commands and actions on the Personal Data Set List panel are similar to those on the Personal
Library List panel. The descriptions here apply to both panels, although the Library List panel does not
contain the Sort options and does not support the U (UDLIST) action.
There are two commands you can use on this panel:
MORE
Displays the list of all of your personal data set lists. This is the same action as selecting Open List of
Lists from the File pull-down.
NEW
Saves the current list and displays a new empty list. This is the same action as selecting New List from
the File pull-down.

Personal data set list panel action bar choices

The Personal Data Set List panel action bar choices function as follows:
File
The File pull-down offers you these choices:
1
New List Displays an empty (temporary) personal data set list. After you save this list, it is
permanent until you delete it.
2
Open List of Lists Displays a list of your personal data set lists. You can open a list to change it
and make it the current active list.
3
Save Saves the current contents of a personal data set list.
4
Save as... Saves the current contents to a new personal data set list. You are prompted for a list
name and optional description.

58 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 5
Delete Deletes the current personal data set list. You are not asked to confirm the delete action.
After the current list is deleted, ISPF displays an empty personal data set list as if you had
requested a New action.
6
Edit Enters the personal list edit dialog.
7
DSLIST Builds a DSLIST based on list entries.
8
UDLIST Builds a z/OS UNIX directory list based on list entries.
9
Cancel Cancels the function.
10
Exit Returns you to the panel from which you accessed the personal list.
View
The View pull-down offers you these choices:
1
Show data sets The list contains the data set entries.
2
Show data sets and notes The list contains the data set entries with notes.
3
Sort by data set name The data set list is sorted by the Data Set Name field. The sort routine
deletes duplicate names, sorts blank entries to the end of the list, saves the list, and redisplays
the personal list.
Note: If a volume or entry description exists without a data set field entry, the volume and
description are deleted by the sort routine.
4
Sort by data set volume The data set list is sorted by data set volume field. The sort routine
deletes duplicate names, sorts blank entries to the end of the list, saves the list, and redisplays
the personal list.
Note: If a volume or entry description exists without a data set field entry, the volume and
description are deleted by the sort routine.
5
Sort by data set note The data set list is sorted by data set note field. The sort routine deletes
duplicate names, sorts blank entries to the end of the list, saves the list, and redisplays the
personal list.
Note: If a volume or entry description exists without a data set field entry, the volume and
description are deleted by the sort routine.
Options
The Options pull-down offers you these choices:
1
Personal List Settings Displays the Personal List Settings panel (ISRRFOPT). From this panel, you
can alter all settings that affect personal lists.
2
Browse shared lists
Help
The Help pull-down provides access to the online tutorial.

Personal data set list panel fields

The fields on the Personal Data Set List Panel function as follows:

Using personal data set lists and library lists 59

 Action
These choices are valid in the Action field:
Note: The dots in the Action field are point-and-shoot selectable. If you select a data set or library
name, and you invoked this dialog from a panel that supports the RefList pull-down, ISPF retrieves the
selected data set or library name, terminates this panel, and places the name you selected in the ISPF
Library or Other Data Set Name field. If you have the RefMode set to "List Execute", ISPF also
simulates pressing the Enter key on the panel.
S=Save
Saves the current list. If the list is new, you are prompted to enter a name for the list.
A=Save as
Saves the current list with a different list name.
D=Delete this list
Deletes the personal data set list that you are working with. You are asked to confirm this delete
action. The currently active list cannot be deleted.
E=Extended edit
Invokes the personal list editor dialog. This enables you to insert, repeat, and delete lines in the
list.
L=DSLIST
Invokes DSLIST based on list entries.
U=UDLIST
Displays a z/OS UNIX directory list based on the list entries.
Name
The name of the personal data set list.
Description
A brief description of the personal data set list. The Description field is an input field. You can change
the description for all personal lists except the reference list (REFLIST).
Created
The date the personal data set list was created.
Referenced
The last date/time the personal data set list was referenced.

Personal data set lists panel

File View Options Help

──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
ISRPLTAB EFLIST Personal Data Set Lists List 1 of 3

Action: O=Open A=Save As D=Delete E=Edit L=DSLIST U=UDLIST

Name Description Created Referenced

_ REFLIST Last 30 referenced data sets 07/05/02 14:20
_ TEST Test list 07/04/23 07/05/02 13:33
_ TEST2 Second Test List 05/08/09 07/05/01 12:36
**End**

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Settings F5=ShrList F11=ChgView F12=Cancel

Figure 26. Personal Data Set Lists Panel (ISRPLTAB)

60 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

The Personal Data Set Lists panel shows a list of your personal data set lists. You can show the Personal
Data Set Lists panel by selecting it from the RefList pull-down or by using the REFOPEND command.
The Personal Library Lists panel is similar. You can display a list of personal library lists by selecting the
choice from the RefList pull-down or by using the REFOPENL command.

Personal data set lists panel action bar choices

The Personal Data Set Lists Panel action bar choices function as follows:
Note: The current setting is shown as an unavailable choice; that is, it displays in blue (the default) with
an asterisk as the first digit of the selection number. If you are running in GUI mode, the choice is grayed.
File
The File pull-down offers you these choices:
1
New List Displays a new personal list.
2
Open Displays the personal list entries.
3
Save as... Saves the current list entries to a new list.
4
Delete... Deletes the list.
5
Edit Invokes the personal list edit dialog.
6
DSLIST Invokes DSLIST based on list entries.
7
UDLIST Builds a z/OS UNIX directory list based on list entries.
8
Exit Returns you to the panel from which you accessed the Open dialog.
View
The View pull-down offers you these choices:
1
Standard View Displays a list of personal lists with list name, list description, and list statistics.
2
Extended View Displays a list of personal lists with list name, list description, list statistics, and a
partial view of list entries.
3
Sort by name Sorts the displayed list alphabetically by the Name field.
4
Sort by description Sorts the displayed list alphabetically by the Description field.
5
Sort by created Sorts the displayed list in descending order by the Created field.
6
Sort by referenced Sorts the displayed list in descending order by the Referenced field.
Options
The Options pull-down offers you these choices:
1
Personal List Settings... Displays the Personal List Settings panel, from which you can alter all
settings that affect personal lists.

Using personal data set lists and library lists 61

 2
Browse shared lists... Displays shared personal data set lists. See “Shared personal lists” on
page 63 for additional information.
Help
The Help pull-down provides access to the online tutorial.

Personal data set lists panel fields

The fields on the Personal Data Set Lists Panel function as follows:
Action
These choices are valid in the Action field:
Note: The dots in the Action field are point-and-shoot selectable. If you are in GUI mode and select
the action field, ISPF displays the Personal List Commands pop-up so that you can select the action
you want to take. In 3270 mode, selecting a list opens the list. This means that you can open a list by
moving the cursor to the action field and pressing Enter.
N=New
Displays an empty (temporary) personal data set list. Once you save this list, it is permanent until
you delete it.
O=Open
Opens the selected list to modify it, perform actions, or selections of data sets.
A=Save as
Saves the current contents of the selected list to a personal data set list. You will be prompted for
a list name and optional description.
D=Delete
Deletes the selected personal data set list. You will be asked to confirm the delete action. The
currently active list cannot be deleted.
E=Edit
Invokes the personal list editor dialog.
L=DSLIST
Invokes DSLIST based on list entries.
U=UDLIST
Displays a z/OS UNIX directory list based on the list entries.
Name
The name of the personal data set list. The Name field is a point-and-shoot sort field. The current
(Active) list is indicated to the left of the panel title.
Description
A brief description of the personal data set list.
Created
The date the personal data set list was created. The Created field is a point-and-shoot sort field.
Referenced
The last date/time the personal data set list was referenced. The Referenced field is a point-and-
shoot sort field.
Note: A personal list is updated whenever a save action is performed against it.
The LOCATE command is supported as follows:
L xxxxxxxx
LOC xxxxxxxx
LOCATE xxxxxxxx
where: xxxxxxxx is the name of the list you wish to locate.
An asterisk is supported in the last position of the list name. For example, enter LOCATE PRIV* to locate
the list named PRIVATE.

62 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Name retrieval with the NRETRIEV command

The SELECT command is supported as supported as follows:

S nnnnnnnn A
SEL nnnnnnnn A
SELECT nnnnnnnn A
where: nnnnnnnn is the name of the list you want to select and A is the action to perform.
An asterisk is supported in the last position of the list name. For example, enter SELECT PRIV* L to
select the list named PRIVATE, with a DSLIST action of "L".

Shared personal lists

Personal lists (library and data set) can be shared with other users on the system. Tables ISRPLSHR for
data sets and ISRLLSHR for libraries are shared lists. They are kept in an ISPTLIB concatenated data set.
Private lists are tables ISRPLIST (for data set lists) and ISRRLIST (for library lists). They are kept in the
ISPPROF user profile data set.
Shared lists are created by using ISPF option 3.3 to copy an existing personal list table from a user profile
data set to a data set concatenated to ISPTLIB. You must rename the table to ISRPLSHR (for data set
lists) or ISRLLSHR (for library lists) during the copy operation. You can open a shared list and use it; you
cannot update or delete a shared list. You can also save it to a private list using the Save As function
available from the Personal Data Set Lists panel (ISRPLTAB) and the Personal Library Lists panel
(ISRLLTAB). You must save the shared list to a personal list before you can retrieve names from it.
Use the Options pull-down on these two panels to view the shared lists and to save them locally. When
you specify shared lists, these actions are available:
• Open (to interact with the list in any supported way)
• Save As (to save the contents of the current list to a new list)

Name retrieval with the NRETRIEV command

The ISPF command table contains an entry named NRETRIEV. On enabled panels such as Edit, NRETRIEV
retrieves the library names from the current library referral list, or data set name, z/OS UNIX file name, or
workstation file name from the current data set referral list. The user is responsible for assigning the
NRETRIEV command to a PF key.
When the cursor is not in the Other Data Set Name field, the Volume Serial field, or the Workstation File
Name field, and the NRETRIEV key is pressed, the ISPF library fields are filled in from the current list. As
long as the cursor is not placed in these fields, subsequent presses of the NRETRIEV key will retrieve the
next library concatenation from the list.
When the cursor is in the Other Data Set Name field, the Volume Serial field, or the Workstation File Name
field, and the NRETRIEV key is pressed, the data set name, z/OS UNIX file name, or workstation name is
filled in from the current data set list. ISPF attempts to determine if the name in the list is a workstation
z/OS UNIX file name, or data set name. As long as the cursor is placed in these fields, subsequent presses
of the NRETRIEV key will retrieve the next data set name, z/OS UNIX file name, or workstation name from
the list.
Use the personal list settings panel to force the NRETRIEV command to verify the existence of a data set
before retrieving it. If verification is active, then a check is made to see if a data set name exists before a
retrieval attempt. If a volume name is not in the personal list entry, then the catalog is checked to see if
the data set name is cataloged. If a volume name exists, an OBTAIN macro is used to check the volume
for the data set. Verification does not check ISPF library names, z/OS UNIX file names, or workstation
names, and does not check for the existence of PDSE members. In the data set list Dsname Level field,
verification is inactive and workstation names are never retrieved.
NRETRIEV is enabled on the following options:

Using personal data set lists and library lists 63

Name retrieval with the NRETRIEV command

• View, including extended move, copy, create, and replace panels

• Edit, including extended move, copy, create, and replace panels
• Library Utility (Option 3.1)
• Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)
• Move/Copy Utility (Option 3.3)
• Data Set List (Option 3.4)
• Reset ISPF Statistics (Option 3.5)
• Hardcopy Utility (Option 3.6)
• Workstation Transfer (Option 3.7.2)
• SuperC (Options 3.12 and 3.14)
• ISPF Table Utility (Option 3.16)
• z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (Option 3.17)
• SCLM Options:
– View (Option 1)
– Edit (Option 2)
– Member list (Option 3.1)
– Migration (Option 3.3)
– Unit of Work (Option 3.11)
– Build (Option 4)
– Promote (Option 5)
– Easy Cmds (Option 6A)

SCLM considerations for NRETRIEV

The NRETRIEV command is enabled to work in several of the SCLM options. There are certain restrictions
and considerations to keep in mind when you choose to use NRETRIEV in SCLM.

SCLM restrictions
• The NRETRIEV key within SCLM does not use the standard reference list or personal lists. Instead, it
uses a stack that is stored internally. The stack is not editable. The stack is saved from session to
session as a single-line table called ISRSLIST.
Note: In the SCLM View option, the Other Data Set Name field does use the standard reference list
because the Other Data Set Name field has no particular meaning to SCLM.
• In SCLM, there is no validation of saved or retrieved names. That means that if you type in a library
name and press Enter, it is added to the list of saved names, even if SCLM does not process it. This
contrasts with the standard reference list processing, which does not add a data set or library name
until the data set or library is successfully allocated.
• On name retrieval (when the NRETRIEV key is pressed) there is no validation of the existence of data
sets or libraries.
• The regular NRETRIEV command is screen independent (it uses a separate list indicator for each screen
in split screen mode). There is only 1 position locator for SCLM lists. This means that split screens with
SCLM NRETRIEV will use the same pointer into the list. An NRETRIEV on screen 1 followed by an
NRETRIEV on screen 2 will get list entries 1 and 2 respectively.

Stack management for SCLM

A library name (or concatenation) is added to the list of saved library names by pressing Enter on a panel
that supports saving names. If the library or concatenation exists in the list already, it is moved to the top
of the list. Where the Project field or the first Group field is an output field (SCLM options 2, 3, 4, and 5),

64 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Name retrieval with the NRETRIEV command

the output fields are not used in the comparison between what was typed on the panel and what is
already in the list. This enables you to work in different but similar projects.
In other words, on the edit screen that has both the Project and Group1 as output fields, the
concatenation:

SCLM Library:
Project...: PDFTDEV
Group ....: DGN ....STG ....INT ....SVT
Type .....: ARCHDEF
Member ...:

would match:

SCLM Library:
Project...: PDFTOS25
Group ....: JSM ....STG ....INT ....SVT
Type .....: ARCHDEF
Member ...:

Similarly, where groups 2, 3, and 4 are not used, those groups are not used when checking to see if the
name already exists.
If a match is found, the existing entry in the list is moved to the top of the list.

Command interface (fast path) to the personal list function

You can use these commands to access the referral list function rather than using the action bar pull-
down menus:
REFLISTD xx
Start the personal data set list dialog with the reference data set list and retrieve the data set in
position xx. The xx parameter is optional. This sets the current data set list to the reference list
(REFLIST).
REFLISTL xx
Start the personal library list dialog with the reference library list and retrieve the data set in position
xx. The xx parameter is optional. This sets the current library list to the reference list (REFLIST).
REFACTD nnnnnnnn xx
Start the personal data set list named nnnnnnnn and retrieve the data set in position xx. For example,
enter

REFACTD MYLIST 2

to retrieve the second data set from the personal data set list named MYLIST and place it in the Data
Set Name field. The nnnnnnnn and xx parameters are optional.
REFACTL nnnnnnnn xx
Start the personal library list named nnnnnnnn and retrieve the library in position xx. For example,
enter

REFACTL MYLIB 1

to retrieve the first library from the personal library list named MYLIB and place it in the Library field.
The nnnnnnnn and xx parameters are optional.
REFOPEND
Start the personal data set open dialog.
REFOPENL
Start the personal library open dialog.

Using personal data set lists and library lists 65

Name retrieval with the NRETRIEV command

REFADDD nnnnnnnn
Update the personal data set list named nnnnnnnn with the most recently referenced data set. For
example, enter

REFADDD NEWLIST

to add the most recently referenced data set to the personal data set list named NEWLIST.
REFADDL nnnnnnnn
Update the personal library list named nnnnnnnn with the most recently referenced library. For
example, enter

REFADDL NEWLIB

to add the most recently referenced library to the personal library list named NEWLIB.
NRETRIEV
Retrieve a name from the current library or data set list on panels which support NRETRIEV
commands. This command is normally assigned to a program function (PF) key. NRETRIEV uses the
position of the cursor to determine what type of personal list to use and what fields on the panel to fill
in. See “Name retrieval with the NRETRIEV command” on page 63 for more information about
NRETRIEV.

Using function keys with personal lists

You can set function keys to process any of the fast path commands, as shown in Figure 27 on page 66.

Figure 27. Defining Function Keys to Issue Referral List Commands

If you used these function key settings, you could:

66 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Name retrieval with the NRETRIEV command

• Press F4 to place the second data set name on the personal data set list named MYLIST in the Data Set
Name field.
• Press F5 to place the first library name on the personal library list named MYLIB in the Library field.
• Press F6 to display the personal data set list named MYLIST so that you can select a data set to process.
Note: You could also type a number on the command line and press F6 to place the data set name in
the specified position on the personal data set list named MYLIST in the Data Set Name field; for
example, if you type 6 on the command line and press F6, the sixth data set on MYLIST would be placed
in the Data Set Name field.

Example of an ISPF panel that uses a referral list

Here is the panel definition for a panel that uses a referral list.

)PANEL KEYLIST(ISRSAB,ISR)
)ATTR DEFAULT(...) FORMAT(MIX)
0B TYPE(AB)
04 TYPE(ABSL)
05 TYPE(PT)
09 TYPE(FP)
0A TYPE(NT)
0C TYPE(NT) SKIP(ON)
11 TYPE(SAC)
12 TYPE(CEF) PADC(USER)
13 TYPE(NEF) PADC(USER)
19 TYPE(DT)
22 TYPE(WASL) SKIP(ON)
08 TYPE(CH)
10 TYPE(ET)
)ABC DESC('RefList')
PDC DESC('Reference Data Set List')
ACTION RUN(ISRRLIST) PARM('RL1')
PDC DESC('Reference Library List')
ACTION RUN(ISRRLIST) PARM('LR1')
PDC DESC('Personal Data Set List')
ACTION RUN(ISRRLIST) PARM('PL1')
PDC DESC('Personal Data Set List Open')
ACTION RUN(ISRRLIST) PARM('PL2')
PDC DESC('Personal Library List')
ACTION RUN(ISRRLIST) PARM('LL1')
PDC DESC('Personal Library List Open')
ACTION RUN(ISRRLIST) PARM('LL2')
)ABCINIT
.ZVARS=REFLIST
)ABC DESC('RefMode')
PDC DESC('List Execute') UNAVAIL(ZRME1)
ACTION RUN(ISRRLIST) PARM('EEX')
PDC DESC('List Retrieve') UNAVAIL(ZRME2)
ACTION RUN(ISRRLIST) PARM('ERT')
)ABCINIT
.ZVARS=LISTFILE
VGET (ZELIST) PROFILE
IF (&ZELIST = 'EXECUTE')
&zrme1 = 1
&zrme2 = 0
&listfile = 2
ELSE
&zrme1 = 0
&zrme2 = 1
&listfile = 1
)BODY CMD(ZCMD)
⋮
)INIT
⋮
)REINIT
REFRESH (PRJ1,LIB1,LIB2,LIB3,LIB4,TYP1,MEM,DSN) /*refresh panel vars*/
)PROC
/* the following is the logic for reference or personal data set list*/
VGET (ZRDSN) SHARED /* get data set reflist key var */
IF (&ZRDSN ^= ' ') /* if reflist has set dsname var */
&DSN = &ZRDSN /* set panel other dsname to zrdsn */
VGET (ZREFVOLM) PROFILE /* get volume retrieve mode */
IF (&ZREFVOLM = 'ON') /* if volume retrieve on */
&VOL = &ZRVOL /* set panel volume to zrvol */

Using personal data set lists and library lists 67

Name retrieval with the NRETRIEV command

&ZRDSN = ' ' /* blank zrdsn */

&ZRVOL = ' ' /* blank zrvol */
VPUT (ZRDSN ZRVOL) SHARED /* return blank reflist vars */
.CURSOR = DSN /* set cursor to panel dsname field */
VGET (ZELIST) PROFILE /* get edit execute/retrieve mode */
IF (&ZELIST ^= 'EXECUTE') /* determine if retrieve or execute */
.MSG = ISRDS003 /* force redisplay if retrieve mode */
/* End of logic for reference or personal data set list */
/* the following is the logic for reference or personal library list */
VGET (DSALSEL) SHARED /* get library reflist key var */
IF (&DSALSEL ^= ' ') /* if reflist has set lib indicator */
VGET (DSA1,DSA2,DSA3,DSA4,DSA5,DSA6,DSA7) SHARED /* get vars */
&PRJ1 = &DSA1 /* set panel project */
&LIB1 = &DSA2 /* set panel library 1 */
&LIB2 = &DSA3 /* set panel library 2 */
&LIB3 = &DSA4 /* set panel library 3 */
&LIB4 = &DSA5 /* set panel library 4 */
&TYP1 = &DSA6 /* set panel type */
&MEM = &DSA7 /* set panel member */
&DSN = ' ' /* blank panel other dsname */
&DSALSEL = ' ' /* blank reflist lib indicator */
VPUT (DSALSEL) SHARED /* return to shared pool */
.CURSOR = MEM /* set cursor to panel member field */
VGET (ZELIST) PROFILE /* get edit execute/retrieve ind */
IF (&ZELIST ^= 'EXECUTE') /* determine if retrieve or execute */
.MSG = ISRDS003 /* setmsg if retrieve mode */
/* End of logic for reference or personal library list */
)END

Example of an ISPF panel that enables NRETRIEV

Figure 28 on page 69 shows the panel definition for a panel that uses a referral list.

68 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Name retrieval with the NRETRIEV command

)BODY
%--------------------------- NRETRIEV Test Panel ---------------------------%
%COMMAND%===>_ZCMD
+
+
+ Project ===>_PROJECT +
+ Group ===>_GROUP1 +===>_GROUP2 +===>_GROUP3 +===>_GROUP4 +
+ Type ===>_TYPE +
+ Member ===>_MEMBER +

+ DS Name ===>_OTHERDSN +
+ Volume ===>_VOLUME+

+ Workstation File ===>_WSFILE +

)INIT
.NRET = ON /* Make NRETRIEV key active */
)REINIT
REFRESH (*)
.NRET = ON /* Make NRETRIEV key active */
)PROC
.NRET = OFF /*IMPORTANT - Make NRETRIEV key inactive */
VGET (ZVERB) SHARED
IF (&ZVERB = NRETRIEV) /* if NRETRIEV was entered */
IF (.CURSOR NE OTHERDSN, VOLUME, WSFILE)
.NRET = LIB /* Reset data set counter */
IF (&ZNRLIB = YES) /* If library retrieve was OK*/
.CURSOR = MEMBER /* set cursor to member field*/
&PROJECT = &ZNRPROJ /* set library variables from*/
&GROUP1 = &ZNRGRP1 /* the variables set by */
&GROUP2 = &ZNRGRP2 /* NRETRIEV */
&GROUP3 = &ZNRGRP3
&GROUP4 = &ZNRGRP4
&TYPE = &ZNRTYPE
&MEMBER = &ZNRMEM
&OTHERDSN = &Z /* Blank out odsn field */
&VOLUME = &Z /* Blank out volume field */
&WSFILE = &Z /* Blank out workstation file*/
.MSG = ISRDS013 /* Indicate good retrieval */
ELSE .MSG = ISRDS011 /* Else bad library list */
ELSE
.NRET = DSN
IF (&ZNRDS = YES) /* If dsname retrieve was OK */
IF (&ZNRWSN = H) /* If ISPF thinks it's host */
.CURSOR = OTHERDSN /* Move cursor to dsn name */
&OTHERDSN = &ZNRODSN /* Set other dsn name */
&VOL = &ZNRVOL /* Set volume variable */
&WSFILE = &Z /* Blank out workstation file*/
ELSE /* ISPF thinks it's a wsfile */
.CURSOR = WSFILE /* Set cursor to ws file */
&WSFILE = &ZNRODSN /* Set ws file name variable */
&VOL = &Z /* Blank volume and data set */
&OTHERDSN = &Z /* To avoid visual confusion */
.MSG = ISRDS014 /* Indicate good retrieval */
ELSE .MSG = ISRDS012 /* Else bad ds referral list */
)END

Figure 28. Example Panel Definition Enabling NRETRIEV

Using personal data set lists and library lists 69

Name retrieval with the NRETRIEV command

70 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

Chapter 4. Using commands, function keys, and
cursor selection

This topic explains how to use the ISPF system commands, the function keys and their default
assignments, and the cursor-select facilities.
You can use commands to request processing functions. These are the levels of commands:
System commands
Provided by the DM component and always available to a user, unless explicitly overridden by an
application, a user, or a site.
User or Site commands
Defined by the site administrator (in the ISPF Configuration table) and available to a user, in addition
to the system commands.
Application commands
Available to a user throughout the processing of an application.
Function commands
Meaningful only while using a particular function within an application.
System, user, site, and application commands are defined by using command tables. The DM component
processes these commands. System, user, site, and application command processing is generally
transparent to the dialog functions. For example, HELP is a system command.
Function commands include all commands that are processed by a dialog function. For example, the
NUMBER command within the ISPF Editor (option 2) is a function command.
You can enter a command by:
• Typing the information on the command line, or in the command field, and pressing the Enter key. This
includes the command field in View, Browse, Edit, and Table Displays, as well as the command field on a
panel.
• Pressing the function key set to the desired command.
• Selecting an Attention field by using the cursor-select key. The cursor-select key is a hardware feature
on 3179, 3179G, 3180, 3278, 3279, and 3290 terminals.

ISPF intercepts all commands, regardless of whether the command is typed in the command field or
entered with a function key or cursor-select key. The DM component performs the command if it matches
an entry in the application, user, or system command table. Otherwise, it is assumed to be a function
command and is passed to the dialog function.
You can pass commands to the operating system by entering the appropriate ISPF-provided command
(TSO) followed by the actual TSO command. For example:

===> TSO LISTC LEVEL(Z77PHJ)

You can stack commands to be run by entering a special delimiter between the commands. For example,
entering:

===> UPDATE BLDG DEPT NAME; MENU ABC

causes the UPDATE command to run first. When it completes, the MENU command starts. The default
delimiter is a semicolon (;), which you can change with the ISPF SETTINGS option (see the Settings
(Option 0) topic of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.
Commands cannot be stacked following the:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 71

ISPF System Commands

• HELP command. HELP processing deletes any remaining commands in the stack.
• RETRIEVE command.

ISPF system commands

This section describes the ISPF system commands in alphabetical order.

ACTIONS
ACTIONS

Moves the cursor between the action bar and the panel body.

AUTOTYPE
AUTOTYPE

Allows you to type a partial data set or member name, then press a function key and have ISPF complete
the name.
Note: AUTOTYPE is not a true ISPF system command because it is not built into the base code of ISPF
and it works only on panels that are written to understand it.

BACKWARD
BACKWARD

Alias for the UP command. Scrolls toward the top of the data.

BOTTOM
BOTTOM

Alias for the DOWN MAX command. Scrolls to the bottom of the data.

CANCEL
CANCEL

If CANCEL is requested from an action bar pull-down, the action taken depends on whether you are
running in host or GUI mode:
• In host mode, the pull-down is removed and the cursor is positioned on the first action bar choice.
• In GUI mode, the CANCEL command is returned to the dialog.
If CANCEL is requested from a panel displayed using the DISPLAY, TBDISPL, or SELECT service calls, the
DM component places the command in ZCMD and sets a return code of 0 from the display screen.
If CANCEL is requested from a panel displayed using the DISPLAY or TBDISPL service calls and the panel
was defined with a PANEL tag (DTL) or a )PANEL statement, the DM component returns the command in
ZVERB and sets a return code of 8 from the display screen.

CMDE
CMDE

If CMDE is entered on any command line, a pop-up panel (ISPCMDE) with a 234-character command
input field is displayed.

72 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 ISPF System Commands

You can enter up to 234 characters using the entry field provided. ISPF allows TSO commands, CLISTS,
and REXX execs and parameters to be entered in the input field. This panel is processed much like the
PDF Option 6 panel. Data passed to this panel is translated to uppercase characters. Data passed from
this panel remains as it appears on the panel.
If input has been entered on the panel from which CMDE was called, it is saved and displayed when the
pop-up panel ISPCMDE is displayed.

COLOR
COLOR

Changes the default colors on seven-color display devices.

CRETRIEV
CRETRIEV

The actions of the CRETRIEV (conditional retrieve) command are based on the position of the cursor when
you enter the command:
• If the cursor is within the primary input field when you enter the CRETRIEV command, the command
does the same processing as the RETRIEVE command; the DM component places the previous
command entered, if any, in the command input field.
• If the cursor is not within the primary input field, the CRETRIEV command does the same processing as
a CURSOR command; the DM component places the cursor at the beginning of the first input field on the
panel, which is usually the option or command field.

CUAATTR
CUAATTR

Changes the default values of panel colors, intensities, and highlights for CUA panel element attributes.

CURSOR
CURSOR

Moves the cursor to the first input field on the panel being displayed, generally the option or command
field, or moves the cursor to the alternate command field if one has been designated on the )BODY
statement. If invoked a second time on a panel with scrollable data, this command causes the cursor to
be moved to the second input field. Scrollable data panels include a View, Browse, Edit, or table display
panel or a panel with a scrollable dynamic area.

DOWN
DOWN

Scrolls toward the bottom of the data.

DSLIST
DSLIST
list name

DSname level

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 73

ISPF System Commands

Enables you to build a data set list from any command line. You can specify either a personal data set list
name or a data set list name level on the command. If you do not put quotation marks around the dsname
level, the TSO prefix is used as the first qualifier in the dsname level.
By issuing the command with no parameters, you cause a list of available personal data set lists to be
displayed.
The DSLIST command, which invokes ISRDSLST, accepts system symbols in the parameter. For example:

DSLIST 'SYS2.**.&SYSPLEX'

DTEST
DTEST parameter number

Enables you to start, or change the conditions of, a dialog test. Specifying a parameter number is required,
and different conditions of dialog test result. For example, if you enter DTEST 8 while running an
application under Dialog Test, the 7.8 Breakpoints panel is displayed. After setting the breakpoints, you
return to your application with the new breakpoints activated. The panels that you can call up with DTEST
are:
1
Invoke Functions panel
2
Invoke Display Panel panel
3
Invoke Variables panel
4
Invoke Tables panel
5
Display Browse log panel
6
Invoke Dialog Services panel
7
Invoke Traces selection panel
8
Invoke Breakpoint panel

END
END

Stops the current operation and returns to the previous menu. If the ISPF Primary Option Menu is
displayed, this command ends ISPF. See “Log and list data set processing at the end of a session” on page
147 for a description of the processing that occurs when the END command is entered from the ISPF
Primary Option Menu.
When entered on a selection panel displayed by the SELECT service, the END command causes a
redisplay of the next higher menu in the hierarchy. When entered on a panel displayed by the tutorial
program, it stops the tutorial and causes a redisplay of the menu from which the tutorial was started or
the panel from which HELP was requested.
When the END command is entered on a panel displayed by a dialog function through the DISPLAY or
TBDISPL service, the dialog function must take whatever action is appropriate to terminate and return
control. Entry of the END command is signaled by a return code of 8 from the DISPLAY or TBDISPL
service.

74 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 ISPF System Commands

ENVIRON
ENVIRON
ENBLDUMP ON TERMTRAC ON

OFF ERROR

DUMP

OFF

TERMSTAT
QUERY

Allows you to reduce service time by gathering data that can be helpful in diagnosing problems. Functions
provided include:
• Enabling Abend dumps when ISPF is not in TEST mode
• Tracing and dumping ISPF terminal input and output data and errors
• Collecting terminal characteristic information.

EPDF
EPDF datasetname
Browse View Macro macroname

Profile profilename Panel panelname Recover

Format formatname Mixed YES

NO

Enables you to edit, browse, or view a data set from a command line.
Browse
Invoke Browse instead of edit.
View
Use View mode (End/Save/Cancel disabled).
Macro macroname
Invoke the editor or view using the initial macro specified by macroname. Not valid with Browse.
Profile profilename
Invoke the editor or view using the edit profile specified by profilename. Not valid with Browse.
Panel panelname
Use alternate panel name specified by panelname.
Recover
Perform edit recovery if a recovery is pending. If edit recovery is used, the file name and macro
specified on the command are ignored. If no edit recovery session is pending, the file is edited as
usual. Not valid with Browse.
Format formatname
Invoke the editor using the format table specified by formatname.
Mixed YES|NO
Use mixed option for 5550 terminals.

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 75

ISPF System Commands

The EPDF command is a REXX exec. Consequentially it substitutes dialog variables specified with the
parameter. For example, this command edits the current ISPF Temporary Control Data Set:

EPDF '&ZTEMPF'

The EPDF command also processes system symbols within the data set name before passing to the Edit,
View, or Browse service. A return code 4 from VSYM indicates that one or more system symbols were not
recognised and these remain unchanged within the data set name. The ISPF service routine can then
resolve them as dialog variables.
Here are some examples:
This command entered in the command line of an ISPF panel edits the data set defined by the current
dialog variable, ZTEMPF:

EPDF '&ZTEMPF'

This command entered in the command line of an ISPF panel edits the data set SYS2.CLIST.SYSPLEX1
when executed on a system that is a member of a sysplex named SYSPLEX1:

EPDF 'SYS2.CLIST.&SYSPLEX'

EXHELP
EXHELP

Provides general information about the contents of a panel.

EXIT
EXIT

Requests that the current function be ended. When entered on a panel displayed by the tutorial program,
EXIT stops the tutorial and causes a redisplay of the menu from which the tutorial was started or the
panel from which HELP was requested.
• If EXIT is requested from a panel displayed using the DISPLAY, TBDISPL, or SELECT service calls, the
DM component returns the command in ZCMD and sets a return code of 0 from the display screen.
• If EXIT is requested from a panel displayed using the DISPLAY or TBDISPL service calls and the panel
was defined using a PANEL tag (DTL) or a )PANEL statement, the DM component returns the command
in ZVERB and sets a return code of 8 from the display screen.

EXPAND
EXPAND

ZEXPAND

Displays a variable in a dynamic area in a pop-up expand window. This only applies if the cursor is within a
scrollable field. If the scrollable field is input, you will be able to update the variable in the expand
window.

76 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 ISPF System Commands

FKA
FKA
ON

SHORT

OFF

PREFIX

NOPREFIX

Toggles through the different forms of the function key area. The first time you enter the FKA command
(without parameters), the long form of the function key area is displayed. The long form includes the keys
that have a format specified as either long or short in the keylist. If you enter the command again, the
short form is displayed. The short form displays only those keys that have the short format specified in the
keylist. If you enter the command once again, the keys are removed from the display. Therefore, if you
continue to enter the command, the different choices are toggled:
• Long form (default)
• Short form
• No display.
The form that you select affects all panels displayed in the session. The DM component updates the
system variable ZFKA to represent the current state of the function key area form and saves the value in
the system profile.
FKA ON displays the long form of the function key area.
FKA SHORT displays the short form of the function key area.
FKA OFF specifies that the function key area will not be displayed.
If you are running in GUI mode, FKA PREFIX displays the F= prefix on the push button.
If you are running in GUI mode, FKA NOPREFIX removes the F= prefix from the push button.

FORWARD
FORWARD

Alias for the DOWN command. Scrolls toward the bottom of the data.

HELP
HELP

Displays additional information about an error message, or provides tutorial/help information for panels,
fields on panels, commands, and options.

INT
INT

Starts the ISPF Workstation Tool Integration dialog. Use the dialog to configure workstation tools and file
extensions for ISPF actions and services for Edit and View when used in conjunction with workstation edit
and view. For more information, see the information about Workstation Tool Integration in the Settings
(Option 0) topic of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 77

ISPF System Commands

ISPDPTRC
ISPDPTRC
END VIEW QUIET

DISPLAY( None ) PANEL( * )

In panel_name

Out panel_mask

Both

READ( None ) SCREEN( 0 )

Summary *

Detail screen_id

SECTION( * )
All Init Reinit Proc

None NOInit NOReinit NOProc

SERVICE( None )

Detail

Invokes the panel trace utility, which allows you to trace both the execution of panel service calls
(DISPLAY, TBDISPL, and TBQUERY) and the processing that occurs within the Dialog Manager panel code.
For more information, refer to the topic about diagnostic tools and information in z/OS ISPF Dialog
Developer's Guide and Reference.

ISPDTLC
ISPDTLC

Invokes the ISPF DTL Conversion Utility. See the z/OS ISPF Dialog Tag Language Guide and Reference for
additional parameters and calling options.

78 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 ISPF System Commands

ISPFTTRC
ISPFTTRC
END VIEW QUIET

READ( None )

Summary

Detail

RECORDS( * )
All Src NOSrc Data Cntl

None Source NOSource NOData NOCntl

SCREEN( 0 ) SERVICE( None )

* Detail
screen_id

SKELETON( * ) TBVARS( None )

skel_name Detail

skel_mask

Invokes the file tailoring trace utility, which allows you to trace both the execution of file tailoring service
calls (FTOPEN, FTINCL, FTCLOSE, and FTERASE) and the processing that occurs within the file tailoring
code and processing of each statement. For more information, refer to the topic about diagnostic tools
and information in z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference.

ISPFVAR
ISPFVAR
LMSG( ON )

OFF

ABTAB ( ON

OFF

PSTAB ( ON )

OFF

SESM ( ON )

OFF

JUMP ( ON )

OFF

EDPRT ( ON )

OFF

EURO ( ON )

OFF

SPLTLINE ( ON )

OFF

SCRML ( ON )

OFF

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 79

ISPF System Commands

Sets these system variables:

LMSG
Display long message in pop-up
ABTAB
Tab to action bar choices
PSTAB
Tab to point-and-shoot fields
SESM
Select Session Manager mode
JUMP
Jump from leader dots
EDPRT
Edit the PRINTDS command
EURO
Enable the EURO currency symbol
SPLTLINE
Always show split line
SCRML
Scroll member list

ISPFWORK
ISPFWORK

Starts the ISPF Workplace.

ISPLIBD
ISPLIBD
libtype

Invokes the LIBDEF Display Utility. The optional parameter, libtype, identifies a specific LIBDEF library
definition to be displayed. All LIBDEF definitions for the current logical screen are displayed if the
parameter is omitted, if the parameter is longer than eight characters, or if the parameter specifies
ISPPROF as the library name. See z/OS ISPF Services Guide for more information about LIBDEF and the
ISPLIBD command.

ISPPREP
ISPPREP

Allows you to create preprocessed panels, those for which ISPF has partially processed the panel
definition before it is stored in the panel data set, either interactively or in batch mode.

ISRRLIST
ISRRLIST

The action bar interface into referral lists.

ISRROUTE
ISRROUTE

80 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 ISPF System Commands

The action bar interface into the ISPF command stacking routing. ISRROUTE also provides an interface to
the SELECT service from the ACTION/RUN statement within a pull-down choice. The parameters are the
same as the ISPEXEC interface to the SELECT service.

KEYLIST
KEYLIST
PRIVATE

SHARED

OFF

ON

The parameters on this command determine where, or if, ISPF looks for keylists. The default setting for
KEYLIST is equivalent to issuing the KEYLIST PRIVATE command, which means that the program looks in
the user's profile table for the keylist specified on a panel before looking in the xxxxKEYS table allocated
in ISPTLIB.
The KEYLIST SHARED command means that ISPF looks only in the xxxxKEYS table allocated in ISPTLIB
for the keylist.
Using either the PRIVATE or SHARED parameter performs an implicit KEYLIST ON command. Both of the
parameters are local to each application, so setting PRIVATE for application X does not affect application
Y, which might be using SHARED.
By specifying KEYLIST OFF, you cause ISPF to ignore the keylist on all logical screens and use the ZPF
variables for controlling function keys. This is in effect only for the application for which you enter the
command.
The KEYLIST ON command causes ISPF to recognize keylists again, with the parameter (SHARED or
PRIVATE) that was in effect immediately before the KEYLIST OFF command. KEYLIST ON and OFF are
equivalent to the Enable and Disable keylist choices on the Function keys pull-down. Keylist Settings are
discussed in the Settings (Option 0) topic of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II. SHARED and PRIVATE also
appear on the Function keys pull-down in "Keylist Settings".
The KEYLIST command with no parameters causes the Keylist utility to start.

KEYS
KEYS

Displays the PF Key Definitions and Labels panel, which allows you to change the ZPF variable settings
(ZPFVARs), as in previous versions of ISPF. However, if the KEYS command is issued from a panel with an
active keylist, the associated Keylist Utility panel Change pop-up window is displayed.
Note: If the KEYLIST SHARED command has been issued, or the SYSTEM parameter has been specified
on the KEYLIST keyword on the )PANEL statement, this action causes only a BROWSE of the keylist. See
the z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference for more information about the SYSTEM parameter
in the )PANEL statement.

KEYSHELP
KEYSHELP

If KEYSHELP is defined, KEYSHELP provides you with a brief description of each key defined for a panel.

LEFT
LEFT

Scrolls left. If your cursor is in a scrollable field, this scrolls towards the beginning of the field.

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 81

ISPF System Commands

LIST
LIST
PRINT

DELETE

KEEP

Allows you to process the list data set without exiting ISPF. See “Processing the log and list data sets” on
page 145 for a description of using the LIST command.

LOG
LOG
PRINT

DELETE

KEEP

Allows you to process the log data set without exiting ISPF. See “Processing the log and list data sets” on
page 145 for a description of using the LOG command.

MSGID
MSGID ON

OFF

With no parameters, displays a message indicating the message ID of the last message displayed. With a
parameter of ON or OFF, indicates whether a message number is to be added to the beginning of
interactive long message text. During entry to ISPF, the mode is initialized to OFF, and the message ID is
not displayed as part of the long message text on interactive displays. If the addition of the message ID
would cause long message text to be truncated, the message is displayed in a pop-up window.
Messages that have the message number included in the long message text will continue to display the
message number, even when MSGID OFF is in effect. Also, the message number will appear twice when
MSGID ON is in effect.
The MSGID ON/OFF command affects only the current logical screen, so when you are running in split
screen, one screen can have MSGID ON and the other MSGID OFF. The MSGID command will return only
the MSGID of a message for its own logical screen.
An option on the Log Data Set Defaults and List Data Set Defaults panels, which are choices on the Log/
List pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel,

Log Message ID . . . _ (/ = Yes)

allows you to select whether the message ID is written to the log data set as part of the long message
text. The initial default is deselected. Note that not all lines in the log data set originate from a message
member. Therefore, not every line in the log data set will have a message number associated with it.
Note: This facility does not affect long message text returned by the GETMSG service, messages
displayed in the Error Box, or messages displayed by TRACEX.

NOP
NOP

The classic no operation command.

82 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 ISPF System Commands

NRETRIEV
NRETRIEV

Data set and library name retrieved. See “Name retrieval with the NRETRIEV command” on page 63 for
more information.

PANELID
PANELID
ON

OFF

Indicates whether the panel identifier (ID) is to be displayed. If you enter PANELID without any
parameters, the command toggles the display of the panel ID immediately below the action bar. If an
action bar is not present, the ID is displayed in line 1 on the panel. In GUI mode, the panel ID is placed on
the title bar.
During initial entry to ISPF, the PANELID is set to OFF. The ID is displayed only if the panel contains a
protected-field attribute byte in row 1 column 1 (relative to the action bar) and is padded with one blank.
The commands SYSNAME, USERID, PANELID, and SCRNAME share the same 17-character area at the
start of the Title line. If more than one of these commands are specified, ISPF displays as many as will fit,
in this order of priority: SYSNAME, if specified, is always displayed. Then, as long as there is enough room,
USERID is displayed, then PANELID, then SCRNAME.

PFSHOW
PFSHOW
ON

OFF

TAILOR

Toggles through the different forms of the function key area. The first time you enter the PFSHOW
command (without parameters), the long form of the function key area is displayed. If you enter the
command again, the short form is displayed. If you enter the command once again, the keys are removed
from the display. Therefore, if you continue to enter the command, the different choices are toggled:
• Long form (default)
• Short form
• No display.
The form that you select affects all panels displayed in the session. The DM component updates the
system variable ZPFSHOW to represent the current state of the function key area form and saves the
value in the system profile.
PFSHOW ON displays the long form of the function key area.
PFSHOW OFF specifies that the function key area will not be displayed.
PFSHOW TAILOR displays a panel that lets you specify the set of function keys (primary, alternate, or all)
for which definitions are to be displayed and the number of keys per line to display in each function key
definition line.

PRINT
PRINT

Records a snapshot of the physical screen image in the list data set for subsequent printing.

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 83

ISPF System Commands

For the PRINT, PRINT-HI, PRINTL, and PRINTLHI commands, a screen image can exceed 121 characters.
When it does, the line must be split when the output is being directed to a printer other than a 3800. The
line length is obtained from a user-modifiable specification on the ISPF Settings panel for the list data set.
The default length for printing is 121 characters.
Note: The PRINT command is disabled if you are running in GUI mode.

Using PRINT commands with DBCS

The PRINT commands are affected in the DBCS environment as follows:
• DBCS character printing
Because shift-out and shift-in characters do not occupy positions on a printer, ISPF inserts a blank
character before each shift-out and after each shift-in.
• Fields affected by the OUTLINE keyword
Field-outlining information is embedded in the record as a set-attribute (SA) order. Each SA order
occupies three bytes. One SA is required to start field-outlining, one to end field-outlining, and one to
change field-outlining. Therefore, each affected field normally takes six additional bytes.
Thus, the record-length of print command output is larger than the screen width. The LIST file should be
large enough to contain the expanded records. If not, the output might not print correctly.

PRINTG
PRINTG

Allows you to send the information on the current logical screen to a Graphical Data Display Manager
(GDDM) graphics printer.
Note:
1. In split-screen mode, ISPF adds the split line to the top logical screen. If you issue the PRINTG
command from the top screen, the split line is printed along with the logical screen.
2. Also, in split-screen mode, PRINTG prints all data in the visible portion of the logical screen, but only
the graphics area data in the nonvisible portion of the logical screen.
If you use the other print commands (PRINT, PRINT-HI, PRINTL, and PRINTLHI) to print screen images
containing a graphics area, the part of the screen containing the graphics area prints as blanks.
If you issue the PRINTG command as a COMMAND option on a DISPLAY service request, only data already
defined to GDDM at the time the service request is issued will be printed. Any GDDM fields defined by the
dialog (using GDDM commands) before issuing the DISPLAY service request will be printed.
Before issuing the PRINTG command from a command line you must first have initialized the GDDM
graphic interface using the GRINIT service.
PRINTG does not provide return codes to a dialog; however, it does display completion or error messages.
For information about how to specify parameters related to using the PRINTG command, see the
information about Print Graphics Parms in the Settings (Option 0) topic of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol
II.
Note: The PRINTG command is disabled if you are running in GUI mode.

PRINT-HI
PRINT-HI

Same as PRINT, except that high-intensity characters on the screen are printed with overstrikes to
simulate the dual-intensity display.
See “Using PRINT commands with DBCS” on page 84 for more information.

84 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 ISPF System Commands

Note: The PRINT-HI command is disabled if you are running in GUI mode.

PRINTL
PRINTL

Causes a snapshot of the logical screen image to be recorded in the ISPF list file for subsequent printing.
In split-screen mode, the PRINTL command prints what would be seen if split-screen were not in effect.
See “Using PRINT commands with DBCS” on page 84 for more information.
Note: The PRINTL command is disabled if you are running in GUI mode.

PRINTLHI
PRINTLHI

Same as PRINTL, except that high-intensity characters on the logical screen are printed with overstrikes
to simulate the dual-intensity display.
See “Using PRINT commands with DBCS” on page 84 for more information.
Note: The PRINTLHI command is disabled if you are running in GUI mode.

PSCOLOR
PSCOLOR

Globally alters the color, intensity, and highlighting of point-and-shoot fields through a pop-up dialog.
Valid choices include:

Color Intensity Highlight

RED HIGH NONE

PINK LOW BLINK
GREEN REVERSE
YELLOW USCORE
BLUE
TURQ (Turquoise)
WHITE

To restore the ISPF default values, delete any new values you have entered (leaving the entry fields blank)
and press Enter, or select the Defaults field.

RCHANGE
RCHANGE

Repeats the action of the previous CHANGE command (change one character string to another) (Edit and
View only).

REFACTD
REFACTD nnnnnnnn xx

Calls the personal data set list named nnnnnnnn and retrieves the data set in position xx. See “Command
interface (fast path) to the personal list function” on page 65 for additional information.

REFACTL
REFACTL nnnnnnnn xx

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 85

ISPF System Commands

Calls the personal library list named nnnnnnnn and retrieves the data set in position xx. See “Command
interface (fast path) to the personal list function” on page 65 for additional information.

REFADDD
REFADDD nnnnnnnn

Updates the personal data set list named nnnnnnnn with the most recently referenced data set. See
“Command interface (fast path) to the personal list function” on page 65 for additional information.

REFADDL
REFADDL nnnnnnnn

Updates the personal library list named nnnnnnnn with the most recently referenced library. See
“Command interface (fast path) to the personal list function” on page 65 for additional information.

REFLISTD
REFLISTD xx

Calls the reference data set list dialog and retrieves the data set in position xx. See “Command interface
(fast path) to the personal list function” on page 65 for additional information.

REFLISTL
REFLISTL xx

Calls the reference library list dialog and retrieves the library in position xx. See “Command interface (fast
path) to the personal list function” on page 65 for additional information.

REFOPEND
REFOPEND

Calls the personal data set open dialog. See “Command interface (fast path) to the personal list function”
on page 65 for additional information.

REFOPENL
REFOPENL

Calls the personal library list open dialog. See “Command interface (fast path) to the personal list
function” on page 65 for additional information.

RESIZE
RESIZE

Increases the size of a pop-up window to fill the entire 3270 physical display area. The initial RESIZE
command increases the pop-up window to its maximum size, and the following RESIZE reduces the
window to its original size.

RETF
RETF

Retrieves commands from the command stack moving in the direction from the oldest command in the
command stack toward the most recent commands in the command stack. Forward retrieve (RETF)

86 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 ISPF System Commands

retrieves the oldest command on the command stack, if RETF is entered immediately after a command is
executed, before performing a RETRIEVE. See “RETF command” on page 95 for more information.

RETP
RETP

Causes a pop-up panel to be displayed with a list of the last 25 commands in the retrieve stack. Retrieve
pop-up (RETP) enables you to select by number the command to be retrieved. The command selected is
retrieved to the command line, as it is when using other retrieve commands. You will not be able to
change the commands in the retrieve pop-up until the command is selected and retrieved to the
command line.
The RETP pop-up panel has an OPTIONS action bar choice that allows you to set the minimum number of
characters required to save a command in the retrieve stack and to choose whether to position the cursor
at the beginning or end of the retrieved command when the command is retrieved to the command line.
RETP displays the pop-up panel if the retrieve stack is empty, which allows the user to change the retrieve
options. See “RETP command” on page 96 for more information.

RETRIEVE
RETRIEVE

Repeatedly entering RETRIEVE causes the commands most recently entered from the primary input field,
usually the ZCMD field, to be displayed on the command line. The commands are displayed one at a time,
in the reverse sequence to which they were entered (last-in, first-out). This allows you to easily recall a
command for resubmission from the command line. You can edit the command before entering it if you
wish. See “RETRIEVE command” on page 94 for more information.

RETURN
RETURN

Causes an immediate return to a primary option menu or to the display from which you entered a nested
dialog. The RETURN command simulates repeated END commands, up to some appropriate stopping
point, without displaying intervening panels. See “Using the RETURN command” on page 96 for more
information.

RFIND
RFIND

Repeats the action of the previous FIND command (find one or more occurrences of a specified character
string) or the FIND part of the most recent CHANGE command (Browse, Edit, and View only).

RIGHT
RIGHT

Scrolls right. If your cursor is in a scrollable field, this scrolls towards the end of the field.

SAREA
SAREA

Displays the Status Area pop-up window.

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 87

ISPF System Commands

SCRNAME
SCRNAME screen name
PERM

ON

OFF

Causes the logical screen in which the command is entered to be given the screen name specified. The
name can be any set of 2 to 8 characters that conform to member naming rules, except NEXT, PREV, LIST,
ON, and OFF.
PERM is an optional parameter to indicate that ISPF does not allow the SCRNAME parameter on a SELECT
statement, or the setting of the modifiable system variable ZSCRNAME, to override the value being
assigned by this SCRNAME command. The PERM setting lasts for the duration of the logical screen. After
you end the logical screen, the setting is no longer active.
SCRNAME ON causes the name that you specify for the screen to be displayed in the panelid area of the
screen. SCRNAME OFF removes the screen name from the visible display.
The commands SYSNAME, USERID, PANELID, and SCRNAME share the same 17-character area at the
start of the Title line. If more than one of these commands are specified, ISPF displays as many as will fit,
in this order of priority: SYSNAME, if specified, is always displayed. Then, as long as there is enough room,
USERID is displayed, then PANELID, then SCRNAME.

SETTINGS
SETTINGS

Displays the ISPF Settings panel.

SPLIT
SPLIT
NEW

Causes the screen to be divided into two logical screens separated by a horizontal line or changes the
location of the horizontal line. If you have de-selected the Always show split line option in Settings, there
is no split line in 3270 mode. In GUI mode, each screen is shown as a separate physical window. See
“Splitting the screen horizontally or vertically” on page 46 for more information.

SPLITV
SPLITV

On 3290 terminals, causes the screen to be separated into two vertical logical screens.
The SPLITV function is not active if the actual screen data display is more than 80 characters wide.

START
START

Starts a dialog in a new logical screen. If a logical screen does not exist, it will be created.
You can use the START command to:
• Issue a command from the ISPF command table; for example, START KEYLIST
• Issue a command with parameters (in single quotes; for example, START 'ISRROUTE BRI'
• Start a dialog; for example, START PANEL(ISRUTIL)

88 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 ISPF System Commands

Note:
1. If you are running in GUI mode, issuing the START command creates a new window.
2. If you are running on the host and invoke START from a pull-down choice, the screen will be split
where your cursor is located within the pull-down.
3. This function does not change the limitation number of logical screens. If ISPF already has the
maximum number of screens when the START command is issued, the screen is re-split; that is, the
split line might move on the host, or a window is reused if you are running in GUI mode.

SWAP
SWAP
LIST

PREV

NEXT
screen name
n

When no parameters are given (in 3270 mode), moves the cursor to where it was previously positioned on
the other logical screen of a split-screen pair.
When operating in split-screen mode, pressing the SWAP key (F9) causes ISPF to ignore any entry on the
command line.
When no parameters are given (in GUI mode) and there are more than two screens present, defaults to
SWAP LIST.
Entering SWAP LIST displays the ISPF task list. The task list displays this information about all of the
active logical screens:
• Screen ID (ZSCREEN)
• Screen name
• Panel ID
• Application ID
• Session type (GUI or 3270)
You can select from this list the screen you want to display or start a new screen or application. The
screen you select replaces the screen from which you issued the command.
Using a listed parameter changes the focus (in GUI mode) or display (in 3270 mode) to the PREVious,
NEXT, or specified logical screen.
PREV changes the focus or display to the next lower screen number until reaching 1, then wraps back to
32 or the last number used.
NEXT displays the next highest screen number until the last number used is reached (ISPF maximum 32,
your installation might vary), then will wrap back to number 1.
SWAP screen name changes the display or focus to the screen called screen name, if it is active. See the
SCRNAME command for more information about screen names.
SWAP n, where n is a number, changes the display or focus to the specified screen number, if it is active.

SWAPBAR
SWAPBAR

The list of logical screens can be activated by entering the SWAPBAR or SWAPBAR ON command on the
command line. The list is displayed on the last line of the physical screen.

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 89

ISPF System Commands

The entry for each logical screen is the screen name if assigned or, if a screen name is not available, it is
the panel name of the current panel displayed for the logical screen. The entry for the active logical
screen has an asterisk (*) in the first character position and, if the name is 8 bytes long, the last character
is not displayed. Also, the alternate logical screen has a "-" in the first position and the 8th character is not
displayed.
The list remains active until you enter the SWAPBAR or SWAPBAR OFF command. The setting for the
SWAPBAR is maintained in the system profile member and applies across logons.
If the list is longer than the width of the screen, a ">" appears at the right of the list to indicate there are
more entries and you can scroll right by either positioning the cursor on the ">" and pressing Enter, or by
positioning the cursor on an entry and pressing PF11 which scrolls to the entry indicated. When the start
of the list is not displayed, a "<" is displayed at the left of the visible part of the list to indicate that you can
scroll left on the list by positioning the cursor on the "<" and Pressing Enter or by positioning the cursor on
an entry and pressing PF10.
The active logical screen can be changed by positioning the cursor on an entry and pressing Enter. This
logical screen then becomes the active logical screen. The SWAPBAR entries use the same physical
attribute as the action bar choices and, if in the options settings Tab to action bar choices is selected,
then tabbing to swapbar entries also occurs.
If the cursor is positioned on the swapbar entry for the currently active session and Enter is pressed, this
is treated the same as Enter being pressed within the active logical screen panel. When the SWAPBAR is
activated, the Always show split line option is deactivated and you are not able to reactivate it until the
SWAPBAR is deactivated.
If SWAPBAR is activated on a screen which is split and the lower panel of the split screen does not
contain enough rows to allow the SWAPBAR to be displayed, the necessary rows to allow the SWAPBAR
to be displayed will be removed from the upper panel display and added to the lower panel display.
You are able to customize the SWAPBAR settings. You can:
• Choose to have a separator line between the logical screen and the SWAPBAR.
• Set the colour of the SWAPBAR.
• Set the highlighting of all the fields within the SWAPBAR (for example, reverse video, underscore or
blinking attribute).
• Set the colour and highlighting attributes of an individual entry (a logical screen) with the SWAPBAR.
• Save the settings that apply to the SWAPBAR as a whole in your system profile, so that these settings
apply to future ISPF sessions (until you modify them).
To set the SWAPBAR customization settings, entering the command SWAPBAR / on the command line.
The panel ISPTLCPN is displayed. You can now set the customization attributes. The changes take effect
once you exit the panel. The setting for a separator line and the colour and highlighting settings for the
SWAPBAR as a whole are saved in your system profile and apply to future ISPF sessions. Any changes to
individual entries in the SWAPBAR only apply to the current ISPF session (that is, the session where the
SWAPBAR / command was entered), and are also lost if the logical screen should terminate and recover.
To clear the settings for a logical screen swap to that screen, enter the SWAPBAR / command and enter D
in the option field to clear the current session.

SWITCH
SWITCH ( 3270 )

GUI

Switches the mode of screen display between GUI and 3270.

90 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 ISPF System Commands

SYSNAME
SYSNAME ( ON )

OFF

SYSNAME ON causes the name that you specify for the screen to be displayed in the panelid area of the
screen. SYSNAME OFF removes the system name from the visible display.
The commands SYSNAME, USERID, PANELID, and SCRNAME share the same 17-character area at the
start of the Title line. If more than one of these commands are specified, ISPF displays as many as will fit,
in this order of priority: SYSNAME, if specified, is always displayed. Then, as long as there is enough room,
USERID is displayed, then PANELID, then SCRNAME.

TOP
TOP

Alias for the UP MAX command. Scrolls to the top of the data.

TSO
TSO

Allows the user to enter a TSO command, CLIST, or REXX command procedure.
Do not enter these commands after the TSO command:
• LOGON, LOGOFF
• ISPF, PDF, ISPSTART, and SPF
• TEST
• Commands that are restricted by TSO
You can enter a CLIST or REXX name after the TSO command, but these restrictions apply:
• The CLIST or REXX command procedure cannot invoke the restricted commands shown in the
preceding list.
• Restrictions that apply to CLIST attention exits are described in z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and
Reference.
• TERMIN command procedure statements cause unpredictable results.

TSOCMD
TSOCMD

Displays the ISPF Command Shell panel.

TSOGUI
TSOGUI ON

OFF

ON specifies that the ISPF/TSO window is resumed and all TSO line mode output and input is directed to
the ISPF/TSO window.
OFF specifies that the ISPF/TSO window is suspended and all full-screen and line mode data appears in
the 3270 window until TSOGUI ON command is issued.

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 91

ISPF System Commands

TUTOR
TUTOR
panelid

Calls the ISPTUTOR program to display specified tutorial panels.

To display a particular tutorial panel, enter the TUTOR command along with the panel identifier of the
desired tutorial panel as a parameter.
If you issue the TUTOR command without a parameter, the general tutorial help panel (ISP00000) is
displayed.

UDLIST
UDLIST

Enables you to build a z/OS UNIX directory list from any command line. You can specify either a personal
data set list name or a pathname for a z/OS UNIX directory. When a personal data set list name is
specified, the pathname entries in the list are used to build the displayed directory list.
By issuing the command with no parameters, you cause a list of available personal data set lists to be
displayed. You can then select the personal data set list to be used to build the displayed directory list.
This panel also provides a field to enter the pathname of the directory you want to list.
Note: z/OS UNIX pathnames are case sensitive. In general, ISPF command line fields are defined with the
CAPS(ON) attribute which causes data entered in the command line to be converted to uppercase.
Consequently, pathnames specified as a parameter on the command line are, in general, converted to
uppercase before being passed to the UDLIST command. This can result in the requested directory not
being found. If this occurs ISPF converts the specified pathname to lower case and re-issues the find for
the directory. If the requested directory is still not found, enter the UDLIST command without a parameter
and specify the case-sensitive directory pathname in the field on the personal lists selection panel.

UP
UP

Scrolls toward the top of the data.

USERID
USERID ( ON )

OFF

USERID ON displays your user ID in the panelid area of the screen. USERID OFF removes your user ID
from the visible display.
The commands SYSNAME, USERID, PANELID, and SCRNAME share the same 17-character area at the
start of the Title line. If more than one of these commands are specified, ISPF displays as many as will fit,
in this order of priority: SYSNAME, if specified, is always displayed. Then, as long as there is enough room,
USERID is displayed, then PANELID, then SCRNAME.

WINDOW
WINDOW

Moves a pop-up that is currently displayed.

If more than one pop-up is displayed on your logical screen, only the active (or most recent) pop-up will
move.

92 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 ISPF System Commands

A pop-up can only be moved within the logical screen from which it originated.
Note: The WINDOW command is disabled if you are running in GUI mode.

WS
WS

Modelessly starts the command you specify, providing a seamless interface between host and
workstation applications. For example, when running in GUI mode, you can enter this command to invoke
a workstation editor on a file named test.fil: WS e.exe test.fil

WSCON
WSCON

Displays the Initiate Workstation Connection panel. Using this panel, you can start a workstation
connection. There are some restrictions to consider if you choose to start a workstation connection with
this command:
• At the completion of ISPF command processing, or program, CLIST, or REXX exec execution, ISPF does
not reprocess the panel from which the command was invoked. The panel is simply relaunched to the
screen without processing, for example, the panel's )INIT section. So, if certain constructs are defined
within the panel sections based on the ZGUI variable (nonblank indicating connection in GUI mode),
these constructs are not defined properly until after the Enter key is pressed following the WSCON
command.
• When connecting to the workstation in GUI mode, the first panel displayed in GUI mode might not
contain group boxes and images that are defined on the panel. After you press the Enter key, causing
the panel to be reprocessed, these constructs are visible in GUI mode.

WSDISCON
WSDISCON

Disconnects your workstation connection. There are some restrictions to consider if you choose to
disconnect from a workstation with this command:
• At the completion of ISPF command processing, or program, CLIST, or REXX exec execution, ISPF does
not reprocess the panel from which the command was invoked. The panel is simply relaunched to the
screen without processing, for example, the panel's )INIT section. So, if certain constructs are defined
within the panel sections based on the ZGUI variable (nonblank indicating connection in GUI mode),
these constructs are not defined properly until after the Enter key is pressed following the WSDISCON
command.
• When disconnecting from GUI mode, the name of any group boxes defined on the panel from which you
issued WSDISCON, will display on the screen in 3270 mode. After you press the Enter key, causing the
panel to be reprocessed, these names disappear and any panel text under the names reappears.
• If in GUI mode and in split screen mode when you invoke the WSDISCON command, you are
disconnected from the workstation and the screen from which you issued WSDISCON is displayed in the
full 3270 emulator session without a split line, regardless of how "Always show split line" is set. The
other ISPF sessions are hidden and available for display after the swap command is entered. Additional
split requests cause the split line to be redisplayed, provided the "Always show split line" setting is
selected.
• If pop-up windows are displayed in GUI mode when the WSDISCON command is issued, those pop-up
windows are suspended on the 3270 session and the panels display as full-screen panels. If new
addpops are then invoked, these new panels display as pop-up windows.
• You cannot disconnect using the WSDISCON command when running in batch GUI mode.

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 93

ISPF System Commands

• If the CODEPAGE and CHARSET parameters were specified (on the WSCON service, the Initiate
Workstation Connection panel, or the ISPSTART GUI statement) when your workstation connection was
made, these values might no longer be the host code page and character set in 3270 mode following a
WSDISCON command. The values returned from the terminal query are restored as the active code
page and character set. If your emulator does not support code pages, the CODEPAGE and CHARSET
parameter values originally specified on your ISPSTART statement are used. If these ISPSTART
parameters were not specified, ENGLISH is the default specification.

ZCLRSFLD
ZCLRSFLD

If the cursor is on a scrollable input field, that field is cleared to blanks. If the field is part of a TABLE
DISPLAY operation a row select will occur when ENTER is next pressed. If the field is not scrollable the
command is passed to the application.

ZKEYS
ZKEYS

Displays a panel that lets you view and change the current function key variables. This command is
equivalent to selecting the Global PF Key settings choice from the Function keys pull-down on the ISPF
Settings panel.

Using the RETRIEVE, RETF, and RETP commands

This topic describes how to use the RETRIEVE, RETF, and RETP commands.

RETRIEVE command
The RETRIEVE command causes the most recently entered command to be displayed on the command
line. If the command recalled by RETRIEVE is longer than the current primary input field, ISPF truncates
the command to the size of the primary input field for display purposes. Only the data displayed in the
primary input field is processed and stored in the command retrieval stack when you press Enter or a
function key. However, the original command retains its full length in the retrieval stack.
If the current panel has no input fields, then the size of the primary input field is zero and the retrieved
command is not displayed. Normal stack processing occurs, however, and the internal pointer is
incremented to the next saved command. This can result in an unexpected command being recalled when
RETRIEVE is issued on a subsequent panel that has input fields.
If you issue the RETRIEVE command when the stack is empty, ISPF presents you with a blank command
line with the cursor in the first position. If the stack is not empty, ISPF places the cursor immediately
following the retrieved command.
If you are in the process of recalling a string of commands by issuing successive RETRIEVE commands,
you can cause ISPF to recycle to the top of the command retrieval stack by pressing Enter when the
primary input field (normally the command line) is blank.
When you are operating in split-screen mode, one stack retains commands for all logical screens.
There are five cases for which ISPF does not retain an entered command for retrieval:
• Commands entered using attention fields, such as cursor-select fields.
• Commands entered through the use of function keys. This includes any portion of a compound
command that results from pressing a function key. For example, if you key PAGE into the primary input
field and then press the function key set to the DOWN command, only the PAGE portion of the DOWN
PAGE command is retained as a single element in the retrieval stack. The entire character string entered
from the primary input field in conjunction with a function key is always retained, whereas any portion of
the command resulting from the function key value is not retained.

94 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 ISPF System Commands

• The RETRIEVE command, if entered as a single command. If RETRIEVE is one of the commands of a
chain being processed by ISPF, the entire chain is placed on the retrieval stack. However, processing of
the command chain ends when ISPF interprets the RETRIEVE command and displays the next
command in the stack. Any commands following RETRIEVE in the chain are not processed.
RETRIEVE can be part of a stack element as a parameter of another command. For example, you might
enter FIND RETRIEVE as a command.
• Commands entered on the COMMAND option of the DISPLAY service.
• Jump function (extended return) commands entered from a nondisplay field.
You can issue any retrieved command, as is, while it is being displayed, or you can edit the command line
and then issue the modified version.
Command retrieval works on a last-in, first-out basis. For example, assume that the last three commands
you have issued are PRINT, DOWN, and RIGHT, in that order. Now suppose that you want to again issue
the PRINT command. Assuming that F12 is set to RETRIEVE, the sequence of operations is:
1. Press F12. RIGHT displays on the command line.
2. Press F12 again. DOWN displays on the command line.
3. Press F12 a third time. PRINT displays on the command line.
4. Press Enter.
You can also use the RETRIEVE command to check and correct errors made in keying commands. For
example, suppose that you mistakenly enter PFSHOW TAYLOR. When ISPF advises you that TAYLOR is not
a valid parameter, you would:
1. Press F12. PFSHOW TAYLOR displays on the command line.
2. Type over the Y with an I.
3. Press Enter.
Each ISPF session supports only one command retrieval stack, to be shared by all logical screens. The
number of commands that ISPF saves for retrieval depends on:
• The size of the stack area allocated for this purpose by the installation. See z/OS ISPF Planning and
Customizing for information on changing the size of the stack area allocated for RETRIEVE command
processing.
• The lengths of the individual command lines that are saved.
As a command is entered, it goes to the top of the stack, pushing all other commands down. If there is not
enough room at the bottom of the stack to hold the entire bottom command, it is dropped from the stack.
Duplicate commands are allowed in the stack, except when the command being entered is a duplicate of
the command at the top of the stack. All command lines (except the RETRIEVE command) are placed in
the stack as entered, regardless of validity. Actually, these commands can be any character string, up to
255 bytes each, entered from the screen's primary input field (not necessarily the ZCMD field).
Jump function commands are stored in the stack unless they are entered from a nondisplay field,
regardless of whether the field is the primary input field or not.
If the RETRIEVE command is repeatedly entered until the bottom command in the stack displays, issuing
the RETRIEVE command once more causes the command at the top of the stack to be displayed again. To
force a return to the top of the stack, clear the command field and press Enter. Then, the next RETRIEVE
command causes the command line to be set to the command at the top of the stack.

RETF command
The forward retrieve (RETF) command recalls commands from the command retrieval stack from the
oldest command in the stack towards the most recent commands in the stack. This is useful when you
RETRIEVE too many times in an attempt to retrieve a specific command. RETF enables you to return to
the desired command without having to cycle through the entire retrieval stack.

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 95

ISPF System Commands

RETP command
The retrieve pop-up (RETP) command causes a pop-up panel to be displayed with the last 25 commands
in the command retrieval stack listed. You can select the command you want to retrieve by number. The
selected command is retrieved to the command line. When using the RETP command, these
considerations apply:
1. If a command in the command retrieval stack is too long to fit in the retrieve pop-up, the last visible
character of the command is changed to a > to show that some characters are not displayed. However,
the entire command is retrieved to the command line when it is selected to be retrieved.
2. The default for the minimum number of characters is one, so any command entered is saved on the
retrieval stack. The user has the option of setting the value from 1-99 for the minimum number of
characters to save. Therefore, if you select three characters for the minimum number to be saved in
the retrieval stack and a one- or two-character command is entered, it is not added to the retrieval
stack. This prevents short commands that can be easily retyped from taking up space in the retrieval
stack. Changing the minimum number of characters to save in the retrieval stack does not affect
commands already in the retrieval stack. This setting is saved in the variable ZRETMINL, which is
saved in the user's ISPF system profile table ISPSPROF and across ISPF invocations.
3. The default for the cursor position when a command is retrieved is at the end of the command. The
cursor position setting is saved in the variable ZRETPOSC, which is saved in the user's ISPF system
profile table ISPSPROF and across ISPF invocations.

Using the RETURN command

The RETURN command causes the immediate return to a primary option menu or to the display from
which you entered a nested dialog. When a RETURN command is entered, the DM component takes this
action:
1. It simulates the END command on the panel that is currently displayed; that is, the DISPLAY or
TBDISPL service returns a code of 8.
2. For subsequent requests, made through the DISPLAY or TBDISPL service, for display of a different
panel, the panel is not displayed, and a return code of 8 is issued by the service.
3. However, when two consecutive display requests name the same panel, normal operation of the
DISPLAY and TBDISPL services is restored and processing proceeds as though RETURN had not been
entered. The DM component decides whether to proceed. Generally, because RETURN signals the
application user's desire to end the current processing, a developer can limit processing after the
RETURN is received to clean up and do final processing before returning control to the dialog element
from which the function was started.
4. If two consecutive requests do not specify the same panel, processing continues in the mode
described in item “2” on page 96 until control is returned to a primary option menu or a nested dialog
completes. Then, normal operation of the DISPLAY and TBDISPL services is restored.
It might be necessary to suspend processing of a panel temporarily so that other panels can be displayed.
Issue a CONTROL DISPLAY SAVE request to save the contents and control information of the panel whose
processing is to be suspended. Before resuming the processing of this panel, issue CONTROL DISPLAY
RESTORE to reinstate the contents and control information for the panel. If non-ISPF screens have been
displayed, issue CONTROL DISPLAY REFRESH to clear the screen.
This mode of operation continues until either a primary option menu is encountered or a nested dialog
completes. If a primary option menu is encountered, it is displayed. If a nested dialog completes, the
panel from which it was invoked is redisplayed. This panel is exactly as you last saw it, except that the
command field is blank. In either case, this completes the action of the RETURN command.
Note: A nested dialog is one invoked from any panel by a SELECT action command. The HELP and KEYS
commands invoke nested dialogs. In addition, the TSO system commands invoke nested dialogs when
they are used to execute a CLIST procedure that displays panels through ISPF services.
If a dialog function needs to distinguish between END and RETURN, it can do so in one of these ways:

96 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 ISPF System Commands

• If the panel was defined using the panel definition statements, upon return from the DISPLAY or
TBDISPL service, with a return code of 8, the function can examine variable ZVERB in the shared pool. It
contains either END or RETURN.
• If the panel was defined using the DTL, upon return from the DISPLAY or TBDISPL service, with a return
code of 8, the function can examine variable ZVERB in the shared pool. It contains either EXIT or
CANCEL.
• Upon return from the SELECT service when the PANEL keyword was specified, the dialog function can
examine the return code from SELECT. Return code 0 indicates that the END command was entered on
the selected menu panel. Return code 4 indicates that the RETURN command was entered on the
selected menu panel or on some lower-level menu.

Using the jump function

The jump function allows you to go directly to any valid option from the primary option menu currently in
effect. See z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference for information about coding primary option
menus. To use the jump function, enter the option on the command line or in the command field of any
panel, preceded by an equal sign and followed by a blank. For example:

Command ===> =3.1

takes you directly to the first suboption of option 3 on the primary option menu in effect.
The action is as follows:
• If not entered on a primary option menu, the jump function causes repeated END commands to be
simulated until a primary option menu is encountered. What follows the equal sign is then used on the
primary option menu, and pressing of the Enter key is simulated. The primary option menu is not
displayed.
• If entered on a primary option menu, the jump function equal sign is ignored and the specified option is
selected.
Unlike the RETURN command, the jump function is not affected by nested dialogs. For example, from the
ISPF Edit option, you enter a HELP command to enter the tutorial. Then from the tutorial, you enter =1.
This causes the tutorial to end, Edit to end, and primary option 1 to be started.
For convenience, you can enter a jump function in two other places:
• Any field that is preceded by an arrow. The arrow must consist of at least two equal signs followed by a
greater-than sign (==>). Also, the arrow must immediately precede the input attribute byte.
• Any field preceded by leader dots (that is, ... or . .). ISPF looks at the three characters preceding the
field; they must be either three consecutive dots or two dots separated by a blank.
The command field is the only field that can be initialized to =n by the dialog and have the jump function
recognize it. Modifying the ZCMD field in the )PROC or )INIT section can affect jump function operation.
If ISPF encounters an error during jump function processing, the processing stops with the jump function
in error displayed on the command line, unless that function was entered from a nondisplay field.
Because a jump request generally signals a user's desire to end the current processing, the dialog
developer must limit processing to cleaning up and completing processing before returning control to the
selection in the jump request. Otherwise, the dialog developer can cancel the jump request/return mode
by providing two consecutive displays with the same panel name.
The jump function can be entered with the RETURN command or RETURN function key. For example, you
type =2 and then press the RETURN function key rather than pressing Enter. The result is the same as if
you had typed =2 and pressed Enter.
See “Using the Exit option (X) with the jump function” on page 10 for more information.

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 97

ISPF System Commands

Using the scrolling commands

You can use the scrolling commands if the dialog function invokes the DISPLAY service for panels with
scrollable areas or scrollable dynamic areas, the table display service (TBDISPL), or the interfaces to the
PDF component VIEW, BROWSE, and EDIT services. During processing of the tutorial, ISPF interprets
these commands as follows:
UP (F7/19)
Same as the UP command
DOWN (F8/20)
Same as the SKIP command
LEFT (F10/22)
Same as the BACK command
RIGHT (F11/23)
Same as the Enter key (display the next page).
When scrollable data is displayed, scrolling enables you to move the screen window up, down, left, or
right across the information. When the cursor is within a scrollable field, scrolling enables you to move left
or right within the variable data. Only up and down scrolling is allowed for table displays and scrollable
areas.
When scrolling is allowed, a scroll amount is commonly displayed at the top of the screen (line 2). This
amount determines the number of lines, or columns, scrolled with each use of a scroll command. To
change the scroll amount, move the cursor to the scroll field and type over the displayed amount. Valid
scroll amounts are:
ZXSMIN-ZXSMAX
A value between ZXSMIN and ZXSMAX where ZXSMIN and ZXSMAX are system profile variables
containing the minimum and maximum scroll values as defined in the configuration table. Can be in
the range of 0 to 9999999. When the value is entered in the scroll field the user is limited to entering a
4-digit value but when the value is entered in the command field it can be any value between ZXSMIN
and ZXSMAX (inclusive).
Note: If you specify a scroll amount of 0, no scrolling occurs.
PAGE
Specifies scrolling by one page.
For scrolling purposes, a page is defined as the amount of information currently visible on the logical
screen. Function key definition lines are not a part of the page. In split-screen mode, for example, a
Browse display might have 12 lines by 80 columns of scrollable data. In this case, a scroll amount of
PAGE moves the text up or down by 12 lines, or right or left by 80 columns. If the cursor is within a
scrollable field, PAGE will move the text right or left the equivalent of the display field length.
DATA
For up and down scrolling, specifies scrolling by one line less than a page. For left and right scrolling, it
is one column less than a page. Within a scrollable field, it is one column less than the display field
length.
HALF
Specifies scrolling by half a page. Within a scrollable field, it is half the display field length.
MAX
Specifies scrolling to the top, bottom, left margin, right margin, beginning of field or end of field,
depending upon which scrolling command is used and the current cursor position. For scrollable
fields, the maximum right position is the field length minus the display length and the maximum left
position is 1.
CSR
Specifies scrolling based on the current position of the cursor. The line or column indicated by the
cursor is moved to the top, bottom, left margin, or right margin of the screen, depending upon which
scrolling command is used. If the cursor is not in the body of the data or if it is already positioned at
the top, bottom, left margin, or right margin, a full-page scroll occurs.

98 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 ISPF System Commands

Note: Scroll amount is not used for scrollable areas.

The current scroll amount is saved in the application profile. There are three scroll amount values: one for
Browse (ZSCBR), one for Edit and View (ZSCED), and one for member lists (ZSCML). When you type over
the scroll amount, the new value remains in effect until you change it again. The value MAX is an
exception. Following a MAX scroll, the scroll amount reverts to its previous value.
The scroll amount field is optional. If the input field following the command field in the panel body is
exactly four characters long, it is assumed to be the scroll amount field. If there Otherwise, the system
variable ZSCROLLD, which can be set by the dialog, is used to determine the default scroll amount. is no
scroll amount field and ZSCROLLD has not been set, the default is PAGE.
When you enter a scroll request, variables ZSCROLLA, ZSCROLLN, and ZSCOLNL are set. ZSCROLLA
contains the value of the scroll amount field (MAX or CSR, for example). ZSCROLLN and ZSCROLNL
contain the number of lines or columns to scroll, computed from the value in the scroll amount field or
entered as a scroll number. For example, if a dialog is in split-screen mode and if 12 lines are currently
visible and a user requests DOWN HALF, ZSCROLLN and ZSCROLNL each contain a value of '6'. ZSCROLLN
can support values up to '9999'. If a scroll number greater than '9999' is specified, ZSCROLLN is set to a
value of '9999'. ZSCROLNL can support values up to '9999999'. The system variable ZVERB contains the
scroll direction, DOWN in this case. If ZSCROLLA has a value of MAX, the values of ZSCROLLN and
ZSCROLNL are not meaningful.
You can also use any valid scroll amount as part of the scroll command. For example, type:

Command ===> UP 3

and press Enter, or type:

Command ===> 3

and press the UP function key. Either form results in a temporary, one-time override of the scroll amount.
If ISPF does not recognize the value specified on the command line as a valid scroll amount, such as
PAGE, DATA, HALF, MAX, CSR, or a positive integer, the value is interpreted as a command and passed to
the function in control.

Using the EXPAND command

The expand panel displays the variable in a scrollable dynamic area. Standard up and down scrolling is
supported. You can display the variable in character and hexadecimal using the primary command shown.
The setting will be remembered for subsequent expand processing.
HEX ON/OFF
Turn hexadecimal display on and off.

Using command tables to define commands

ISPF implements system, user, site and application commands through the use of command tables.
A system command table (ISPCMDS) is distributed with ISPF in the table input library. An application can
provide an application command table by including a table named xxxxCMDS in its table input library,
where xxxx is a 1- to 4-character application ID. You can also add up to 3 user command tables and up to
3 site command tables to the ISPF Configuration table. This is a permanent place for your set of user-
defined commands. When IBM updates the ISPF command table, you do not need to re-add your
commands. By setting the Before or After option, you can search the site command tables either before or
after the ISP command table. The default option is Before. If the application's table input library is
defined with the LIBDEF service, the LIBDEF must be active when the SELECT service call that invokes the
application is issued, and the PASSLIB parameter must be specified.
You can define an application command table using either:

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 99

ISPF System Commands

• The command table utility described in the Command Table Utility (Option 3.9) section of the z/OS ISPF
User's Guide Vol II.
• The Dialog Tag Language (DTL) and ISPF conversion utility. See the z/OS ISPF Dialog Tag Language
Guide and Reference for the tags you must use.
When a user enters a command, the DM component searches the application command table (if any),
then the user command tables (if any), then the site command tables (if any), and finally the system
command table, ISPCMDS. This is the default search order, which assumes the option Before for the site
command tables. If you choose the option After for these tables, they are searched after ISPCMDS. If it
finds the command, action is taken immediately. If it does not find the command in the application or
system tables, the command is passed to the dialog, unaltered, in the command field. The dialog must
then take appropriate action.

Command table format

A command table is an ISPF table in which each row contains the specification for one command. Each
column contains a variable for the command. The variables are:
ZCTVERB
Specifies the name of the command. A command name must be from 2-8 characters long and must
begin with an alphabetic character. Note that the terms command name and command verb are
synonymous and are used interchangeably.
ZCTTRUNC
Specifies the minimum number of characters that you must enter to find a match with the command
name. If this number is zero or equal to the length of the name, you must enter the entire name. This
number must not be one, or be greater than the length of the name.
ZCTACT
Specifies the action to be performed when the command specified in ZCTVERB is entered. Can be up
to 240 characters.
ZCTDESC
Contains a brief description of the purpose of the command. This variable is optional. It is not used by
the DM component in processing the command, but it is displayed by the command table utility. The
description is limited to 80 characters.
The dialog manager treats ZCTVERB, ZCTTRUNC, ZCTACT, and ZCTDESC as defined function variables.
They are not accessible to dialogs.
The valid actions that can be performed (ZCTACT) are:
SELECT
Followed by selection keywords causes the selected dialog (command, program, or menu) to be given
control immediately.
ALIAS
Followed by another command and any parameters allows specification of command aliases.
PASSTHRU
Causes the command to be passed to the dialog instead of continuing to search the system table.
SETVERB
Causes the command to be passed to the dialog with the command verb stored in ZVERB separately
from the parameters. The ISPF system commands distributed with the product that have SETVERB as
an action are not always passed through to the dialog. See “Passing commands to a dialog function”
on page 104 for further discussion.
NOP
Causes the command to be inactive. ISPF displays an inactive command message in this case.
Blank (no action)
Causes the table entry to be ignored. Scanning continues, searching for additional entries with the
same name.

100 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 ISPF System Commands

A variable name
The name begins with an ampersand and can be one of the actions described in this list. This allows
dynamic specification of command action.
Additional action keywords are used to indicate system commands for which special processing is
required. These are CURSOR, PRINT, PRINTG, PRINT-HI, PRINTL, PRINTLHI, SPLIT, SPLITV, SWAP, and
RETRIEVE. Although these are valid actions, they are intended for use only in the system command table
distributed with ISPF and are intended to be used only with the associated command verb. They are not
intended for use in application command tables.

Customizing the ISPCMDS command table

Use these steps to customize your ISPCMDS command table:
1. Copy the ISPCMDS into a data set concatenated before the '*.SISPTENU' data set in the ISPTLIB DD
statement.
• Name the new member using a unique prefix of up to 4 characters, for example: RSMCMDS or
MOD1CMDS.
• Allocate the copied-to data set to the ISPTABL DD card. You can use this CLIST to do a LIBDEF
against ISPTABL if you have a ISPTABL DD allocated:

PROC 0
ISPEXEC LIBDEF ISPTABL DATASET ID(the_dataset_name)
WRITE &LASTCC
END

If your logon procedure does not allocate an ISPTABL DD card:

PROC 0
ALLOC F(ISPTABL) DA(the_dataset_name)
END

2. Using option 3.9, customize this member with your new commands.
• Option 3.9 will search the ISPTLIB DD for this member.
• Option 3.9 will save (UPDATE) this customized member to the output data set pointed to by
ISPTABL.
3. After you have customized this member, you can use option 3.1 or 3.4 member list to rename this
member to ISPCMDS.
4. Exit ISPF.
• This will nullify the LIBDEF on ISPTABL.
5. Re-invoke ISPF.
• When ISPF searches the ISPTLIB DD concatenation, your customized ISPCMDS will be found first.

SELECT action commands temporarily invoke a new dialog

A SELECT action command can be specified in a command table. The action is coded exactly the same as
for the SELECT service. All SELECT keywords are valid, including NEWAPPL.
The selected dialog is started immediately when a SELECT action command is entered on the command
line of any panel. This temporarily suspends the current dialog. When the selected dialog completes, the
screen is refreshed and the suspended dialog resumes.

Table 5. Examples of SELECT action commands

ZCTVERB ZCTTRUNC ZCTACT
UPDATE 0 SELECT PGM(PQRUPDT) PARM(&ZPARM)
PREPARE 4 SELECT CMD(XPREP &ZPARM) NEWPOOL

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 101

ISPF System Commands

Table 5. Examples of SELECT action commands (continued)

ZCTVERB ZCTTRUNC ZCTACT
MENU 4 SELECT PANEL(&ZPARM)

In the example, the ZCTTRUNC variable indicates that the UPDATE and MENU command names cannot be
truncated. PREPARE, however, can be truncated to PREPAR, PREPA, or PREP. The functions and keywords
in the ZCTACT field indicate the actions that the commands perform.
The ZPARM variable that appears in the SELECT keywords indicates that command parameters are to be
substituted at that point. For example, if these commands were entered:

===> UPDATE BLDG DEPT NAME

===> PREPA LOG LISTING
===> MENU PQRMENU1

these SELECT actions would result:

SELECT PGM(PQRUPDT) PARM(BLDG DEPT NAME)

SELECT CMD(XPREP LOG LISTING) NEWPOOL
SELECT PANEL(PQRMENU1)

ZPARM, a dummy variable, is used only to substitute user-entered parameters into SELECT action
commands. It is not stored in a variable pool and is not accessible to dialogs.
Note:
1. Take care with ACTIONs that use ZPARM, as the ISPF parser will add a matching parenthesis if one
appears to be missing. Consider an entry of "SELECT CMD(%CMD &ZPARM) NEWAPPL(ISR)". If "(XYZ"
is passed then the command will receive "(XYZ) NEWAPPL(ISR)" as a parameter.
2. Use of SELECT action commands can cause recursive entry into dialog functions, which the DM
component allows. The dialog developer should either design functions for recursive use or display a
message if a user attempts to reenter a nonrecursive function.
The ISPF DISPLAY and TBDISPL services can be used recursively. The current display environment is
automatically saved whenever a SELECT action command is entered and is restored upon completion of
the command.

Assigning command aliases

A command alias is an alternate way of expressing a command. For example, you might assign to the
command UP MAX an alias of TOP to make it easier to remember and to issue. In the case of a command
that includes lengthy parameters, using an alias can be a much more efficient way of entering the
command. Also, using aliases can be helpful for writing dialogs in languages for which single words can
meaningfully replace multiword command-parameter expressions. Normally, alias entries are used in an
application command table to refer to system commands, which might or might not include parameter
fields. Issuing the command or its alias causes the same result.
An alias must precede, in the command table, any reference to the command to which it refers. You can
establish an alias by setting values in two command table variables. Set:
• ZCTVERB to the value you wish to use as the alias for an existing command
• ZCTACT to the keyword ALIAS followed by the command, including any parameters, for which you are
establishing the alias. Thus, the value of the ZCTACT variable can be either a single-word command,
such as HELP, or it can be a multipart command, such as UP MAX.
You can set the value of ZCTTRUNC in the command table to the minimum number of characters of the
alias name that must be entered. For example, for the alias FORWARD, if you set ZCTTRUNC to a value of
3, issuing the first three characters (or more) has the same effect as issuing FORWARD. If you assign a
value of 0 in the ZCTTRUNC field, the complete alias name must be issued.
The maximum length of the value you can specify in ZCTACT, including the keyword ALIAS, followed by a
blank, and the command verb plus any parameters, is 240 characters. This leaves a maximum of 234

102 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 ISPF System Commands

characters for the command, at least one blank following the command, and any parameters. ISPF
interprets up to the first 8 characters in the command name. ISPF issues an error message for command
names that do not contain from 2-8 characters.
Any parameters included in the ZCTACT command table field take precedence over any parameters
included with that command's alias issued from a command line. Thus, if you issue a command alias that
includes parameters, ISPF:
• Recognizes the command alias verb
• Ignores the parameters you specified with the alias
• Substitutes the parameters included with the command verb in ZCTACT.
If the command verb in ZCTACT does not include parameters, ISPF accepts parameters specified with the
command's alias from a command line. This can be useful when a command's parameters do not fit into
the 240 character spaces available in ZCTACT.
You can create a chain of command-parameter aliases in a command table as long as the result is a valid
executable action. The last command verb and parameter values that ISPF encounters in the alias chain
within the command table are the ones that are executed. The command verb and the parameter values
do not necessarily come from the same table entry.

Table 6. Examples of a chain of command-parameter aliases

ZCTVERB ZCTTRUNC ZCTACT
EASYKEY 0 ALIAS CMD PARM1 PARM2
CMD 0 ALIAS CMD1 PARM3
CMD1 0 ALIAS CMD2

In this example, if you entered EASYKEY from a command line, the command that would ultimately be
executed would be CMD2 PARM3.

Table 7. Some more examples of defining alias values

ZCTVERB ZCTTRUNC ZCTACT
QUIT 0 ALIAS END
FORWARD 3 ALIAS DOWN
*TOP 0 ALIAS BACKWARD MAX
*BACKWARD 0 ALIAS UP
*ENDFILE 4 ALIAS LOW
*LOW 0 ALIAS DOWN MAX

*These four entries represent two-level chaining.

This example defines QUIT as an alias of END, FORWARD as an alias of DOWN, and so on. For example, if
you enter QUIT, the system responds as though you had entered END.
Looking at the two-level chaining examples, if you enter TOP, ISPF responds as though you had entered
UP MAX. This is because, at the second level when BACKWARD is replaced with UP, there is no second-
level parameter to replace MAX. In the case of ENDFILE, ISPF responds as though you had entered DOWN
MAX. ISPF replaces the verb LOW with DOWN and the blank parameter value with MAX.
Note: Command aliases included with ISPF in table ISPCMDS include TOP (UP MAX), BOTTOM (DOWN
MAX), BACKWARD (UP), and FORWARD (DOWN).

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 103

ISPF System Commands

Overriding system commands

An application can override any system command simply by including the same command name in the
application command table.

Table 8. Examples of overriding a system command

ZCTVERB ZCTTRUNC ZCTACT
HELP 0 PASSTHRU
TSO 0 NOP

In this example, the dialog has overridden both the HELP and TSO commands. During ISPF processing, if
you enter HELP, the command is passed to the dialog function in control, which determines the action to
be taken. The action specified for the TSO command is NOP, which disables the TSO command. ISPF
displays an inactive command message when a NOP action command has been processed.

Passing commands to a dialog function

Any command that is not found in the application or system command table is passed, unaltered in the
command field, to the dialog. This occurs regardless of whether the command was typed in the command
field or entered by use of a function key or the attention field.
You can force a command to be passed to the dialog, even if the command exists in the command table,
by typing a greater-than symbol (>) in front of the command.
Any command in the command table that has an action of PASSTHRU is processed as though the
command were not found in the table. It is passed in the command field to the dialog.
Commands can also be passed to the dialog using the SETVERB action. This action causes the dialog
manager to separate the name from the command parameters, if any. The command is stored in variable
ZVERB, which is in the shared pool. The left-justified command parameters are passed in the command
field to the dialog.

Table 9. Examples of passing commands to the dialog

ZCTVERB ZCTTRUNC ZCTACT
QUERY 0 SETVERB

The verb QUERY is stored in variable ZVERB and the character string, such as DEPT 877 in the examples
shown, is passed in the command field.
These actions produce the same results:
• Typing QUERY DEPT 877 in the command field and pressing Enter.
• Typing DEPT 877 in the command field and pressing a function key that has been equated to the
character string QUERY.
• Pressing a function key that has been equated to the character string QUERY DEPT 877.
• Using the cursor-select key to select an attention field that contains the character string QUERY DEPT
877.
These system commands, distributed with the DM component, are defined as SETVERB action
commands:

END UP
RETURN DOWN
RFIND LEFT
RCHANGE RIGHT

104 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Using Function Keys

The ZVERB variable can be used to distinguish between END and RETURN. The effect of END and RETURN
on the DISPLAY service is the same because RETURN is used to simulate repeated END commands, until
a primary option menu is reached.
RFIND and RCHANGE are used only by ISPF View, Browse, and Edit. Thus, these commands are not
passed back to a user dialog in ZVERB.
The commands UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT are only active when a scrollable panel is displayed. Use of
these commands from a nonscrollable panel results in a command is not active message.

Specifying command actions dynamically

You can specify a command action dynamically (as part of function processing) by the use of a dialog
variable. A variable action can be used to share commands, such as UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT, with the
DM component. It can also be used to enable or disable commands during certain points in the dialog.
Suppose, for example, an application command table includes these entries:

Table 10. Examples of entries in an application command table

ZCTVERB ZCTTRUNC ZCTACT
UP 0 &SCRVERT
DOWN 0 &SCRVERT

You can use the variable SCRVERT to dynamically control the action of the UP and DOWN vertical scroll
commands as follows:
• If SCRVERT is set to NOP, the commands are not available.
• If SCRVERT is set to PASSTHRU, the commands are passed to the dialog.
• If SCRVERT is set to blank, command scanning continues. In this case, the system definitions for UP and
DOWN in the system command table take effect.
• If SCRVERT is set to an action that is not valid, the commands are not available, as in NOP.
For this particular example, setting SCRVERT to SETVERB would have the same effect as setting it to
blank, because UP and DOWN are defined in the system command table as SETVERB action commands.
If the dialog overrides or shares the use of the scroll commands, it becomes that dialog's responsibility to
ensure that the commands have been redefined with an action of blank, or with SETVERB. This must be
done before starting any ISPF function that requires View, Browse, Edit, and Table Display. The same rule
applies to the RFIND command used by Browse and Edit and the RCHANGE command used by Edit.

Using function keys

Under ISPF, function keys are not automatically assigned to special functions. You equate each function
key to a character string. When you press a function key, it simulates command entry. The processing is
the same as if you had typed the character string in the command field and pressed the Enter key.
Note: On a 3270 display, the horizontal divider line that separates the logical screens is not considered
part of either logical screen. If the cursor is placed on this horizontal divider line and a function key is
pressed, the result is the same as if the ENTER key was pressed and the cursor is positioned on the active
logical screen's command line.
A dialog function cannot distinguish the difference between a command entered by a function key and a
command entered by typing in the command field. If the character string with which the function key is
equated is longer than the screen's command field, the string is truncated without warning.
If you type information on the command line and then press a function key, the function key definition,
followed by a blank, is concatenated ahead of the contents of the command field. For example, suppose

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 105

Using Function Keys

F7 is equated to the character string UP. If you type 4 in the command field and then press F7, the results
are exactly the same as if you had typed UP 4 in the command field and pressed the Enter key.
ISPF does not require function keys for its operation. Commands can be entered in the command field of
any display, including View, Browse, Edit, and Table Display. However, for ease of use, function keys are
strongly recommended.
The default function key assignments distributed with ISPF for the 3x4 key pad on the right side of the
keyboard are shown in the next table. These are function keys 1-12 on a 12-key terminal or keys 13-24 on
a 24-key terminal.

Table 11. Function key arrangement

Function key Function
F1 HELP
F2 SPLIT
F3 END
F4 RETURN
F5 RFIND
F6 RCHANGE
F7 UP
F8 DOWN
F9 SWAP
F10 LEFT
F11 RIGHT
F12 RETRIEVE

Function keys can be displayed at the bottom of a panel. Using the FKA or PFSHOW command, you can
display either the long or short form of the keys, or remove the keys from the panel. See “ISPF system
commands” on page 72 for a complete description of how to display or remove the function keys.
For panels defined without the )PANEL section, the long and short form of the function key area is the
same. If you use a )PANEL section, you can use the KEYLIST command or the "Keylist settings" choice
from the Function keys pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel to determine which keys appear in each
form. For more information on Keylist settings, see the Settings (Option 0) topic of the z/OS ISPF User's
Guide Vol II.
Long
Displays the keys that appear in the short form along with all other keys you indicated should appear
for the long form. The long form is the default. An example of the long form follows:

Option
===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F10=Actions F12=Cancel

Short
Displays the keys that appear in the short form. An example of the short form follows:

Option
===>
F1=Help F3=Exit F10=Actions F12=Cancel

106 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Using Function Keys

No
Removes the function key area, making the space available for the application. The keys are still active
but are not displayed.

Defining function key values

You can define function key values three ways:
• Use the KEYS command to display the Keylist Utility panel or the PF Key Definitions and Labels panel,
then change the function keys for the panel you are on.
• Use the ZKEYS command or select the "Non-Keylist PF Key settings" choice from the Function keys pull-
down on the ISPF Settings panel. Use this method to define the function keys when the )PANEL
statement has been coded on the panel. All DTL-generated panels have a )PANEL statement. For more
information on working with Function Keys and Keylists, see the 'Settings (Option 0)' topic of the z/OS
ISPF User's Guide Vol II.
• Use the KEYLIST command or select the "Keylist settings" choice from the Function keys pull-down on
the ISPF Settings panel. Use this method to define the function keys when the application panels are
defined with the DTL. For more information on Keylist settings, see the 'Settings (Option 0)' topic of the
z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.

Changing the format of the function key area

The FKA and PFSHOW commands let you change the visual display of the function keys on a panel. You
can display the keys in long form or short form, or remove them completely. You can also use the
PFSHOW command with the TAILOR parameter or the "Tailor function key display" choice from the
Function keys pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel to display the Tailor Function Key Definition Display
panel shown in Figure 29 on page 107.

┌───────────────────────────── ISPF Settings ─────────────────────────────┐

s │ Tailor Function Key Definition Display │
│ │
│ For all terminals: │
O │ Number of keys . . 2 1. 12 │
│ 2. 24 │
│ │
│ Keys per line . . . 1 1. Six │
│ 2. Maximum possible │
│ │
│ Primary range . . . 1 1. Lower - 1 to 12 │
│ 2. Upper - 13 to 24 │
│ │
│ For terminals with 24 PF keys: │
│ Display set . . . . 1 1. Primary - display keys 1 to 12 │
│ 2. Alternate - display keys 13 to 24 │
│ 3. All - display all keys │
│ │
│ Press ENTER key to save changes. Enter END to save changes and exit. │
T │ │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
C │ F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel │
⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 29. Tailor Function Key Definition Display Panel (ISPOPFA)

This panel lets you select:

• The number of function keys available for display.

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 107

Using Function Keys

See the information about 'Tailor Function Key Definition Display' in the Settings (Option 0) topic of z/OS
ISPF User's Guide Vol II for a discussion of the rules governing the number of keys available for display.
• The number of keys per line to display in each function key definition line. System variable ZPFFMT
holds the value selected.

Table 12. ZPFFMT system variable on PFSHOW

Choice Description ZPFFMT value
Six Always displays six keys per line SIX
Maximum possible Displays as many keys as will fit on each MAX
line.

Note: The Maximum possible option is forced when you select the Panel display CUA mode option on
the ISPF Settings panel.
• The set of function keys that are to be the primary and alternate keys. System variable ZPRIKEYS holds
the value selected.

Table 13. ZPRIKEYS values

Choice Description ZPRIKEYS value
Lower - 1 to 12 Primary keys are 1-12 LOW
Upper - 13 to 24 Primary keys are 13-24. UPP

The default value is Lower - 1 to 12.

• The set of function keys on terminals with 24 function keys for which definitions are to be displayed.
System variable ZPFSET holds the value selected.

Table 14. ZPFSET system variable, on PFSHOW

Choice Description ZPFSET value
Primary - display keys 1 to 12 Primary set (1-12) PRI
Alternate - display keys 13 to 24 Alternate set (13-24) ALT
All - display all keys All keys (1-24). ALL

ISPF ignores these values for terminals with only 12 function keys.
Variables ZPFFMT, ZPRIKEYS, and ZPFSET are stored in the application profile pool. Dialogs can set these
values directly by using the VPUT statement in a panel definition, or by using the VPUT service in a dialog
function.
Dialog developers can control how the PFSHOW command behaves by using the ZPFCTL system variable.
ZPFCTL is also stored in the application profile pool. Its possible values are:
USER
The user can control the display of function key definition lines by using the PFSHOW command. This
is the default value.
ON
ISPF unconditionally displays function key definitions on all panels. Issuing PFSHOW OFF, FKA OFF, or
toggling to the no display setting causes ISPF to issue an error message.
OFF
ISPF does not display function key definition lines. If PFSHOW ON, PFSHOW TAILOR, FKA ON, or
toggling to the long or short form setting of either command is issued, ISPF displays an error message.
Applications can set the ZPFCTL variable value to either USER, ON, or OFF by using the VPUT service or by
using a VPUT statement with the PROFILE keyword.

108 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Using the cursor select key

Note: The ZPFCTL variable is ignored if the PFSHOW/FKA command is invoked from a panel containing
a )PANEL statement or if the panel was created using DTL.
Similarly, keylists can be controlled to some degree by the application.
The ZKLUSE can be set to Y or N. If KEYLIST is ON, the value in ZKLUSE in the application profile is Y. If
KEYLIST is OFF, it is N. If an application VPUTs the variable to the application profile, the keylist setting is
altered.
These variables can be used by an application to determine what keylist is being used, and where it
comes from.
• ZKLNAME - If KEYLIST is ON and it is a panel with the )PANEL statement, ZKLNAME contains the name
of the keylist currently being used. Otherwise it is blank.
• ZKLAPPL - If KEYLIST is ON and it is a panel with the )PANEL statement, ZKLAPPL contains the
application ID that the keylist currently being used came from. Otherwise it is blank.
• ZKLTYPE - If KEYLIST is ON and it is a panel with the )PANEL statement, ZKLTYPE contains either P
(private) or S (shared), depending on the keylist currently being used. Otherwise it is blank.
Function key definitions appear at the bottom of each logical screen. There can be more than one logical
screen, such as when you are using the split-screen function. If the application has not issued an ADDPOP
service call, ISPF displays no more than four function key definition lines on one panel. If the application
has issued an ADDPOP service call and the set of keys to be displayed is primary or alternate, ISPF
displays no more than two lines. If all of the keys are to be displayed, no more than four lines appear. If all
of the keys will not fit on the lines, ISPF wraps the keys and truncates the last keys.

Saving function key definitions

This topic applies only if you created your application panels using the ISPF panel definition statements
and used the ZKEYS command or selected the "Global PF Key settings" choice from the Function keys
pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel. It does not apply for keys defined with the KEYLIST command or
through the "Keylist settings" choice from the Function keys pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel.
Function key definitions are kept in a set of system variables named ZPF01, ZPF02, ... ZPF24. Labels are
kept in a set of system variables named ZPFL01, ZPFL02, ... ZPFL24.
When you set the "Primary range" field on the Tailor Function Key Definition Display panel to Upper - 13 to
24, variables ZPF13-ZPF24 and ZPFL13-ZPFL24 contain the primary PF key definitions and labels. For
24-key terminals, these definitions correspond to physical keys 13-24. For 12-key terminals, these
definitions correspond to physical keys 1-12. Variables ZPF01-ZPF12 contain the alternate key
definitions, and are meaningful only for terminals with 24 function keys.
When you set the "Primary range" field on the Tailor Function Key Definition Display panel to Lower - 1 to
12, variables ZPF01-ZPF12 and ZPFL01-ZPFL12 contain the primary PF key definitions and labels. For
24-key terminals, these definitions correspond to physical keys 1-12. For 12-key terminals, these
definitions correspond to physical keys 1-12. Variables ZPF13-ZPF24 contain the alternate key definitions
and are meaningful only for terminals with 24 function keys.
Current values for all 24 keys (variables ZPF01-ZPF24 and ZPFL01-ZPFL24) are kept in the application
profile. Hence, unique function key definitions can be associated with different applications.
An application can provide default function key settings for a new user by providing a default profile. An
application can prevent the user from changing the default function key settings by overriding the ZKEYS
command. It does this by assigning the command to NOP in the application command table.

Using the cursor-select key

ISPF permits fields on a panel to be detected with a cursor-select key. The cursor-select key is a hardware
feature on 3179, 3179G, 3180, 3278, 3279, and 3290 terminals.
Panel fields that are detectable by cursor selection can simulate a command entry, or give you an
alternate means of selecting options from a menu. Each field must be defined as an attention field. Use an

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 109

Using the cursor select key

attribute character that has been defined with the ATTN(ON) keyword. The panel designer must provide
the number of blank characters that are required by the terminal hardware before and after the attention
attribute character.
Processing of cursor-selected fields is handled in much the same way as function key processing. The
entire contents of the selected field are treated as a command and processed as though they had been
typed into the command field. If the command is found in the tables, it is performed immediately. If the
command is not found in the tables, it is inserted into the command field, and the entire command field is
passed to the dialog. But unlike function keys, information in the command field is not concatenated with
the contents of the attention field. They should not be used on data entry panels, because any information
that is typed in an input field, including command fields, is lost when the attention occurs.
Attention fields can be used on a menu to simulate option selection. The panel designer must truncate
any unwanted characters resulting from an attention entry into the command field. Here is an example:

)ATTR
$ TYPE(TEXT) ATTN(ON)
)BODY
%------------------------------- SOME MENU -------------------------------
%SELECT OPTION ===>_ZCMD +
%
$ 1 - BROWSE +DISPLAY SOURCE DATA OR LISTINGS
$ 2 - QUERY +FIND OUT INFORMATION ABOUT SOMETHING

)PROC
&ZCMD = TRUNC (&ZCMD, ' ')
&ZSEL = TRANS (TRUNC (&ZCMD, '.')
1, 'PGM(ISPBRO)'
2, 'PANEL(XYZ)'

Figure 30. Use of the attention-select Attribute

In the example, a cursor-selection of the first option would place the character string 1 - BROWSE in the
ZCMD field and simulate the Enter key. In the )PROC section, the contents of the ZCMD field are truncated
at the first blank before the ZSEL variable is set, based on a translation of the ZCMD field.
Panels that are included with the ISPF product do not contain the ATTN(ON) keyword in the attribute
section. If cursor selection is used, it is the user's responsibility to add the ATTN(ON) keyword to the
attribute section of the desired panel. See the z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference for
complete descriptions of the various panel sections.

How Program Access (PA) keys affect ISPF operation

The two Program Access (PA) keys are defined as follows. These definitions cannot be changed.
ATTENTION (PA1)
Normally, you should not use this key while you are in ISPF full-screen mode. The text following
discusses exceptions.
RESHOW (PA2)
Redisplays the contents of the screen. PA2 can be useful if you have pressed the ERASE INPUT or
CLEAR key accidentally or have typed unwanted information but not yet pressed the Enter key or a
function key.
Generally, PA1 is used to terminate TSO commands or CLISTs running under ISPF. However, some TSO
commands and CLISTs process PA1 in their own way.
Note:
1. If you are running in GUI mode, you must switch back to your host session to process PA1.
2. If you are running in GUI mode, you must press Alt-Home (that is, hold down the Alt key and press the
Home key) to process PA2 from the GUI display.

110 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 AUTOTYPE function, for Data Set Name Completion

Restrictions that apply to CLIST attention exits are described in the z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide
and Reference. Also, ISPF should not be started from a CLIST that contains an attention exit because
results are unpredictable.
If PA1 is pressed while ISPF is in full-screen mode after the keyboard has been unlocked, it is treated as a
RESHOW request. If PA1 is pressed again, the current function is terminated and either the primary option
menu or a top-level selection panel supplied by the dialog developer is displayed.
When an ISPF function is running, if the RESET key is pressed to unlock the keyboard and PA1 is pressed,
ISPF attempts to terminate the current function and redisplay the primary option menu. The attempt
might not always be successful; for example, if there is an error in MVS allocation, the attempt fails. A
failure might cause unpredictable results such as waits, loops, abends, or incorrect and unrelated error
messages.
In a 3270 SNA environment, the ATTN key is treated the same as the PA1 key. It is a program interrupt
and, like the PA1 key, causes the ISPF attention exit to get control.

The AUTOTYPE function, for automatic data set name and member name
completion
The AUTOTYPE function is not available on all ISPF panels. It works only on panels that are specifically
written to understand it.
If you assign the value of AUTOTYPE to a function key, you can type a partial name into a library, member,
or data set name field, then press the function key to have ISPF complete the name for you.
AUTOTYPE automatically searches the catalog or PDS directory to find names that match what you
entered. You can even type a pattern to limit the names that AUTOTYPE will return. AUTOTYPE works only
on panels that have been enabled to use the function. You can also enable your own applications to use
AUTOTYPE (see “Enabling applications to use AUTOTYPE” on page 113).
If you are using a terminal emulator, you can assign an easily reachable key to the function key that
invokes AUTOTYPE. For example, you can use a control key combination or any other key or combination
that is within easy reach. You can also use the function key directly.
Within ISPF, AUTOTYPE is enabled for these panels:
• Edit, Browse, and View (options 1 and 2, including recursive edit/browse/view, copy, replace and move
panels).
• Library Utility panels (option 3.1)
• Data Set Utility panels (option 3.2, including Rename)
• Move/Copy (option 3.3)
• Data Set List entry panel (option 3.4)
• Reset ISPF Statistics (option 3.5)
• Hardcopy Utility (option 3.6)
• Download/Upload Data Set To/From Workstation (option 3.7.2)
• SuperC Compare (options 3.12 and 3.13 in all fields)
• SuperC Search (options 3.14 and 3.15, all fields)
• SCLM View and Edit (options 10.1 and 10.2)
• SCLM Library Utility (option 10.3.1)
• Sublibrary Management (option 10.3.2)
• SCLM Migration Utility (option 10.3.3)
• SCLM Delete from Group Utility (option 10.3.9)
• SCLM Build and Promote (options 10.4 and 10.5)
• Preprocessed panel utility (ISPPREP)

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 111

AUTOTYPE function, for Data Set Name Completion

• Dialog tag language compiler (ISPDTLC)

On panels that are not enabled for AUTOTYPE, pressing the AUTOTYPE key is the same as pressing
ENTER. The variable ZVERB is set to the value 'AUTOTYPE'.

How to use AUTOTYPE

1. Type a partial name (zero or more characters) into a Library field (project, group, type, or member) or
the Other Data Set Name field.
2. Press the function key that has been set to AUTOTYPE. ISPF sets the field to the correct value.
3. If you immediately press the function key again, ISPF retrieves the next data set or member name. Up
to 100 data set names and 700 member names can be retrieved.

Rules for specifying the 'Other Data Set Name' field

The prefix or pattern you specify is that which is to the left of the cursor. For example, if the field is
'CLIST(ABC)', with the cursor under the letter 'S', then the pattern used is 'CLI'. For more information, see
“Cursor position sensitivity” on page 112.
• If the content of the Data Set Name field does not begin with a quote, your TSO prefix is added. If the
field does begin with a quote, no prefix is added. Unquoted data set names are not processed if you do
not have a TSO prefix (except for on the Data Set List Utility panel).
• The pattern can be any pattern similar to what you use in your data set list (except that you don't have
to specify your TSP prefix. Trailing wildcards are automatically added. For example, in a Data Set Name
field, typing 'CHR' will result in a pattern of prefix.CHR*.** when searching the catalog.
• If you include a left parenthesis, followed optionally by a member name or pattern, the data set is
assumed to be a PDS and the member name is returned. For example 'CLIST(XY' would search
prefix.CLIST for members matching the pattern XY*. A trailing * is always added to the member name to
create a pattern.

Rules for Library fields - Project, Group, Type, Member

• If the cursor is in the Project field, the other fields are not used as part of the data set name search and
are erased.
• If the cursor is in a Group field, the project name and type name (if any) are added to create the search
pattern. Each group name is used only once, even if there are many types in that group. As each group
name is displayed, the first type name found for that project.group combination is also retrieved. The
member name, if any, is not used and is erased.
• If the cursor is in the Type field, the project and first group name are used to create the pattern. The
Type field is updated and the member name is erased.
• If the cursor is in the Member field, the project, first group, and type are used as the data set name. The
second, third, and fourth groups are not used.

Cursor position sensitivity

The pattern or prefix used to search for names is only that which is to the left of the cursor. In this way you
can refine your search simply by moving the cursor.
For example; suppose you have one hundred data sets called 'SYS1.A234.RGG.*' and you plan to use one
named 'SYS1.A234.RGG.DBD0223.L422.FEB0299.TERRA'. You could type 'SYS1.A234.RGG' and press
the AUTOTYPE key. That might return 'SYS1.A234.RGG.DBD0211.X331.AUG0599.FIRMA'. You can refine
the next value returned by typing a '2' over the first '1' in 'DB0211' and then pressing the AUTOTYPE key
again. This will use the new pattern and get you closer to the desired value.

112 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 AUTOTYPE function, for Data Set Name Completion

Restrictions
AUTOTYPE only retrieves cataloged alias names. It will not retrieve generation data group or generation
data set names. AUTOTYPE does not use the Volume field on any panel. It sets the Volume field
associated with the current data set name field to blank.
AUTOTYPE does not use any ISPF name change exits or data set list retrieval exits.
AUTOTYPE retrieves a maximum or 100 data sets and 700 member names before cycling through the list
from the beginning.

Enabling applications to use AUTOTYPE

You can enable applications to use AUTOTYPE by making some minor panel modifications as follows:
1. At the beginning of the )REINIT section, add the lines shown. Make sure the subsequent line in
the )REINIT section starts in column 1 so that it does not become part of the IF clause you have
inserted.

IF (&ZNXTMSG='ISRT') .CSRPOS = &ZCSRP

.CURSOR = &ZCSRV

2. At the end of the )REINIT section add this line in column 1.

REFRESH (*)

3. At the beginning of the )PROC section add the lines shown. Make sure the subsequent line in
the )PROC section starts in column 1 so that it does not become part of the IF clause you have
inserted. If there is a line that says: .RET = OFF in the )PROC section, it should go before these lines.

&ZCSRV = .CURSOR
&ZCSRP = .CSRPOS
&ZNAMES='ZCSRV ZCSRP PRJ1 LIB1 LIB2 LIB3 LIB4 TYP1 MEM DSN ZCMD
PANEXIT ( (ZNAMES) , LOAD,ISRAUTOT)
IF (&ZNXTMSG='ISRT') EXIT

Modify the line that assigns the variable &ZNAMES. This assignment contains a list of variable names
on the panel. They must all be specified in order. Use an asterisk (*) for names that are not relevant for
your panel.
The values in the &ZNAMES variable are:
1. The variable containing the Cursor field name
2. The variable containing the cursor offset
3. The name of the Project variable on the panel
4. The name of the first Group variable.
5. The name of the second Group variable
6. The name of the third Group variable
7. The name of the fourth Group variable
8. The name of the Type variable
9. The name of the Member variable
10. The name of the Other Data Set Name variable
11. The name of the command line variable (clears the command line)
The cursor and name variables (described here as ZCSRV, ZCSRP, and ZNAMES) can have any names you
choose but they must match the names used in the )INIT section and the PANEXIT statement in
the )PROC section.
If a name references a read-only field, add a dash to the end of the name. If you need to limit the size of
the returned name, you can append the maximum length, after a period, to the name; for example,

Using commands, function keys, and cursor selection 113

AUTOTYPE function, for Data Set Name Completion

ODSN.44. You can disable member searches for a data set name field by adding a percent sign to the end
of the field name; for example, ODSN.44% or ODSN%.
Panels defined in Dialog Tag Language (DTL) can be enabled for AUTOTYPE through DTL keywords. See
the z/OS ISPF Dialog Tag Language Guide and Reference for more information.

114 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Naming ISPF libraries and data sets

Chapter 5. ISPF libraries and data sets

ISPF enables you to work with ISPF libraries, other partitioned data sets, and sequential data sets. This
topic describes how to allocate, create, and use libraries and data sets.
ISPF also provides some facilities for working with z/OS UNIX files and workstation files.
• For more information about working with z/OS UNIX files, see "z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility (Option
3.17)" in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.
• For more information about working with workstation files, see "Download Data Set to Workstation
Utility (Option 3.7)" in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II, and the sections on distributed editing in the
"Edit (Option 2)" topic of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II and the EDIT service in the z/OS ISPF Services
Guide.
An ISPF library is a cataloged partitioned data set (PDS) or a partitioned data set extended (PDSE). For
more information about PDSE, see “Partitioned Data Set Extended (PDSE)” on page 143.
The ISPF library has a three-level name consisting of a project, group, and type. An optional library
member name can also be included. A member consists of programming code, data, or text.
ISPF displays library names on line 1 of a data display, such as the member list shown in Figure 33 on
page 124. Each library generally contains members with the same type of information.
Before you can create and use a new ISPF library or data set, you must allocate it using option A of the
Data Set utility. See the topic about "Data Set Utility (Option 3.2)" in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II for
instructions on allocating data sets.

Naming ISPF libraries and data sets

On data entry panels that require a library or other data set name, such as the Data Set Utility (option 3.2)
and Edit Entry (option 2) panels, two groups of fields are provided: one for entering an ISPF library name
and one for entering another partitioned or sequential data set name.

ISPF library names

To name an ISPF library, you must specify at least a project, group, and type. For example:

Project . . ISPFPROJ
Group . . . TEST
Type . . . . PLI

Project
The common identifier for all ISPF libraries belonging to the same programming project. This name
must be your user ID unless you are using a specific project name that has been predefined in the
MVS master catalog.
Group
The identifier for a particular set of ISPF libraries, that is, the level of the libraries within the library
hierarchy. For example, the group name of your private library could be PRIVATE or perhaps your first
name, such as Joe in the example in Figure 31 on page 120.
Type
The identifier for the type of information in the ISPF library, such as PL/I, SCRIPT, or PANELS.

Standard ISPF naming conventions

Each component of the library name can be up to 8 alphanumeric or national characters; the first one
must be alphabetic. This conforms to standard TSO data set naming conventions. For convenience, any
cataloged data set (sequential or partitioned) with a three-level name can be entered in the Project,
Group, and Type fields, with one level of the name in each field. If a cataloged data set with four or more

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 115

Naming ISPF libraries and data sets

levels is to be entered, multiple levels of the name may be entered in each field, with each level being
separated by a period.
If both a library and a data set name are specified on the same panel, the data set name takes priority.
Therefore, to specify a library, leave the Data Set Name field blank.
When the library identification appears in a title line or message, the project name, group name, and type
name are separated with periods. A member name, if applicable, is enclosed in parentheses. For example:

PROJECT.GROUP.TYPE(MEMBER)

On most data entry panels that allow a library name to be specified, a Member field is available:

Member . . . PROJ1

Member
The name of an ISPF library or other partitioned data set member. Leaving this field blank or entering
a pattern causes ISPF to display a member list. See “Displaying member lists” on page 122 for more
information.
A pattern is a partial member name that uses either an * (asterisk) or % (percent sign) as place
holders:
• A * symbol represents a string of characters
• A % symbol represents only 1 character
ISPF matches the pattern to any like member names in the specified data set.
The ISPF library's project, group, and type must always accompany the member name, if entered. If you
try to edit a member that does not exist, ISPF provides an Edit display screen with a blank data area.
Member names entered in the Member field or those enclosed in parentheses and entered in the Data Set
Name field must follow standard ISPF naming conventions.
If you have a partitioned data set with members whose names do not follow ISPF naming conventions,
ISPF allows limited processing, as follows:
• View (option 1) allows any character string as a member name in either the Member or Data Set Name
field and attempts to View or Browse the specified member.
• Edit (option 2) allows an existing member with a nonstandard member name to be edited. You cannot
create a member with a nonstandard member name.
ISPF cannot process member names that begin with a blank or have embedded blanks which can cause
unpredictable results. Also, ISPF cannot process member names that include special characters, such as
an ampersand (&). CLIST processing in both Foreground (option 4) and Batch (option 5) can result in a
runtime error.

Other partitioned, sequential or VSAM data set, or z/OS UNIX file names
You can use this field to specify any partitioned or sequential data set, or z/OS UNIX file path name:

Other Partitioned, Sequential or VSAM Data Set, or z/OS UNIX file:

Name . . . . . +

Note: The + at the end of the field indicates a scrollable field. The + indicates that the field may contain
more data than is able to be displayed on the current screen. It is commonly used to enter long UNIX file
path names but may appear on panels other than those associated with data set names.
See the descriptions of the ZEXPAND (“EXPAND” on page 76) and ZCLRSFLD (“ZCLRSFLD” on page 94)
commands which operate on scrollable fields.

116 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Naming ISPF libraries and data sets

Specifying a data set name

Type any fully-qualified partitioned, sequential, or VSAM data set name, such as:

Name . . . . . 'USERID.SYS1.ASM' +

You can include either a TSO user prefix or user ID as the first-level qualifier of the data set name. If you
omit the single quotes and if you have created a TSO user prefix, that prefix is automatically added to the
beginning of the data set name. If you omit the single quotes and if you do not have a TSO user prefix, no
prefix is added, and the name is used exactly as it appears.
If you include your user prefix or user ID, enclose the data set name with apostrophes. If you include the
apostrophe at the beginning of the data set name but omit the one at the end, ISPF inserts it for you.
Note: ISPF does not support multivolume data sets or partitioned data sets with record format FBS or
VBS.
For partitioned data sets, a member name enclosed in parentheses can follow the data set name. For
example:

Name . . . . . 'SYS1.PROCLIB(ASMHC)' +

If you include the parenthesis at the beginning of the member name but omit the one at the end, ISPF
inserts it for you.
When you omit the member name and parentheses or use a pattern ISPF displays a member list. See
“Displaying member lists” on page 122 for more information.
You can refer to generation data sets by using a signed or unsigned number in place of a member name in
the Data Set Name field only. For example:

Name . . . . . 'gds.test(0)' +

This example refers to the most recently allocated data set in the generation data group. Minus numbers
refer to previously allocated data sets; positive refer to unallocated.
Note: For Edit, Browse, and View, a VSAM data set can be specified if the ISPF Configuration Table
enables VSAM processing.

Specifying a z/OS UNIX file path name

Type a z/OS UNIX file path name, such as:

Name . . . . . /u/jsmith/test/tst1.sh +

The Name field is a scrollable field allowing you to enter an absolute pathname up to 1023 characters in
length.
Note: If you often enter long pathnames (greater than 56 characters), consider using the KEYLIST utility
to update the keylist for the panel and assign the ZEXPAND command to a function key. The ZEXPAND
command displays the scrollable input field in a scrollable dynamic area in a pop-up window, making the
task of entering a long pathname easier.
When you enter a z/OS UNIX file path name, a z/OS UNIX directory selection list is displayed.
When you enter a z/OS UNIX file path name containing glob characters and the entered value does not
match a z/OS UNIX directory or file, ISPF uses the C/C++ glob function to search the UNIX file system for
files and directories that match the mask. Unicode Conversion services are used to internally convert the
path name from the terminal codepage to codepage 1047 for use by the search function.
ISPF assumes a z/OS UNIX path name when the first character entered in the Name field is one of these
characters:
/
(Forward slash) Identifies an absolute path name.

ISPF libraries and data sets 117

Naming ISPF libraries and data sets

~
(Tilde) The path name for your home directory.
.
(Period) The path name for your current working directory.
..
(Double period) The path name of the parent directory of your current working directory.
Glob characters and their meaning are:
?
Match any single character.
*
Match multiple characters.
[
Open a set of single characters.
]
Close the set of single characters. Each character in the set can match a single character at the
position specified.
Examples:
~/test/tst1.sh
Equivalent to specifying the absolute pathname

/u/jsmith/test/tst1.sh

when your home directory is defined as /u/jsmith.

./pgma.c
Equivalent to specifying the absolute pathname

/u/proj1/dev/pgma.c

when your current working directory is set to /u/proj1/dev.

../test/pgma.c
Equivalent to specifying the absolute pathname

/u/proj1/test/pgma.c

when your current working directory is set to /u/proj1/dev.

u/h*/t?st[123]*
Can match /u/harry/test1do and /u/henry/tost2nok.

Volume serials
Along with a data set name, you can optionally specify a volume serial. If you do, the system catalog is not
used. For example:

Volume Serial . . . ______ (If not cataloged)

Volume Serial
A real DASD volume or a virtual volume residing on an IBM 3850 Mass Storage System. To access
3850 virtual volumes, you need MOUNT authority, which is acquired through the TSO ACCOUNT
command or the RACF® TSO AUTH CLASS command.

118 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Library Concatenation

Library concatenation
Whenever the first Group field is accompanied by three additional fields horizontally across the screen,
you can enter a library concatenation sequence, which is a series of group names chained together. ISPF
searches these groups in the sequence that you enter them.
You can concatenate libraries of the same type, but only libraries that belong to the same project. You will
usually concatenate the lowest-level library ahead of the next higher-level library, and so on, in bottom-
to-top order. Therefore, concatenation is usually most effective if this search sequence is the same as the
library hierarchy.
For example, new library members or members undergoing changes generally reside in libraries used by
program developers. A test library may contain members that have been unit tested and are ready for
integration test. A master library might contain fully tested members that correspond to a previously
released version of the program.
Concatenated libraries must have consistent record formats and logical record lengths. You can use
concatenation with these ISPF functions:
• Viewing
• Browsing
• Editing
• Selecting Library Utility (option 3.1) functions:
– Print index or complete data set
– Browse, delete, edit, print, rename, or view members
– Compress data set.
• Copying data sets or members
• Compiling
• Assembling
• link-editing
• SCRIPT/VS processing.
Note: You can also use additional input libraries for compilations and assemblies.
Figure 31 on page 120 shows a sample three-level hierarchy consisting of a set of master libraries, a set
of test libraries, and three sets of private development libraries identified by user ID. Using this hierarchy,
a typical concatenation sequence for a project of ISPFPROJ, a type of DATA, and a member PGM1 is:

ISPF Library:
Project . . . ISPFPROJ
Group . . . . JOE . . . TEST____ . . . MASTER__
Type . . . . DATA
Member . . . PGM1____

ISPF libraries and data sets 119

Library Concatenation

Figure 31. Hierarchy of ISPF Libraries

In this example, the search for member PGM1 goes through libraries:

ISPFPROJ.JOE.DATA
ISPFPROJ.TEST.DATA
ISPFPROJ.MASTER.DATA

Concatenation during editing

Using concatenation during editing provides a way to copy members to your development library. Use the
concatenation sequence to search the libraries for the member to edit. The edited member is saved in
your development library, the first library in the concatenation sequence, while the unchanged version
remains in the test or master library. When the new version is fully tested, you can use the Move/Copy
utility (option 3.3) to move the new version to a higher-level library.

Concatenation during language processing

The purpose of concatenation during language processing is to:

120 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Using member selection lists

• Help you include source segments in their proper order when using INCLUDE or COPY statements or
when using SCRIPT imbed controls
• Allow debugging of new or changed programs without altering the contents of the test or master
libraries.
The output from a compilation or assembly (an object module) or from a link-edit (a load module) is
stored in the lowest-level OBJ or LOAD library, the first library in the concatenation sequence.

Using member selection lists

A member selection list, also called a member list, is initially an alphabetic list of the members of an ISPF
library or TSO partitioned data set. Table 15 on page 121 provides a quick reference to the primary
options that display member lists and their differences. In the Type of Selection column, "Single" means
that ISPF processes only the line command that is the closest to the top of the list, ignoring all others.
"Multiple" means that you can enter more than one line command simultaneously. The numbers in
parentheses refer to notes following the table. See “Member selection list commands” on page 129 for
more information about the line commands shown in the table.

Table 15. Member Selection List Differences

Type of Prompt Field
Primary Options Selection Valid Line Commands Available
View (1) Single S,V (4) No
Browse (1) Single S,B (4) No
Edit (2) Single S,E (4) No
Library (3.1) Multiple B,C,D,E,G,I,J,M,P,R,T,V,W Yes
Move/Copy (3.3) Multiple B,S (1) Yes
Data Set List (3.4) Multiple B,C,D,E,G,I,J,M,P,R,T,V,W (2) Yes
Reset (3.5) Multiple S No
SuperC (3.12) Multiple S No (3)
SuperCE (3.13) Multiple S No (3)
Search-For (3.14) Multiple S No
Foreground (4) Single S No
Batch (5) Single S No
Workplace (11) Multiple B,C,D,E,G,I,P,M,R,S,T,V,W No

Note:
1. For the Move/Copy utility, B (browse member) enables you to browse members of an ISPF library or
another partitioned data set before moving or copying them without having to use browse on another
panel. Then, use S (select) to select the member or members to move or copy. See “Line commands
for the move/copy utility” on page 138 for more information.
2. When you select M (display member list) line command on a data set list, you can use B (browse
member), C (copy member), D (delete member), E (edit member), G (reset member statistics), I
(display member information), J (submit member), M (move member), P (print member), R (rename
member), T (invoke TSO command for member), V (view member), and W (invoke workstation
command for member). You can also enter TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs.

ISPF libraries and data sets 121

Using member selection lists

S (select) is valid also, but only when the B, CO, E, MO, RS, or V line commands are used on a data set
list.
3. Instead of a Prompt field, this member list has an OLDMEM field, which you can use to enter the name
of a member in the old data set. For more information about this field, see the topic on SuperC Member
Lists in the SuperC Utility (Option 3.12) section of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.
4. For your convenience ISPF supports E as a select character from Edit member lists in addition to S and
point-and-shoot selection. Similarly, V is supported from View member lists, and B is supported from
Browse member lists.
5. When multiple members are selected from a member list that supports multiple selection and all
members have been processed, the member list is scrolled such that the last member processed is
positioned to the top of the member list display.

Displaying member lists

For each of the primary options listed in the preceding table, except Data Set List (option 3.4), you can
display a member list by:
• Leaving the Member field blank for an ISPF library
• Omitting the member name from the name of another partitioned data set
• Entering a pattern as the member name.
You can use a combination of asterisks and percent signs in the same pattern. However, the pattern,
including the asterisks and percent signs, can contain no more than 8 characters. For example, entering
this pattern in the Member field:

Member . . . *prof___

could display this member list:

ISFPROF
ISPPROF
ISPSPROF
ISRPROF
LOCPROF
SUPCPROF

When using the Data Set List utility (option 3.4), you can display a member list by:
• Entering the M (display member list) line command
• Entering the V (view), B (browse), or E (edit) line command and then using one of the methods
described in the preceding list. This applies only if you are editing or browsing members of a partitioned
data set.
• Entering the CO (copy) line command
• Entering the MO (move) line command
• Entering the RS (reset) line command.
On any member list, PF10 and PF11 toggle between two different views of the member list data.
Note:
1. The column headers on a member list display (with the exception of Prompt) are point-and-shoot sort
fields.
2. If you enter a slash in the line command field, the Member List Commands pop-up window shown in
the next figure is displayed so that you can select the command you want to use.
3. The line command field is a point-and-shoot field. If you select the line command field beside a
member name, the Member List Commands pop-up window shown in the next figure is displayed so
that you can select the command you want to use.

122 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Using member selection lists

Figure 32. Member List Commands Pop-Up Window (ISRCMLEP)

4. Member list count fields show an accurate count when the number of members in a PDS or PDSE is
less than 10 000 000. The row value will be truncated after member 9 999 999 and the total value will
be truncated on display of the list if more than 9 999 999 members exist.
5. The Info command displays the same information as the member list. When the Extended PDS
statistics function has been enabled, the extended line counts fields contain data.

Ending member lists

With two exceptions, you can end a member list by entering END (F15) or using = (the jump function) to go
to another option. For the two exceptions, SuperC and Search-For member lists, enter RETURN (F16),
CANCEL, or =. On these member lists, the END command processes your selections.

ISPF member statistics

On member lists, column headings appear in the national language. The information shown under the
column headings contains the ISPF statistics generated for each member. You can print these statistics
using option X (print index listing) of the Library utility (option 3.1) or option P (print data set list) of the
Data Set List utility (option 3.4). You can also use the SAVE command to write a member list or data set
list to the ISPF list data set or to a sequential data set. The statistics are displayed next to each member
name.
Figure 33 on page 124 shows an example of a member list with statistics and the 1-character line
command field to the left of the member names. If you want to see all of the statistics, you can scroll the
screen either right or left by using PF keys 10 and 11. Figure 34 on page 124 shows an example of the
screen when you scroll right. Pressing either key repeatedly results in recycling of the screens.

ISPF libraries and data sets 123

Using member selection lists

Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help

──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
LIBRARY USERID.EXEC Row 0000001 of 0000146
Name Prompt Size Created Changed ID
_ ALLOCEXT 5 2002/07/25 2002/07/25 16:28:48 USERID
_ AMBLIST 7 2001/01/04 2001/09/11 12:02:41 USERID
_ AOPST 10 2002/05/27 2002/05/27 10:38:15 USERID
_ APCTOOLS 20 2002/11/29 2003/01/21 09:59:50 USERID
_ APCTOOLX 193 2002/11/29 2003/01/21 10:16:42 USERID
_ APCT2AZ 2610 2002/11/29 2003/01/21 10:23:24 USERID
_ APPLT1 4 2002/05/22 2002/05/22 09:32:20 USERID
_ APPLT2 8 2002/05/22 2002/05/22 09:32:49 USERID
_ APPLT3 4 2002/05/22 2002/05/22 09:28:59 USERID
_ ASMPROG1 3 2002/01/23 2002/01/23 12:41:02 USERID
_ BATCHCMP 4 2002/02/21 2002/02/21 13:04:48 USERID
_ CLEDIT 3 2002/06/11 2002/06/11 09:31:02 USERID
_ CMSED 39 2002/12/06 2002/12/06 14:10:55 USERID
_ COMP 10 2002/10/09 2002/10/09 15:14:44 USERID
_ CRZDIFF 58 2002/11/18 2002/11/18 13:39:48 USERID
_ CRZDISP 14 2002/11/14 2002/11/14 15:02:03 USERID
_ CRZLOAD 105 2002/11/13 2002/11/18 14:30:48 USERID
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 33. Member List Display (ISRUDMM)

Members that have extended statistics appear highlighted in the member list when highlighting is
available. The line count values displayed on the member list have a maximum value of 65535. If
extended statistics are generated for a member and an extended line count value exceeds 65535,
>65535 is displayed on the member list. Use the Info command from the enhanced member list to
display the extended line count values. The maximum value of extended line counts is 2147483647.

Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help

──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
LIBRARY USERID.EXEC Row 0000001 of 0000146
Name Prompt Size Init Mod VV MM ID
_ ALLOCEXT 5 1 0 01.04 USERID
_ AMBLIST 7 7 0 01.08 USERID
_ AOPST 10 10 0 01.01 USERID
_ APCTOOLS 20 19 0 01.03 USERID
_ APCTOOLX 193 212 0 01.04 USERID
_ APCT2AZ 2610 2647 0 01.16 USERID
_ APPLT1 4 3 0 01.02 USERID
_ APPLT2 8 5 0 01.03 USERID
_ APPLT3 4 4 0 01.00 USERID
_ ASMPROG1 3 1 0 01.17 USERID
_ BATCHCMP 4 3 0 01.03 USERID
_ CLEDIT 3 2 0 01.01 USERID
_ CMSED 39 37 0 01.03 USERID
_ COMP 10 10 0 01.00 USERID
_ CRZDIFF 58 12 0 01.02 USERID
_ CRZDISP 14 14 0 01.01 USERID
_ CRZLOAD 105 57 0 01.15 USERID
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 34. Member List Display cont. (ISRUDMM)

Member list display panel action bar

The Member List Display panel action bar choices function as follows:
Menu
See the topic about the Primary Option Menu in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II for information about
the Menu pull-down.
Functions
The Functions pull-down offers these choices:
1
Save List Saves the member list into the list data set.

124 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Using member selection lists

2
Change Colors Displays the Member List Color Change Utility panel (Figure 35 on page 125) to
allow you to change one or more of the Member List Field Attributes and press Enter to see the
effect immediately. Clearing a field or selecting the Defaults field restores defaults.
Note: You can also display this panel by entering MLC on the Command line.

Figure 35. Member List Color Change Utility Panel (ISRMLCP)

3
Initial Sort View Displays the Enhanced Member List Initial Sort panel (Figure 36 on page 126).
This panel enables you to select the field to be sorted on, before the display of an enhanced
member list. Member Name is the default View. Some other sort views that you can choose are:
• RECFM=BLK sets the initial view for blocked data set formats such as FB and VB.
• RECFM=U sets the initial view for unformatted data set formats such as Load.
• Any of these conditions result in a default sort view on member name:
– Library field selected as initial sort view and member list is based on a single data set.
– Created or Alias selected as initial sort view and extended command member list.
– A member name is given as input to member list action.

ISPF libraries and data sets 125

Using member selection lists

Figure 36. Enhanced Member List Initial Sort Panel (ISRMLIS)

Note:
1. You can also display this panel by entering MLS on the Command line.
2. When using LLA in FREEZE mode, member lists might appear to be out of SORT order because
ISPF uses direct reads of the data set directory for initial member list build and SORT, and uses
BLDL for the displayed statistics.
Confirm
Select 1 to set delete confirmation ON. Select 2 to set delete confirmation OFF.
Utilities
See the topic about the Primary Option Menu in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II for details on the
Utilities pull-down.
Help
The Help pull-down provides general information about member list topics such as scrolling, pattern
matching, and member list statistics, as well as information about supported primary commands and
the S line command.

Member list display panel fields

ISPF generates statistics each time you edit a member, unless your edit profile is set to STATS OFF. The
fields shown identify the statistics in a member list:
Note: The column headers on a member list display (with the exception of Prompt) are point-and-shoot
sort fields.

Name
Name of the member.

126 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Using member selection lists

Prompt
The Prompt field serves a variety of purposes. You can rename a member by typing the new name to
the right of the member name. You can type a slash character (/) in the first position of the Prompt
field so you can define additional behaviors for a given action.
Also, the Prompt field acts as a status field, showing information about the last action taken for a
member. If you run an edit macro or TSO command against a member, the 7-character informational
status that is returned in the dialog variable ZPROMPT at the completion of the service is shown in this
field.
Lib
Library number. The Lib field appears only if you specify a concatenated sequence of libraries. It
shows the library that contains the member. In this example, if the member resides in the second
library in the sequence, a 2 appears in the Lib field.
VV.MM
Version number and modification level. The version number is set to 1 and the modification level is set
to 0 when the member is created. The modification level is the number of times this version has been
modified. For example, 02.15 means version 2, modification 15.
If a member name is just an alternate name for another member, ALIAS appears in this field.
Created
Date this version was created. The format used depends on your national format. For example,
90/06/27 means June 27, 1990 to some, but so does 06/27/90 and 27/06/90 mean it for others.
Changed
Date and time this version was last modified; date is shown in the national format. Time is shown
using a 24-hour format. For example, 17:20 means 5:20 p.m..
Size
Current number of lines. The largest number this field can display is 65 535. If extended statistics are
generated for a member and the current number of lines value in the extended statistics exceeds
65535, >65535 is displayed on the member list. Use the Info command from the enhanced member
list to display the extended line count values. The maximum value of extended line counts is
2147483647.
Init
Initial number of lines. The largest number this field can display is 65 535. If extended statistics are
generated for a member and the initial number of lines value in the extended statistics exceeds
65535, >65535 is displayed on the member list. Use the Info command from the enhanced member
list to display the extended line count values. The maximum value of extended line counts is
2147483647.
Mod
Number of lines in the current member that have been added or changed. If the data is unnumbered,
this number is zero. The largest number this field can display is 65 535. If extended statistics are
generated for a member and the number of lines added or changed value in the extended statistics
exceeds 65535, >65535 is displayed on the member list. Use the Info command from the enhanced
member list to display the extended line count values. The maximum value of extended line counts is
2147483647.
ID
The user ID of the person who created or last updated this version. If the user ID is 8 characters and
the member list panel layout does not allow for 8-character values, the first 6 characters are
displayed followed by >. To display the 8-character value on these panels, 8-character user ID layouts
must be enabled in the site configuration.
When you use View, Browse, and Edit, the current version and modification level are displayed in the title
area, line 1, following the library and member name. You can change the version number, the user ID, or
both, with the Reset ISPF Statistics utility (option 3.5) or with the LEVEL and VERSION Edit primary
commands. Changing the version number updates most of the other statistics.

ISPF libraries and data sets 127

Using member selection lists

If you use the ISPF editor to delete all lines in a member of an ISPF library and then save the member, the
statistics show that the member still exists but has a length of zero. To delete a member, including its
statistics, use the Library utility (3.1).

Load module library member statistics

Figure 37 on page 128 shows that the ISPF library statistics displayed in a member list have a different
format for load module libraries. See “Member list display panel action bar” on page 124 for a description
of the action bar choices on this panel.

Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help

──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
LIBRARY PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD Row 0000001 of 0000480
Name Prompt Alias-of Size TTR AC AM RM
_ FLM$CP FLMIO24 0000A938 01E70E 00 24 24
_ FLM$CPI 000000E8 01820C 00 31 ANY
_ FLM$DE FLMIO24 0000A938 01E70E 00 24 24
_ FLM$DT FLMIO24 0000A938 01E70E 00 24 24
_ FLM$99 FLMIO24 0000A938 01E70E 00 24 24
_ FLMB 000A9970 01EF16 00 31 ANY
_ FLMBCMD FLMDDL 00122360 029008 00 31 ANY
_ FLMBD$ FLMDDL 00122360 029008 00 31 ANY
_ FLMCMD FLMS7C 000E62B8 02AE13 00 31 ANY
_ FLMCNTGN 0001E838 028C1D 00 31 ANY
_ FLMCPCS 00000150 01822A 00 31 ANY
_ FLMCSLNK FLMIO24 0000A938 01E70E 00 24 24
_ FLMCSPDB 00001940 01E80A 00 31 24
_ FLMCXCMD FLMIO24 0000A938 01E70E 00 24 24
_ FLMCXCPD FLMIO24 0000A938 01E70E 00 24 24
_ FLMCXCPM FLMIO24 0000A938 01E70E 00 24 24
_ FLMCXCTN FLMIO24 0000A938 01E70E 00 24 24
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 37. Load Module Library Display (ISRUDMM)

If you want to see all of the statistics, you can scroll the screen either right or left by using PF keys 10 and
11. Pressing either key repeatedly results in recycling of the screens.
The fields on a member list display for a load module library are:
Note: The column headers on a member list display (with the exception of Prompt) are point-and-shoot
sort fields.

Name
Name of the member.
Prompt
The Prompt field serves a variety of purposes. You can rename a member by typing the new name to
the right of the member name. You can type a slash character (/) in the first position of the Prompt
field so you can define additional behaviors for a given action. Also, the Prompt field acts as a status
field, showing information about the last action taken for a member.
Lib
Library number. The Lib field appears only if you specify a concatenated sequence of libraries. It
shows the library that contains the member. In this example, the member resides in the second
library in the sequence.
Size
Size of the member in hexadecimal. The largest number this field can display is 'FFFFFFFF'X.

128 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Using member selection lists

TTR
Relative block address.
Alias-of
Name of the member for which this member is an alias. See following note.
AC
Authorization code.
AM
Addressing mode.
RM
Residency mode.
Attributes
The member's attributes:
NX
Not executable
DATA
Can be loaded only
OVLY
In overlay structure
RF
Refreshable
RN
Can be reentered
RU
Reusable
TEST
Module to be tested.
SSI
System Status Index
Note: Question marks (?) are placed in the member list of a load module library for members that have
load module directory fields that are not valid. For example, module 14, shown in Figure 37 on page 128,
contains alias and authorization code information that is not valid.
Load module library lists displayed using the Data Set List utility (option 3.4) contain an extended line
command field and do not display the created date.

Member selection list commands

If the member list is too large for the screen, you can see other parts of the list by using the UP and DOWN
scroll commands. These commands are valid for all member list displays. However, because a member
list display can be no wider than 80 characters, you cannot use the LEFT and RIGHT scroll commands.
See the z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference for more information about scroll commands.
These primary commands can be entered on the Command line in all member list displays:
CONFIRM

FILTER
field operator value

FIND

RFIND

ISPF libraries and data sets 129

Using member selection lists

LOCATE string

RESET

SAVE
list-id

SELECT pattern
lcmd

SORT
field1
A field2

D A

SRCHFOR string

MLC

MLS

REFRESH

These line commands can be used with member lists. These are 1-character commands that are entered
to the left of the member name. The option you are using determines:
• Whether you can enter more than one line command simultaneously
• Which line commands are valid
• Whether a Prompt or OLDMEM field is available.
Table 15 on page 121 provides a quick reference to the differences between member lists and the line
commands available on each one. The line commands are:
• B (browse member)
• C (copy member)
• D (delete member)
• E (edit member)
• G (reset member statistics)
• I (display member information)
• J (submit member)
• M (move member)
• P (print member)
• R (rename member)
• S (select member)
• T (invoke TSO command for member)
• V (view member)
• W (invoke workstation command for member)
• = (repeat last command).
The S line command is available for all member list displays except the Library and Data Set List utilities.
See “S Line Command” on page 134 for more information.

130 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Using member selection lists

The B line command is available only for the Library, Move/Copy, and Data Set List utilities. The D, E, P, R,
and V line commands are available only for the Library and Data Set List utilities.
Note: For the Data Set List utility, these line commands are valid only after you enter the M (display
member list) line command. See “Library and data set list utility line commands” on page 138 for
information.
ISPF ignores any unprocessed member list commands when you leave a member list.

Primary commands
See:
• “Require delete commands to be confirmed (CONFIRM)” on page 131
• “Display a subset of members (FILTER)” on page 131
• “Find a character string (FIND and RFIND)” on page 132
• “Locate a data string (LOCATE)” on page 133
• “Remove unwanted line commands and messages (RESET)” on page 133
• “Write a member list to a sequential data set (SAVE)” on page 133
• “Select a member (SELECT)” on page 134
• “Sort a member list (SORT)” on page 135
• “Search for members (SRCHFOR)” on page 136
• “Change member list field attributes (MLC)” on page 137
• “Change the default sort order for member lists (MLS)” on page 137
• “Refresh the member lists (REFRESH)” on page 137

Require delete commands to be confirmed (CONFIRM)

The CONFIRM primary command controls display of the Confirm Delete panel. Use the format:

ON
CONFIRM
OFF

You can use these operands with the CONFIRM command:

ON
Tells ISPF to display the Confirm Delete panel when you enter the D (delete data set) line command or
TSO DELETE command. This is the default setting.
OFF
Tells ISPF not to display the Confirm Delete panel.
For example, this command would tell ISPF not to display the Confirm Delete panel:

CONFIRM OFF

Note: Confirm is forced ON from the workplace member list with a default action of "D".

Display a subset of members (FILTER)

Use the FILTER command to display only the subset of members whose attributes match the supplied
comparison argument. You specify the comparison argument in this format:

ISPF libraries and data sets 131

Using member selection lists

FILTER field EQ value

NE

LE

LT

GE

GT

Note:
1. It is possible to filter the member list using any of the fields on the member list panel except for
Prompt.
2. If a member has no value for the specified field, the member will be considered a match for the LT and
NE operators.
3. If no members match the filter criteria, the member list remains unchanged.
4. Entering the FILTER command with no parameters displays a panel in which you can select the field
and operator and enter the value.
5. The FILTER command can be applied repeatedly to drill down to the subset of members that match a
particular combination of attributes.
For example, to display all the members whose modification level is greater than 02, enter: FILTER
MM GT 02
To further subset this list to display only the members in which more than 200 lines have been
modified, enter: FILTER MOD GT 200
6. Enter the REFRESH command to restore the full member list.
7. EQ and NE are the only operators that can be used to filter the fields AM, RM, and ATTR.
8. The value must be specified in the appropriate format for the field type. For example, version number
must be specified as a 1-digit or 2-digit number, creation date must be specified in date format, and
load module size must be specified as a hex string:

FILTER VV EQ 02

FILTER CRE LT 2000/01/01

FILTER SIZE GT FFFFFF

Find a character string (FIND and RFIND)

To find a character string within the specified field use the FIND or the RFIND command. Only one of the
fields on the member list can be specified at a time for the search. Use this format:

Name NEXT
FIND string

F field ALL PREFIX

FIRST SUFFIX

LAST WORD

PREV

RFIND

NAME is the default field. NEXT is the default operand. For example, this command tells ISPF to find the
last occurrence of the character string XLC in the NAME field:

FIND XLC NAME LAST

132 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Using member selection lists

ISPF automatically scrolls to bring the line containing the character string to the top of the list.
Use RFIND to repeat the search without reentering the character string.

Locate a data string (LOCATE)

To find a data string, you can enter a LOCATE command in the Command field on any member list display.
The format of the command is:

LOCATE string

where:
string
A data string that is used to find an entry based on how the member list is sorted.
ISPF searches the field by which the member list was sorted for an entry equal to string. Either the entry,
if found, or else the entry that immediately precedes the entry that you are searching for is scrolled to the
top of the list.
For example, if the member list shown in Figure 37 on page 128 is sorted by name, this command causes
member MODULE12 to scroll to the top of the list:

LOCATE MODULE12

Remove unwanted line commands and messages (RESET)

The RESET command removes unprocessed line commands and messages that show the result of line
command processing.

RESET

Write a member list to a sequential data set (SAVE)

The SAVE primary command writes a member selection list to a sequential data set. The format of the
SAVE command is:

SAVE
list-id LONG

where:
list-id
Optional. A user-specified qualifier of the sequential data set to which the member list is written.
LONG
Optional. Results in additional information in the saved member list:
• All dates for the member are in yyyy/mm/dd format.
• For PDS data sets not containing load libraries, the untranslated member name is written after the
member name.
• For members with extended statistics, an additional line is written that contains the extended
statistics line count values.
ISPF names the data set:

prefix.userid.list-id.MEMBERS

prefix
Your data set prefix, as specified in your TSO user profile. If you have no prefix set, or if your prefix is
the same as your user ID, the prefix is omitted and the data set name is userid.list-id.MEMBERS.

ISPF libraries and data sets 133

Using member selection lists

userid
Your TSO user ID.
The data set is created if it does not exist, or written over if it exists and has compatible attributes.
ISPF writes the member list in the current sort order and as it appears on the display, except for the
column headings, line command fields, and anything you have typed on the display.
If you omit the list ID, ISPF writes the member selection list in the current sort order, including column
headings, to the ISPF list data set. Processing is the same as using option X of the Library utility (primary
option 3.1), except that data set information is not printed.

Select a member (SELECT)

You can use the SELECT, or S, command as either a primary command or a line command.

SELECT primary command

The SELECT primary command allows you to select one or more members in a member list, whether they
are displayed or not. When you enter it on a member list displayed using the Edit option, this command
even creates a member if you specify the complete member name of a member that does not exist.
The SELECT command optionally provides a quick method of calling the same line command for one or
more members. The format of the SELECT command is:

SELECT pattern

*
lcmd

where:
pattern
Either a complete member name or a partial member name that contains one or more asterisks (*),
percent signs (%), or both as place holders. See “Displaying member lists” on page 122 for more
information about using patterns.
*
An asterisk, which means you want to select all members in a member list.
lcmd
One of these optional line commands: S (select), B (browse), V (view), D (delete), E (edit), or P (print).
On a member list that has an expanded line command field, such as one generated by the M (member
list) line command in the Data Set List utility (option 3.4), you can also enter a TSO command, CLIST,
or REXX exec. If you do not enter a line command, S is the default.
The member list shown in Figure 33 on page 124 contains members INT and INTTOOL. This command
selects these members for printing:

SELECT INT* P

S Line Command
You can enter the S line command at the beginning of a line, ahead of one or more member names. For
example, in Figure 37 on page 128, you could select member MODULE9 by moving the cursor to the left of
the member name, typing S, and pressing Enter.
Note: On member lists displayed with the View, Browse, Edit, Foreground, and Batch options, ISPF
processes only the first S entered, ignoring all others.
With the Move/Copy utility and the Convert utility, you can rename members by entering new member
names in the Prompt field to the right of the member name.

134 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Using member selection lists

Sort a member list (SORT)

The SORT primary command arranges a member list according to the fields you specify. The sort
sequence, ascending or descending, is determined by the fields you choose and is maintained between
member list displays.
The format of this command is:

A
SORT field1
D A
field2
D

where:
field1
The primary field by which the member list is sorted.
field2
The secondary field by which the member list is sorted.
A|D
The direction in which values are sorted for this field (A=ascending, D=descending).
Table 16 on page 135 and Table 17 on page 136 show:
• Valid values for field1 and field2
• The default sort sequence used for each field
• A description of each field name.
Note: When multicultural support is enabled, the field names listed in Table 16 on page 135 and Table 17
on page 136 may be displayed in the national language. If they are then the SORT command will expect
field1 or field2 to be entered in the national language, or the standard abbreviation to be used.

Table 16. Sort Fields for Source Libraries

Field Sequence Description
Name Ascending Member name
Lib Ascending Library in concatenation sequence
VV Ascending ISPF version number
MM Ascending ISPF modification level
Created Descending Creation date
Changed Descending Date and time last changed
Size Descending Current number of records
Init Descending Initial number of records
Mod Descending Number of modified records
ID Ascending Last user
Prompt Descending Prompt field

ISPF libraries and data sets 135

Using member selection lists

Table 17. Sort Fields for Load Libraries

Field Sequence Description
Name Ascending Member name
Lib Ascending Library in concatenation sequence
Size Descending Load module size
TTR Ascending TTRN of beginning of load module
Alias-Of Ascending Member this is an alias of
AC Ascending Authorization code
AM Descending 2 Addressing mode
RM Descending 2 Residency mode
Attributes Descending Load module attributes
SSI Ascending System Status Index
Prompt Descending Prompt field

For example, to sort a member list by size and then by track record, enter:

SORT SIZE TTR

To sort a member list by creation date in ascending order, enter:

SORT CREATED A

Search for members (SRCHFOR)

Use the SRCHFOR primary command to search the members in the member list for one or more strings of
data using the SuperC Utility (see Option 3.14). You may limit the search to excluded or non-excluded
members, and control whether migrated members are recalled and searched or not. Use this format:

SRCHFOR string

The string parameter is optional but always converted to uppercase. If string is specified, the search is
performed using the current settings in the MEMBER LIST Srchfor Options panel. For example, if "Any
case" is not selected and "Filter list" is selected, the command SRCHFOR LBLBOX will list members that
contain the string "LBLBOX". A member that contained "lblbox" but not "LBLBOX" would not be listed.
If string is not specified, the MEMBER LIST Srchfor Options panel is displayed. You can use this panel to
specify multiple search strings, process options, and output options.
The operands WORD, SUFFIX, and PREFIX can be specified after each search string. Note that the search
strings are case sensitive and must match exactly as specified. If you want to disregard case, use the "Any
case" process option.
Select the "ASCII" process option to cause ISPF to process the data in the member as ASCII. The data
read from the members is converted from ASCII to EBCDIC. Any search string given in hexadecimal
notation is assumed to be in ASCII, matching the original input data. The ASCII code page is assumed to
be ISO 8859-1 (CCSID 819). The terminal code page is used as the EBCDIC code page. If the terminal
code page cannot be determined code page 1047 is used.

2 For the AM and RM columns, the value ANY is considered to be the largest value and will therefore sort to
the top of the list.

136 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Using member selection lists

You can use the C (continuation) operand to specify that both the current and previous string must be
found on the same line to constitute a match. Otherwise, lines with either string are treated as matching.
You can use the process options "Set EDIT FIND string" and "Set BROWSE FIND string" to initialize the
FIND string in Edit and Browse from the first SRCHFOR string. Use the output option "Filter list" to list only
the subset of members that contain one of the search strings.

Table 18. MEMBER LIST Srchfor Options panel: search string examples
Search strings Explanation
===> ABC Either string ABC or EFG may be found in the search members.
===> EFG
===> ABC WORD The two strings (ABC and EFG) must be found on the same line. ABC must be a
===> EFG C complete word, while EFG (a continuation definition) can be part of any word.
===> ABcD prefix The string (ABcD) is detected if the case of each letter matches and it is a prefix
of a word.
===> X'7b00' The hex string is specified as the search string. The listing must be browsed with
'HEX ON'.
===> 'AB C''D' The string (AB C'D) is specified.

To start the search from the MEMBER LIST Srchfor Options panel, press Enter. To cancel the request and
return to the Member List, enter END or CANCEL.
Output is in the listing DSN you specify and in the MESSAGE field in the DSLIST. Sort on this field to
consolidate results.

Change member list field attributes (MLC)

The MLC command displays the Member List Color Change Utility. Use this panel to change one or more of
the member list field attributes and to see the change immediately. Clearing a field restores the field's
default setting. Use the Defaults point-and-shoot field to restore all field attributes to ISPF default
settings.

MLC

You can also change the member selection field to use the ISPF Settings input field padding character
instead of the member list field default padding character. The member list default padding character for
single command selection lists is a period (.), and for multiple command selection lists it is an underscore
(_).

Change the default sort order for member lists (MLS)

The MLS command displays the Enhanced Member List Initial Sort panel. Use this panel to change the
default sort order for all ISPF enhanced member lists. You can specify separate sort orders for Load and
non-Load data sets.

MLS

Refresh the member lists (REFRESH)

The REFRESH command refreshes the member list, adding new members, adding renamed members
under their new names, and deleting members that have been removed from the list. It also resets the
line command field and prompt field on the member list. Unprocessed line commands and input or
messages in the prompt fields are erased by the REFRESH command.

REFRESH

ISPF libraries and data sets 137

Using member selection lists

Line commands
See:
• “Line commands for the move/copy utility” on page 138
• “Library and data set list utility line commands” on page 138

Line commands for the move/copy utility

On member list displays for the Move/Copy utility (option 3.3), you can enter these line commands at the
beginning of a line, ahead of one or more member names:
B
Browse the member
S
Select the member.
The B (browse) line command allows you to browse a member or members to determine whether you
really want to move or copy them. You can enter the B line command beside as many members as you
want to. The first member that has a B line command beside it is browsed when you press Enter. When
you finish browsing each member, the member list is redisplayed along with the unprocessed line
commands. Press Enter again to browse the next member.
Once you have decided which members to move or copy, use the S (select) line command to select those
members.

Library and data set list utility line commands

On member list displays for the Library utility (option 3.1) and the Data Set List utility (option 3.4), you can
enter these line commands at the beginning of a line, ahead of one or more member names:
B
Browse the member
C
Copy the member
D
Delete the member
E
Edit the member
G
Reset the member statistics
I
Display the member information
J
Submit the member
M
Move the member
P
Print the member
R
Rename the member
T
Invoke a TSO command for the member
V
View the member
W
Invoke a workstation command for the member

138 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Using member selection lists

=
Repeat last command
Note:
1. Member lists displayed with the M line command have a 9-character line command field to
accommodate TSO commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs. For more information, see the topics "M-
Display Member List" and "TSO Commands, CLISTs, and REXX EXECs" in the Data Set List Utility
(Option 3.4) section of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.
Any data in the prompt field is passed as an argument to any TSO command, CLIST or REXX EXEC.
When the '=' command is used the previous prompt data is also passed. Any prompt data that starts
with '*' is ignored.
2. Where the member to be deleted by the D line command is the name of a primary member, the
primary name and all associated alias names are deleted. Where the member is an alias member, only
the alias name and its directory entry are deleted.
3. When you use the R line command, enter the new member name in the Prompt field to the right of the
member name.
4. Where the data set refers to a partitioned data set load library (RECFM=U), and the member to be
renamed is the name of an primary member, the user data component of any associated alias names
will be updated to refer to the renamed primary name.
5. The Info command displays the same information as the member list. When extended line counts are
available, this panel can be used to display the values. Otherwise these panel fields are blank.
6. When you use the T line command, enter the name of the TSO command you want to execute in the
Prompt field to the right of the member name. The fully-qualified data set name, including the member
is passed as a parameter to the TSO command. If you want to execute a member that is a REXX exec
or CLIST, use the T line command on the line for that member, and enter EXEC in the Prompt field. If
you leave the Prompt field blank, the TSO Command Action panel allows you to enter the command
you want to execute.
Consider the following items when using line commands with members in a PDSE version 2 data set that
is configured for member generations:
• When you use the B, E, or V line command to browse, edit, or view a member, you can use the Prompt
field to access previous generations of the member. In addition to entering the line command, enter a
slash (/) in the Prompt field to display a panel on which you can enter the generation that you want to
access.
• When you use the D line command to delete a member, the current generation and all previous
generations of the member are deleted.
• When you use the C line command to copy a member, only the current generation of the member is
copied.
• When you use the M or R line command to move or rename a member, the current generation of the
member is moved or renamed and all previous generations of the member are deleted.
When you press Enter, each member preceded by a line command is processed unless:
• The V (view), B (browse), or E (edit) line command is followed by another line command. When you
return to the member list after viewing, browsing, or editing a member, you must press Enter again to
call any remaining line commands.
• You enter a line command for a member that was deleted. The names of deleted members are not
removed from the member list until it is updated. Remove the line command that precedes the deleted
member, and press Enter again. See “Updating a member list” on page 141 for more information.
• You enter an R (rename) line command, but do not put a new name in the Prompt field. Enter a new
member name, and press Enter again.
You can then perform one of these actions:
• Enter additional primary or line commands

ISPF libraries and data sets 139

Using member selection lists

• Scroll, if necessary, to bring additional members into view

• Enter the END command to return to the previous panel.
The next two figures show before and after examples that print members TEST and TEST1, delete
member TEST8, and rename member TEST4 to OLDTEST.

Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help

──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
LIBRARY USERID.TEST.SOURCE Row 0000001 of 0000009
Name Prompt Size Created Changed ID
P TEST 1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14 USERID
P TEST1 1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14 USERID
TEST2 1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:23 USERID
TEST3 1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14 USERID
R TEST4 OLDTEST 1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14 USERID
TEST5 1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14 USERID
TEST6 1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14 USERID
TEST7 1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14 USERID
D TEST8 1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14 USERID
**End**

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 38. Library Utility before Print, Rename, and Delete (ISRUDMM)

Menu Functions Confirm Utilities Help

──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
LIBRARY USERID.TEST.SOURCE Row 0000001 of 0000009
Name Prompt Size Created Changed ID
_ TEST *Printed 1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14 USERID
_ TEST1 *Printed 1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14 USERID
_ TEST2 1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:23 USERID
_ TEST3 1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14 USERID
_ TEST4 *Renamed
_ TEST5 1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14 USERID
_ TEST6 1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14 USERID
_ TEST7 1 2003/02/03 2003/02/03 17:04:14 USERID
_ TEST8 *Deleted
**End**

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 39. Library Utility after Print, Rename, and Delete (ISRUDMM)

140 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 z/OS UNIX directory selection lists

Updating a member list

When a member list is redisplayed after the completion of a function or command, it does not include
these types of member:
• For View, Browse, and Edit:
– New members created by recursive Edit calls.
– New members created using the CREATE command in EDIT. These do not display in an Enhanced
Member List display, but do display when using the traditional member list processing.
– Members created by another user.
– In split-screen mode, members created on another logical screen.
• For Library, Move/Copy, Data Set List, and Convert:
– New names of members that have been renamed.
– Fewer member names when members are deleted (Library and Data Set List) or moved (Move/Copy).
To display an up-to-date list, return to the previous panel, leave the member name blank or enter a
pattern. See “Displaying member lists” on page 122 for more information about displaying member lists.
To set your system to display a traditional member list when using the E, V, or B commands (Edit, View,
Browse) specifically, see the topic about DSLIST Settings in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II. This can be
found in the Utilities (Option 3) topic, in the information about Data Set List Utility Options.

Member list positioning

After selected members have been processed, the member list is redisplayed and positioned based on
the members selected and the setting of the Scroll Member List option.
When the Scroll Member List option is selected:
• If a single member is selected, the member list is redisplayed with the selected member scrolled to the
top of the display. However, if the CANCEL command is used to exit the selected member, the member
list is not scrolled.
• If multiple members are selected and some selections are contained in the last screen displayed before
the Enter key was pressed, the first selected member on that screen is scrolled to the top of the display.
• If multiple members are selected and none of the selections are contained in the last screen displayed
before the Enter key was pressed, the first selected member in the member list is scrolled to the top of
the display.
When the Scroll Member List option is not selected:
• If only single selections are allowed and the selection is contained in the last screen displayed before
the Enter key was pressed, the member list is not scrolled. The cursor is positioned in front of the
selected member.
• If only single selections are allowed and the selection is not contained in the last screen displayed
before the Enter key was pressed, the member list is redisplayed showing the last screen containing the
selected member. The cursor is positioned in front of the selected member.
• If multiple selections are allowed and the last selected member is contained in the last screen
displayed before the Enter key was pressed, the member list is not scrolled. The cursor is positioned in
front of the last selected member.
• If multiple selections are allowed and the last selection is not contained in the last screen displayed
before the Enter key was pressed, the member list is redisplayed with the last selected member
scrolled to the top. The cursor is positioned in front of the last selected member.

z/OS UNIX directory selection lists

A z/OS UNIX directory selection list is displayed when you specify the pathname for a directory:

ISPF libraries and data sets 141

Data set passwords

• On the View and Edit entry panels (ISPF options 1 and 2).
• On a call to the BROWSE, EDIT, and VIEW services.
• With the edit and view MOVE and COPY primary commands.
• On the EDIT, VIEW, and BROWSE command entry panels displayed when using these primary
commands within the browse, view, or edit function.
The directory selection list is almost identical to the list displayed from the z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility
(PDF option 3.17). The selection list supports the S (select) line command, allowing you to select the file
to be processed with the function that invoked the list.
For the directory list displayed by the edit MOVE and COPY commands, the only valid line commands are S
(Select), B (Browse), and L (List subdirectory). For all other directory selection lists, all the line commands
supported by the z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility are also supported.

Data set passwords

A Data Set Password field is included on library and data set entry panels:

Data Set Password . . (If password protected)

The Data Set Password field contains the password for OS password-protected data sets. By assigning
more than one password to the same data set, you can give some users read-only access while giving
others read/write access.
Nondisplay input fields are used so that the passwords do not appear on the screen. When you specify a
concatenated sequence of libraries, the password applies to all data sets in the sequence.
If you replace a long password with a shorter password, blank out the remaining spaces of the Data Set
Password field.
You can use ISPF with the Resource Access Control Facility (RACF). RACF provides extensive facilities for
data set security. However, when using RACF, do not enter a password on the ISPF panels, because RACF
relies on your TSO user ID and logon password to identify you and check for proper authorization.

Format definitions
A Format Name field is included on the View Entry Panel and on the Edit Entry Panel:

Format Name . . . ________

The Format Name field contains the name of a format definition, which is used to view, browse, or edit a
formatted data set. A formatted data set contains records that consist of subfields. The locations and
lengths of these subfields are fixed throughout the data set. The formatted data set support in View,
Browse, and Edit is particularly useful for data that contains double-byte character (DBCS) data but does
not contain shift-out (SO) and shift-in (SI) characters.
The format name can consist of up to eight alphanumeric characters; the first one must be alphabetic.
A format definition can include Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code (EBCDIC) fields, DBCS
fields, and mixed fields. If the specified format includes a mixed field definition, the Mixed Mode field is
ignored, even if you select it. See “Mixed mode” on page 143 for information. For information about
defining formats for formatted data sets, see the topic about the Format Specifications Utility (Option
3.11) in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II. The Format Specifications utility is provided to support the IBM
5550 terminal that uses DBCS.
When formatted data is displayed, an attribute character that does not reside in the data set and is not
stored in the data set precedes each field. Therefore, the column position on the display is different from
the column position in the data set.

142 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Mixed Mode

The allowable maximum length is decreased two bytes per field definition from the standard View,
Browse, and Edit allowable maximum length.

Mixed mode
A Mixed Mode field is included on the View Entry Panel and the Edit Entry Panel:

_ Mixed Mode

The Mixed Mode field specifies whether you want to view, browse, or edit unformatted mixed data that
contains both EBCDIC (single-byte) and DBCS (double-byte) characters. Use a slash to select mixed
mode. If your terminal does not support DBCS, the value in this field is ignored.
DBCS strings are enclosed with SO (X'0E') and SI (X'0F') characters in unformatted mixed data. The SO
character precedes the DBCS character string and the SI character follows the string.
If the view, browse, or edit line contains mixed data that are not valid, ISPF assumes the line can contain
only EBCDIC characters. Examples of mixed data that are not valid include:
• Unpaired SO and SI characters
• Incorrect DBCS characters between SO and SI characters
• An odd number of bytes between SO and SI characters.
If you call View, Browse, or Edit from the Library utility (option 3.1) or the Data Set List utility (option 3.4),
ISPF assumes that you want to use mixed mode.
If you want to view, browse, or edit DBCS data as EBCDIC data, you must do so in non-mixed mode. You
can do this by operating from a terminal that does not support DBCS or by deselecting the Mixed Mode
field.
In non-mixed mode, SO and SI characters are not treated as special characters; instead, they are treated
as characters that cannot be displayed. Thus, you can view, browse, or edit the data in the conventional
way.
You can also view, browse, or edit DBCS data in hexadecimal format, just as you would EBCDIC data. For
information about specifying hexadecimal display, see the information about "HEX-Displaying Data in
Hexadecimal Format" in the View (Option 1) topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.
Note: Do not edit a record in hexadecimal format when a DBCS string encroaches on the display
boundary.
DBCS data that is not valid is not supported. If DBCS fields or DBCS strings in a mixed field contain any
bytes with hexadecimal code ranging from X'00' to X'3F', you may get unwanted results.

Partitioned Data Set Extended (PDSE)

Partitioned Data Set Extended (PDSE) is a data set type that is managed by DFSMS. Externally, a PDSE is
very similar to a PDS. Internally, the PDSE has a different directory structure, member format, and record
format. A PDSE is indistinguishable from a PDS through most interfaces used to access a PDS directory or
member. All ISPF functions support the PDSE.
You can concatenate a PDSE library with a PDS library if they have consistent record formats and logical
record lengths. All functions in the Library Utility (option 3.1) support PDSEs with the exception of the
compress function.

Packed data sets

The packed data set format allows you to use direct access storage devices (DASD) more efficiently. In
this format, ISPF replaces any repeating characters with a sequence showing how many times the

ISPF libraries and data sets 143

List and Log Data Sets

character is repeated. Before you can properly use data stored in this format as input to processing
programs, such as compilers, you must first tell ISPF to unpack and expand the data.
The two requirements for using packed data sets are:
• To store data in packed format:
– Enter the PACK ON Edit primary command while editing a data set or PDS member.
– Select the Pack Option field (under To Data Set Options:) when copying or moving members using the
Move/Copy utility (option 3.3).
• To unpack and expand packed data for processing, select the Source Data Packed field on the
Foreground Selection panel or the Batch Selection panel. You must select this field if any of the input
data, including that referred to in COPY or INCLUDE statements, is in packed format.

List and log data sets

ISPF helps you get hardcopy listings of source modules, and maintains a log of significant user activities.
These items are kept in data sets called the list data set and the log data set, respectively.
When needed, the two data sets are allocated automatically. They are temporary data sets named:

prefix.userid.SPFn.LIST
prefix.userid.SPFLOGn.LIST

Note: The data set name used can be modified under the operation of site-defined options. See the
section "Temporary data set names" in ISPF Planning and Customizing Guide.
prefix
The data set prefix in your TSO profile. Used only if it is different from your user ID.
userid
Your user ID.
n
A number from 0 to 9.
If you have specified in your TSO profile a data set prefix that differs from your user ID, the data set
names begin with your data set prefix, followed by your user ID. Once generated, these data sets remain
open throughout your ISPF session. However, even though they are open, you can still process them by
using the ISPF LIST and LOG commands.

List data set

The list data set is used for temporary storage for data to be printed at a later time. This data includes, for
example, data written as a result of:
• Using the LIST service
• Issuing the PRINT, PRINT-HI, PRINTL, or PRINTLHI commands (but not PRINTG)
• Using Option 3 utilities.

To avoid generating an ISPF list data set, do not request any print functions.

Log data set

The log data set is used to capture data that can be useful for such things as diagnosing problems. This
data includes, for example, data written as a result of:
• Using the LOG service
• Test and trace data such as:
– ISPF TRACE mode data

144 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 List and Log Data Sets

– Dialog Test option 7.7 dialog trace data.

Use the Log/List pull-down from the ISPF Settings panel action bar to prevent generating the ISPF log
data set. However, if you use the Dialog Test option (7), allow generating the log data set because Dialog
Test writes trace data to the log when you request it. Also, if Dialog Test finds an unexpected condition,
problem data and error messages are written to the log.

Processing the log and list data sets

You can process the log and list data sets either:
• During an ISPF session, using the LOG and LIST commands
• At the end of a session.
ISPF processes (prints, keeps, deletes) only data sets that it has allocated. Any attempt to process a log
or list data set that has been preallocated by the user results in an appropriate ISPF message. Any
references to ISPF processing of log or list data sets refer to data sets that ISPF has allocated. Users can
supply routines to process preallocated data sets after ISPF has terminated.

How to specify log and list data set processing options

The log and list data set processing options can be specified through any of these:
• Use of the LOG and LIST commands during an ISPF session.
• Use of the Log/List pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel for setting default options.
• The ISPF termination panel, which can display when you exit from ISPF. See “Log and list data set
processing at the end of a session” on page 147 to find out under what conditions ISPF will display this
panel.

Processing the log and list data sets during an ISPF session
The LOG and LIST commands allow you to process the log and list data sets, respectively, at any time
during an ISPF session. The log and list data sets must have been allocated. You control the data set
processing by specifying on the LOG or LIST command one of the three keyword options: PRINT, DELETE,
or KEEP.
If you issue the LOG or LIST command with no parameter specified, ISPF displays a panel that allows you
to select the data set processing options. The panels for the LOG and LIST commands are shown in Figure
40 on page 146 and Figure 41 on page 146, respectively.

ISPF libraries and data sets 145

List and Log Data Sets

Specify Disposition of Log Data Set

Log Data Set (USERID.SPFLOG2.LIST) Disposition:

Process Option . . . . 1. Print data set and delete
2. Delete data set without printing
3. Keep existing data set and
continue with new data set
Batch SYSOUT class . .
Local printer ID or
writer-name . . . . .
Local SYSOUT class . .

Press ENTER key to process the log data set.

Enter END command to exit without processing the log data set.

Job statement information: (Required for system printer)

===>
===>
===>
===>

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 40. Log Data Set Defaults Panel (ISPLLP01)

Specify Disposition of List Data Set

List Data Set (USERID.SPF1.LIST) Disposition:

Process Option . . . . 1. Print data set and delete
2. Delete data set without printing
3. Keep existing data set and
continue with new data set
Batch SYSOUT class . .
Local printer ID or
writer-name . . . . .
Local SYSOUT class . .

Press ENTER key to process the list data set.

Enter END command to exit without processing the list data set.

Job statement information: (Required for system printer)

===>
===>
===>
===>

Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 41. List Data Set Defaults Panel (ISPLLP02)

With the appropriate panel displayed, type in the process option of your choice. If you specify Print data
set and delete, you must also specify a Batch SYSOUT class, or local printer ID or writer name. After you
have typed in all information that you wish to specify, press Enter to pass the input to ISPF. ISPF takes the
specified action for the data set and then returns you to the panel from which you issued the LOG or LIST
command. ISPF issues a message indicating whether the action requested was successful.

146 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 List and Log Data Sets

If you issue the END command from the Log or List Data Set Defaults panel, ISPF returns you to the panel
from which you issued the LOG or LIST command without processing the data set.
ISPF initializes the Log or List Data Set Defaults panel fields with the default values specified with the Log/
List pull-down on the ISPF Settings panel. If a default disposition of Keep data set has been specified,
ISPF translates the value to Keep data set and allocate new data set before displaying the panel. If you
modify the process option field, the new value is used to process the data set; however, it is not saved in
the system profile. All other fields modified on the panel are saved in the system profile and become the
default values the next time the data set is processed.
If you issue the LOG or LIST command with the PRINT, DELETE, or KEEP option, ISPF does not display a
panel. Specifying PRINT, DELETE, or KEEP on the command causes data set processing equivalent to
specifying Print data set and delete, Delete data set, and Keep data set and allocate new data set,
respectively, on the Log or List Data Set Defaults panel.
Two system variables, ZLOGNAME and ZLSTNAME, contain the fully qualified names of the log and list
data sets, respectively. If either data set is not allocated or has not been used in the session, the
corresponding system variable value is blank.
Note: The values of ZLOGNAME and ZLSTNAME are set to blank immediately after the log and list data
sets have been processed because the data sets are freed by the LOG/LIST command processing. A new
data set will not be allocated until it is written to. If you intend to use the log or list data set name for your
processing, be sure to retrieve it before issuing the LOG or LIST command.
The system variables are summarized in z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference.

Conditions for using the LOG and LIST commands

You can issue the LOG or LIST command from any command line except in these situations:
• The command panel for the related log or list data set is active in any logical screen.
• The ISPF termination panel is active.
• The data set to be processed is not allocated or was preallocated.
• Dialog Test option 7.5 (Browse ISPF log) is active, and you are attempting to process the log data set.

Log and list data set processing at the end of a session

Figure 42 on page 148 shows the panel that ISPF displays at the end of a session if one of these is true:
• The initial dialog began with the display of a menu, and the dialog is ended with the END command
issued from that menu.
• The initial dialog began with the performance of a function, and the function ends with a return code of
0.
• The log and list data set processing defaults have not been specified, or the default values are not valid.
If the application ends with a nonzero return code, the termination panel is not displayed.
If the termination panel does not display for one of these reasons, the log and list data sets are processed
using the default options.

ISPF libraries and data sets 147

List and Log Data Sets

Specify Disposition of Log and List Data Sets

More: +
Log Data Set (USERID.SPFLOG2.LIST) Disposition:
Process Option . . . . 1. Print data set and delete
2. Delete data set without printing
3. Keep data set - Same
(allocate same data set in next session)
4. Keep data set - New
(allocate new data set in next session)
Batch SYSOUT class . .
Local printer ID or
writer-name . . . . .
Local SYSOUT class . .

List Data Set (USERID.SPF1.LIST) Disposition:

Process Option . . . . 1. Print data set and delete
2. Delete data set without printing
3. Keep data set - Same
(allocate same data set in next session)
4. Keep data set - New
(allocate new data set in next session)
Command ===>
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap
F12=Cancel

Figure 42. Specify Disposition of Log and List Data Sets Panel (ISPPFT03)

The valid process options shown in Figure 42 on page 148 are described in “Data set processing options”
on page 148.

Data set processing options

For each term defined here, the first value shown is the processing option that you can specify on the Log/
List pull-down from the ISPF Settings panel, on the Specify Disposition of Log and List Data Sets panel, or
on the Log or List Data Set Defaults panel. The value in parentheses is the corresponding LOG or LIST
command parameter.
1. Print data set and delete (PRINT)
Print the data set, then delete it. You must specify a Batch SYSOUT class or local printer ID or writer
name.
• If the Batch SYSOUT class is specified, ISPF submits a background job to print and deletes the data
set or sets.
• If a local printer ID or writer name is specified, ISPF uses the TSO PRINTDS command to route the
data set to the specified printer or external writer program and then deletes the data set.
Note: If you have selected Edit PRINTDS Command on the ISPF Settings panel (option 0), ISPF
displays the Local Print Command Edit panel to allow you to intercept and edit the PRINTDS
command before it processes. See “Editing the PRINTDS command” on page 149 for additional
information.
ISPF uses file tailoring services to print data on a system printer. Therefore, if this option is specified
during an ISPF session, along with a Batch SYSOUT class, file tailoring must not be active on the
logical screen from which the LOG or LIST command is issued. If an FTOPEN or FTINCL has been
issued without a subsequent FTCLOSE, ISPF issues an appropriate message.
2. Delete data set without printing (DELETE)
Delete the data set.
3. Keep data set - Same
Not applicable to LOG or LIST command. Close and free the data set. For the LOG or LIST data set,
allocate the same data set at the beginning of the next session. If the data set does not exist, ISPF
creates one with the same name.

148 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 List and Log Data Sets

4. Keep data set - New (KEEP)

Close and free the data set. Allocate a different data set for the next time log or list information is
generated in this session or in the next session.

Editing the PRINTDS command

If you have selected Edit PRINTDS Command on the ISPF Settings panel (option 0) and you specify a local
printer ID or writer name on either the Log and List Data Set Termination Options panel or the Hardcopy
Utility panel, ISPF displays the Local Print Command Edit panel shown in Figure 43 on page 149 to allow
you to edit the PRINTDS command before it processes.

Local Print Command Edit

Select function to perform and press Enter to exit and print.

End or Cancel will exit without printing.

Local Print Command Options:

Function to perform . . . 1 1. Exit and issue PRINTDS command
2. Exit without printing

PRINTDS Header:
. . : PRINTDS DATASET('USERID.SPFLOG3.LIST') DEST(PRINTER1) CCHAR

Configuration table PRINTDS operands:

. . . NONUM

User PRINTDS operands:

. . .

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap

F12=Cancel

Figure 43. Local Print Command Edit Panel (ISPCHPLP)

The fields on this panel function as follows:

Function to perform
Specify the print function you want ISPF to perform:
1
Exit ISPF and issue the PRINTDS command (as edited)
2
Exit ISPF without printing.
Note: If you arrive at this panel from ISPF termination processing, you will continue with
termination and exit the product after your print request is issued or canceled.
PRINTDS Header
This field cannot be edited. It contains the PRINTDS command, the data set name, the printer ID or
writer name, and the CCHAR operand, if appropriate.
Configuration table PRINTDS operands
These operands operate at a system level and can be altered only in the ISPF Configuration table.
User PRINTDS operands
Enter additional operands (for example, COPIES or FORMS). These operands can be edited and are
saved in the application command table.

ISPF libraries and data sets 149

Foreground and batch output listings

If you enter CANCEL (or select Cancel), the PRINTDS command is not issued. If you enter END or RETURN
or use a jump function, the PRINTDS command is issued and you receive a completion message.

Foreground and batch output listings

These additional listing data sets are allocated as needed for foreground or batch processing:

prefix.userid.list-id.LIST
prefix.userid.list-id.LINKLIST
prefix.userid.list-id.TERM
prefix.userid.list-id.TESTLIST

prefix
The data set prefix in your TSO profile. Use it only if you have one and it is different from your user ID.
userid
Your user ID.
list-id
The name specified in the List ID field on the foreground or batch data entry panel. This name is
required for sequential data sets. However, for partitioned data sets, the member name becomes the
default list-id if the List ID field is blank.
The particular data set names you use depend on the foreground or batch processing option chosen.
For batch processing, the output can either be directed to a list data set or printed as part of the batch job.
When batch processing is finished, you can browse the list data set, and then use the Hardcopy utility
(option 3.6) to print it. Using this utility, show whether you want to keep the data set or delete it after
printing. ISPF does not delete these data sets when you end ISPF.
For the foreground option, the output listing is directed to a list data set and automatically displayed for
browsing. When you end the browse function, ISPF displays a selection panel that allows you to choose
whether to print, keep, or delete the list data set. Again, ISPF does not delete this data set when you end
ISPF.

Other temporary data sets

If you are using virtual I/O (VIO), you can allocate space for temporary data sets, and then VIO assigns
them system-generated names. Otherwise, ISPF allocates temporary control and listing data sets, as
needed, for its own internal use. You are usually not aware of their existence. They are assigned these
names:

prefix.userid.SPFTEMPn.CNTL
prefix.userid.SPFTEMPn.LIST
prefix.userid.SPFTEMPn.WORK
prefix.userid.appl-idzzzz.BACKUP
prefix.userid.appl-idzzzz.BACKUPI
prefix.userid.SPFnnn.OUTLIST

Note: The data set name used can be modified under the operation of site-defined options. See the
section "Temporary data set names" in ISPF Planning and Customizing Guide.
prefix
The data set prefix in your TSO profile. It is used only if you have one and it is different from your user
ID.
userid
Your user ID.
n
A number that corresponds to the logical screen that is active. n can be between 0-9 and A-W for
CNTL data sets and between 1-9 and A-W for LIST and WORK data sets, where 1 is the first logical
screen, 9 is the ninth logical screen, A is the tenth logical screen, and so on.

150 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Job statement information

appl-id
The application ID.
zzzz
A number from 0001-0008, or higher if customized, controlled by the edit recovery table (appl-
id EDRT for the EDREC service and appl-id EIRT for the EDIREC service) and the number of concurrent
edit calls that are active.
nnn
A number generated by ISPF, which has a range of 100-999.
These data sets are deleted:
• By edit recovery when the data sets are no longer needed
• When you specifically request that they be deleted.
• By Move/Copy when no IEBCOPY errors are encountered.

Job statement information

ISPF allows you to submit Batch jobs for printing and language processing. However, before submitting a
Batch job, you must supply job statement information. For this purpose, four lines are provided on each
job submission panel.
You can use the lines that contain //*:
• As continuation lines by removing the asterisk (*)
• To enter other JCL statements, such as JOBLIB DD.
If you do not need these lines, you can blank them out. Blank lines are not submitted to the job stream.

ISPF libraries and data sets 151

Job statement information

152 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Getting ready to run on MVS

Chapter 6. Getting ready to run on MVS

This topic helps you prepare to use ISPF data-element libraries. ISPF data elements include such things
as panels and messages. Libraries to be accessed during processing of a dialog must be defined to ISPF.
This topic describes the kinds of data-element libraries required when ISPF is active. It also describes
and provides examples of how to define library data sets to ISPF, both before starting a session, and
dynamically during a session.

Setting up ISPF libraries

To set up libraries for developing and testing dialogs, follow these steps:
1. Set up the panel, message, skeleton, table, and program libraries for the application. Allocate new
partitioned data sets.
2. Create a CLIST or REXX command procedure that contains the necessary ALLOCATE statements to
allocate the libraries. Concatenate the application libraries ahead of the libraries required by ISPF, as
described in “Library concatenation” on page 119.
Note: You can use the LIBDEF service to dynamically allocate libraries instead of allocating them
before invoking ISPF. For more information see the z/OS ISPF Services Guide.
3. Create the panels, messages, and skeletons by editing directly into the application libraries.
4. Create the dialog functions and ensure that the load modules are in libraries accessible to ISPF.
Functions coded as program modules must be link-edited. When a function is link-edited, the ISPLINK
subroutine must be included (explicitly or by automatic call) in the load module. ISPLINK is distributed
in load module format and can be placed in a system library for automatic call during link-edit.
5. Invoke the application. To do this, add an ISPSTART command to the command procedure created in
step 2. The ISPSTART command should start the application using the appropriate PANEL, CMD, or
PGM parameter. Users can start the application by using this command procedure or by selecting the
application from the master menu or another menu.

Allocating required ISPF libraries

The libraries described in Table 19 on page 153 are partitioned data sets required for operation of ISPF in
the MVS/TSO environment:

Table 19. Required Partitioned Data Sets

DDNAME Description RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE
ISPPLIB Panel Library FB 80 3120
ISPMLIB Message Library FB 80 3120
ISPSLIB Skeleton Library FB 80 3120
ISPTLIB Table Input Library FB 80 3120
ISPPROF User Profile Library FB 80 (see note)
SYSPROC Command Procedures Lib FB 80 3120

Note: The block size must be a multiple of 80. You can specify BLKSIZE=0 to use a system determined
block size.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 153

Getting ready to run on MVS

The panel, message, skeleton, and table input libraries are distributed with ISPF. As distributed, the
libraries have the characteristics listed. These libraries can be reblocked by the installation to a larger
block size. In addition, the panel, message, and skeleton libraries can be copied into a variable record
format. The maximum length records supported are 160 for panels, 80 for messages, and 255 for
skeletons. If data sets having unequal record lengths are to be concatenated, the record format must be
variable. If you have preprocessed any panels in the panel library, they must be reprocessed using the
ISPPREP utility after changing the panel library's record size or record format. Preprocessed panels will
not function correctly if copied directly to a data set with a different record size or format.
Table 20 on page 154 contains the LRECL limits which are enforced during ISPF initialization:

Table 20. LRECL Limits during ISPF Initialization

DDNAME Description RECFM Minimum Maximum
LRECL LRECL
ISPPLIB Panel Library FB VB 80 84 160 164
ISPMLIB Message Library FB VB 80 84 80 84
ISPSLIB Skeleton Library FB VB 80 84 255 259

The VB libraries require the LRECL to contain 4 extra bytes for the record descriptor word.
Note: Use of the BUFNO parameter on allocation of ISPF libraries is not supported.
Problems can occur when using file tailoring services together with other services (EDIT, COPY, ...) that
result in modifying the data set members in the ISPSLIB concatenation. ISPSLIB is the input skeleton
library, and it is assumed to be a static library. FTINCL obtains existing DCB/DEB information based on the
last OPEN done against ISPSLIB by ISPF.
It is recommended that applications that use file tailoring and that also modify members of ISPSLIB use
the LIBDEF service for ISPSLIB to point to the application's skeleton library. Additionally, the application
should check for any changes to the data set information (DCB/DEB) before invoking file tailoring services.
If there has been a change, then the application should issue a NULL LIBDEF for ISPSLIB and then re-
issue the original LIBDEF for ISPSLIB. This forces the ISPSLIB library to close and then re-open.
ISPF assumes that ISPSLIB is a static library. When you make allocations, consider limiting the possibility
of extents by allocating the skeleton with the largest optimal block size.
There is a separate profile library for each end user. Its contents are dynamically generated and updated
while ISPF is running. There is also a unique profile library for each national language version.
The recommended data set names for these libraries are shown here. Check with your ISPF system
administrator to determine if these are the actual data set names used at your installation.
DDNAME
DSNAME
ISPPLIB
ISP.SISPPxxx
ISPMLIB
ISP.SISPMxxx
ISPSLIB
ISP.SISPSxxx ISP.SISPSLIB
ISPTLIB
ISP.SISPTxxx
ISPPROF
User-selected. Unique for each national language used.
SYSPROC
ISP.SISPEXEC ISP.SISPCLIB

154 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Getting ready to run on MVS

xxx is a placeholder that represents the specific language you are using:
xxx
Language
ENU
US English
DES
Swiss German
DEU
German
JPN
Japanese
ENP
Uppercase English.
You should concatenate application libraries for panels, messages, skeletons, and tables ahead of the
corresponding ISPF libraries using the ddnames shown. The application libraries must have the same
data set characteristics as the required libraries, as described. For example, assume that application XYZ
uses these partitioned data sets for panels, messages, skeletons, and tables:

XYZ.PANELS
XYZ.MSGS
XYZ.SKELS
XYZ.TABLES

You would issue these allocations:

//ISPPLIB DD DSN=XYZ.PANELS,DISP=SHR
// DD DSN=ISP.SISPPxxx,DISP=SHR

//ISPMLIB DD DSN=XYZ.MSGS,DISP=SHR
// DD DSN=ISP.SISPMxxx,DISP=SHR

//ISPSLIB DD DSN=XYZ.SKELS,DISP=SHR
// DD DSN=ISP.SISPSxxx,DISP=SHR
// DD DSN=ISP.SISPSLIB,DISP=SHR

//ISPTLIB DD DSN=XYZ.TABLES,DISP=SHR
// DD DSN=ISP.SISPTENU,DISP=SHR

//ISPPROF DD DSN=USERAA.ISPF.PROFILE,DISP=OLD

//SYSPROC DD DSN=ISP.SISPEXEC,DISP=SHR
// DD DSN=ISP.SISPCLIB,DISP=SHR

These allocations must be performed before you start ISPF. They can be done in the user's TSO LOGON
procedure by using DD statements, as shown, or in a CLIST or REXX command procedure by using the
corresponding TSO ALLOCATE commands.

Allocating optional ISPF table libraries

The data set described in Table 21 on page 155 is optional. You must allocate it only if an application uses
table services.

Table 21. Table Data Sets

DDNAME Description RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE
ISPTABL Table Output Library FB 80 (See note)

Note: The block size must be a multiple of 80. You can specify BLKSIZE=0 to use a system determined
block size.

Getting ready to run on MVS 155

Getting ready to run on MVS

The table output library must be a partitioned data set. The ISPTABL ddname that defines the table output
library can specify the same data set as the table input library, ddname ISPTLIB. The first data set in the
ISPTLIB concatenation should be the same as the data set used for ISPTABL. This ensures predictable
behavior of dialogs that use table services without specifying the LIBRARY keyword. The output and input
data sets must be the same if the updated version of a table is to be reprocessed by the same dialog that
updated it.
You must allocate the table output library to ddname ISPTABL before using table services. ISPF includes
ENQ logic to prevent simultaneous updates. ISPTABL must not specify a concatenated sequence of data
sets. It is possible to have the dialog dynamically allocate ISPTABL and free it upon completion. However,
in an environment in which multiple dialogs can be executing, it is more practical to permanently allocate
ISPTABL. ISPTABL should be allocated with DISP=SHR, even though it specifies an output data set. An
application can use the ISPTABL allocation if it already exists or use a LIBDEF for ISPTABL so that only
this application is affected.
For more information about table locking and allocation, see the "Protecting Table Resources" topic in
z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference.

Allocating optional file tailoring ISPF libraries

The data set described in Table 22 on page 156 is optional. You must allocate it only if an application uses
file-tailoring services.

Table 22. File-Tailoring Data Sets

DDNAME Description RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE
ISPFILE File-Tailoring Output FB/VB 255 max.

File-tailoring output can be written to a temporary sequential data set provided by ISPF. The temporary
data set is allocated automatically, so there is no need for the dialog to allocate a data set. The fully
qualified name of the temporary data set is available in system variable ZTEMPF. The ddname is available
in ZTEMPN. This temporary data set always uses 80-character fixed-length records.
If the temporary data set is not used, file-tailoring output can be written to either a partitioned or a
sequential data set. Both fixed-length and variable-length records are permitted. The maximum logical
record length is 255 bytes. A data set must be allocated to ddname ISPFILE before starting file-tailoring
services. The dialog can dynamically allocate the output library, and can free it upon completion.
For a sequential data set, ISPFILE must be allocated with DISP=OLD. For a partitioned data set, ISPFILE
can be allocated with DISP=SHR. ISPFILE must not specify a concatenated sequence of data sets.

Allocating optional image ISPF library

The data set described in Table 23 on page 156 is not a required ISPF library. You must allocate it only if
an application in GUI mode uses images.

Table 23. Image Data Set

DDNAME Description RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE
ISPILIB Image Input Library FB 80 (See note)

Note: The block size must be a multiple of 80. You can specify BLKSIZE=0 to use a system determined
block size.

156 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Getting ready to run on MVS

If you plan to use ISPF's image support, you must allocate the image input data set to ddname ISPILIB
before using the images. You can accomplish this by allocating the image input data set before you invoke
ISPF. Image files in Graphics Interchange Format (GIF) should reside in this input data set. This data set
must be a partitioned data set. It can be allocated with DISP=SHR.
Note: The LIBDEF service does not result in the allocation of ISPILIB.
ISPF ships sample image files in the SISPSAMP library. The ISPF panel ISR@PRIM uses the sample image
files ISPFGIFL, ISPFGIFS, and ISPEXIT. You can copy the sample image files to your own image input data
set allocated to ddname ISPILIB.

Allocating CLIST, REXX, and program libraries

Dialog functions that are coded as CLIST or REXX command procedures can be in a procedure library that
has been allocated to ddname SYSPROC before starting ISPF. A REXX command procedure can also be
allocated to the SYSEXEC ddname. The SYSEXEC ddname is described in z/OS TSO/E REXX User's Guide.
You must link-edit dialog functions that have been coded as programs. The load module can reside in a
step library, a system link library (such as SYS1.LINKLIB), or the link pack area. Alternatively, it can be in a
partitioned data set (RECFM=U) allocated to ddname ISPLLIB(DISP=SHR). This library (the ISPF Link
Library) can be used for testing new dialogs that contain program-coded functions. If used, it must be
allocated prior to starting ISPF. ISPLLIB can specify a concatenated sequence of partitioned data sets.
ISPLLIB is used as a task library when fetching load modules. It is searched before the system link
libraries and the link pack area. If ISPF product modules are kept in a step library and a task library
(ISPLLIB) is used, the data sets containing the ISPF product modules should be included in the ISPLLIB
concatenation sequence as well as the step library concatenation. If a program is to be used in split-
screen mode it should be linked as reentrant or nonreusable.
If you are using the ISPF client/server (ISPF C/S) feature or the z/OS UNIX Directory List Utility, the
Language Environment® run-time library data sets SCEERUN and SCEERUN2 must be in STEPLIB or
LNKLST. The modules in these data sets are not searched for in ISPLLIB.

Allocating DBCS libraries

DBCS users can use alternate message, panel, and skeleton libraries. To do so, the DBCS versions of the
libraries must have been allocated using these ddnames:
ISPMALT
Alternate message library
ISPPALT
Alternate panel library
ISPSALT
Alternate skeleton library.
You can allocate these libraries when you allocate the distributed ISPF libraries. If the alternate libraries
are allocated and the terminal has DBCS capability, ISPF uses the alternate libraries. If either of these two
conditions is not satisfied, ISPF uses the distributed libraries.

Selecting the National Language for ISPF sessions

An ISPF session can be run in any installation-supported national language. Before starting ISPF with the
ISPSTART command, a user must perform the necessary allocations. For example, command procedure
ISPFE might be issued for an English session or ISPFG for a German session.
The same set of ddnames (ISPPLIB, ISPMLIB, ISPSLIB, ISPTLIB, and ISPPROF) must be allocated
regardless of the command procedure used. At logon time, the necessary allocations for the national
language at an installation can be performed by a CLIST or REXX logon procedure.

Getting ready to run on MVS 157

Getting ready to run on MVS

The language in which a session runs reflects the value (not always the full language name) in the read-
only system variable ZLANG, which is available to dialogs running under ISPF. The default value for
session languages is specified when ISPF is installed, and is discussed in z/OS ISPF Planning and
Customizing. You can override the default session language with an alternate language keyword on the
ISPSTART command. See the z/OS ISPF Dialog Developer's Guide and Reference for the exact syntax to
use.
By specifying a default session language, the installation can ensure that both ISPF initialization
messages and the normal session messages are in the default language. Even if you override the session
default language with an alternate language using an ISPSTART language keyword, some of the first
initialization messages, issued before the command scan, are in the default session language. However,
any messages issued after processing of the ISPSTART parameters are in the language specified by the
keyword.
If the terminal does not support DBCS, and the default language (or the alternate language selected by
the language keyword) requires DBCS, ISPF uses English as the session language.
In cases where the session language requires DBCS, certain messages are always issued in English. These
messages are:
• ISPF Main task abend.
• ISPF Subtask abend.
• The following required module for the selected language could not be loaded.
• ISPF command not allowed. You are already under ISPF.
• Invalid environment; TSO/E version 2.1 or later required.

158 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Installing the Client/Server component

Appendix A. Installing the Client/Server component

The Client/Server component of ISPF takes the form of an application called the ISPF Workstation Agent
(WSA). The WSA runs on your local workstation and maintains a connection between the workstation and
the ISPF host. The WSA provides:
• The ability to display the ISPF panels using the display function of your workstation operating system
(known as running in GUI mode).
• The ability to edit host data on your workstation and workstation data on the host (known as distributed
editing).
The WSA installation file is supplied with ISPF and must be downloaded from the host to the local
workstation and then installed and initialized before these functions are available.

Installation considerations for the Client/Server component

This topic provides information on these topics that you need to be aware of before you install the WSA
component on your workstation:
• Assumptions
• Required hardware and software
• Configuration parameters

Assumptions
The Workstation Agent assumes that you have already established one of these environments:
• A TCP/IP connection exists between your workstation and the host, and your workstation is running
under one of these supported operating systems:
– Microsoft Windows
– AIX
• An APPC connection exists between your Windows workstation and the host
All necessary APPC or TCP/IP communications software must be initialized fully before starting the WSA.
The WSA does not attempt to initialize the communications protocol again after it receives the first
initialization error.
For information about installation and customization of the APPC or TCP/IP software used on your
workstation, consult the documentation supplied by your software vendor. Additional information can be
found in Appendix B, “Configuring communications for the ISPF Client/Server,” on page 171.
The WSA installation file is downloaded using the ISPF C/S Component Install Utility. This utility provides
three ways of obtaining the file:
1. Using File Transfer Protocol (FTP): This option assumes that you have a TCP/IP connection (not APPC),
that the TCP/IP on your workstation supports the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) and that FTP is
operational at your workstation. An operational FTP requires that:
• FTP be configured and started on the workstation.
• The workstation FTP server (FTPD), or "Daemon," be active.
• The users have the authority to transfer files. Users are authorized through entries in the FTP
Daemon access protection file. See “Configuration parameters” on page 160 for additional
information.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 159

Installing the Client/Server component

2. Using an existing WSA connection to get a new or updated version: This option assumes that you have
already downloaded and installed a previous version of the WSA and is suitable for use by those with
TCP/IP or APPC connections.
3. Using a manual method: If your workstation does not support FTP, or you do not have an established
connection, it is assumed that you have a means of transferring the ISPF C/S workstation programs
down from the host files to the workstation. Although the ISPF C/S Install Utility does not provide an
automated download procedure for all users, it does provide information that can assist in the
download process.

Required hardware and software

For the hardware and software requirements for ISPF, refer to z/OS Planning for Installation.

Configuration parameters
Before you run the ISPF C/S Install Utility, gather these installation-unique parameters:
IP Address
The TCP/IP address, Internet address, workstation ID, or Internet address alias. Required for
download options 1 (FTP) or 2 (existing WSA connection).
Note: for information about how to obtain your IP Address, see “TCP/IP requirements detail” on page
171.
User ID
This is the FTP user name that must have write access to the directory where the workstation ISPF
Workstation Agent code is to be installed. Required for download option 1 (FTP) only.
Note: The user authorization is granted through an entry in the FTP Daemon access protection file. If
you do not have an entry in this file, you will need to create one. See the TCP/IP documentation for
details on creating a user entry in the FTPD Access Protection file.
Password
Password for the FTP User ID specified. Required for download option 1 (FTP) only.
Directory
The workstation directory where you want the utility to install the programmable workstation
programs. The user must have write access to this directory. Required for all download options.

Downloading the Workstation Agent

This topic provides a step-by-step method for downloading and installing the Workstation Agent for the
first time. For additional information about the ISPF panels used in the process, see the 'Download Data
Set to Workstation Utility (Option 3.7)' section of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.
1. From the Primary Option Menu panel, enter 3.7 (Utilities/Download ISPF Client/Server or Transfer
data set).
2. On the Download Data Set to Workstation panel, enter option 1 (ISPF C/S Download ISPF C/S
component).
3. On the Client/Server Component Download panel, choose your download method.
• 1. FTP (requires workstation FTP server).
Download using FTP. ISPF invokes the host FTP client to connect with the FTP server on your
workstation and transfer the WSA installation program.
• 2. ISPF C/S (requires workstation connection).
Download using ISPF Client/Server. If you already have a workstation agent installed on your
workstation, you can use the built-in file transfer services to download a new WSA installation
program. This process is described in detail in the 'Download Data Set to Workstation Utility (Option
3.7)' section of the z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol II.

160 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Installing the Client/Server component

• 3. Manual.
ISPF tells you the name of the file you need to copy. You can copy it with any method you prefer as
long as you maintain the data integrity of the WSA installation program. For example, you could use
the File Transfer facility in your terminal emulator software. The file must be downloaded as "binary".
4. Specify the type of workstation environment in which you want to use the WSA.
You must indicate which workstation operating system you want the WSA to run in, by typing the
appropriate number in the Workstation Type entry field.
5. In the "Directory to copy file to:" field, specify a directory on your workstation where you want to store
the WSA installation program. You can specify a full path name or a relative directory, or leave this field
blank. If you leave it blank, the download is made to your home directory (in the case of FTP
downloads) or the current directory (in the case of client/server downloads). If you specify a relative
directory (one that does not start with a drive letter or slash character) the directory is relative to the
FTP home directory or the client/server current directory.
6. You can download into an existing directory, or you can have ISPF create the directory you specify on
the panel. If you want ISPF to create the directory on your workstation before copying the WSA
installation program, select the Create directory to which the file is to be copied field.
7. By default, the Data set to copy file from: entry field displays the name of the host data set that
contains the WSA installation program. This field value varies depending on the naming convention
that was used when ISPF was installed. If the WSA installation program has been moved or copied
elsewhere, you can change the name of this data set.
8. Press Enter. The remaining steps will differ according to the download method selected.

File Transfer Protocol (FTP) download

When you select choice 1 FTP (requires workstation FTP server) under Download methods on the ISPF
Client/Server Component Download panel, ISPF displays the ISPF Client/Server Installation Notice panel
shown in Figure 44 on page 162.

Installing the Client/Server component 161

Installing the Client/Server component

Figure 44. ISPF Client/Server Installation Notice (ISPWSD02)

This panel is a reminder to you that certain conditions must be present for you to use the FTP download
method. Aside from the two specific conditions mentioned on the panel, you must also ensure that:
• The path specified in step “5” on page 161 has write access (review your TRUSERS file);
• You have read access to the MVS data set where the ISPF Client/Server Component is stored; and
• The directory where you want to copy the component exists, OR you have selected the Create directory
option on the previous panel.
To complete the download:
1. Press Enter. ISPF displays the panel shown in Figure 45 on page 163.

162 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Installing the Client/Server component

Figure 45. Second Client/Server Component Download Panel (ISPWSD04)

2. Complete the fields on this panel with the appropriate information:
IP Address or Host Name of workstation
The IP address or name of the workstation to which you want to copy the ISPF Workstation Agent
installation program.
User to login
The user name that you want to use at the FTP server. This name is case sensitive and must have
write access to the directory where the ISPF Workstation Agent code will be installed.
Password for login
The password for the user ID you want to use at the FTP server. This field is case sensitive. You can
leave this field blank if the user id is "anonymous", but be aware that most FTP servers expect a
password.
Browse FTP output only if an error occurs
If you do not choose this option, ISPF displays all output from the FTP transfer.
3. Press Enter to process this panel.
If you chose not to override the ISPF default concerning display of FTP output, your screen will now
show that output. Press Enter to proceed to the next download panel.
If you chose to browse the FTP output only if an error occurs, and there is an error, the error
information is displayed. If no error occurred, you proceed to the next download panel.
After a successful FTP download, this panel appears on your screen, telling you to complete the
installation from your workstation:

Installing the Client/Server component 163

Installing the Client/Server component

Figure 46. ISPF Client/Server Component Install Program Panel (ISPWSD07)

Manual download
When you select choice 3 Manual under Download methods on the ISPF Client/Server Component
Download panel, you are choosing to use your own preferred download method. ISPF displays a panel of
instructions necessary for you to do this, as shown in Figure 47 on page 164.

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
─ │ ISPWSD05 Client/Server Component Download │ ────────
I │ │
│ In order to install the ISPF Client/Server Component │
1 │ workstation code you will need to download (Binary) from the │
2 │ MVS data set where the ISPF Client/Server Component install │ set
│ executable resides to a directory on your workstation. │
│ Complete the install by running the install program on your │
│ workstation. The program is a self extracting executable and │
│ will result in files being generated on your workstation. │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ Copy member . : ISPGUINX │
│ │
│ From data set : 'ISP.SISPGUI' │
│ │
│ To file . . . : ispfinst.exe │
│ │
│ │
│ Command ===> │
O │ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward │
│ F8=Forward F9=Swap F12=Cancel │ wap
F ⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 47. Client/Server Component Download Panel (ISPWSD05)

The non-editable fields on this panel are:

164 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Installing the Client/Server component

Copy member
The name of the data set member that contains the appropriate installation executable for the
selected workstation type.
From data set
The name of the MVS data set in which the installation members reside.
To file
The name of the file to be created on the selected workstation type.

Running the installation program

After you have downloaded the Workstation Agent Installation program, resume the installation by
running the program called ISPFINST.EXE (ispfinst on UNIX platforms). This is a self-extracting
executable program that generates additional necessary files on your workstation. Follow this procedure:
1. Go to a command line.
2. Change to the directory to which you downloaded the ISPF Workstation Agent installation program.
(For AIX, use the chmod command to give the file execute permission).
3. Enter ISPFINST.
4. A dialog box called Workstation Agent Install Program is displayed.

Figure 48. Workstation Agent Install Program

A Base Install Directory and a national language (such as English) are displayed in this box. Be sure
this is the Base Install Directory and the national language that you want to use for the installation. If
the directory is incorrect, type in the correct directory name. If the language is incorrect, scroll down
the list of languages and pick the one that is correct.
5. Press Enter or select the Install push button.
6. WSA.EXE, along with several other files, is created in the Base Install Directory that you specified. (For
AIX, the executable file, called wsa, is created.)
7. A final dialog box will appear, instructing you to be sure that the name of the Base Install Directory is
added to your PATH environment variable). Select OK to close the dialog box.
8. If the Workstation Agent Install Program dialog box still appears on your screen, select Quit to remove
it from your display.

Installing the Client/Server component 165

Installing the Client/Server component

The Workstation Agent window

The Workstation Agent (WSA) window is displayed when you have prepared your workstation to make a
connection to the host, by downloading and executing the workstation portion of the Client/Server
software.

Figure 49. The Workstation Agent window

The functions available from the Options pull-down menu on the Workstation Agent window are:
Information
Displays the ISPF WSA Information dialog window. The Information dialog shows you the number of
active sessions. Each active session represents a connection between the ISPF Client/Server
workstation agent and an ISPF host. The dialog also indicates which communications interfaces (such
as TCP/IP or APPC) have been initialized on the workstation, and the TCP/IP Port Number, or APPC
Transaction Program (TP) Name. Additionally, the WINSOCK Path, if required, is shown in this dialog.
The WINSOCK Path is applicable to Windows environments only.
Enable TCP/IP
This selection toggles between active and inactive when you click it. The change does not take affect
until you restart the Workstation agent.
Enable APPC
This selection toggles between active and inactive when you click it. The change does not take affect
until you restart the Workstation agent.
Set TCP/IP Port
Displays the Workstation Agent Configuration dialog. The Configuration dialog enables you to change
the TCP/IP port number. From a TCP/IP perspective, the port number represents the Workstation
Agent. If a port number is not specified in the Configuration dialog, the default Workstation Agent port
number (see note) is used.
If you specify a port number, the change takes effect after the Workstation Agent is closed and
restarted. The change remains in effect for subsequent invocations of the Workstation Agent. If you
later decide to change back to the Workstation Agent default port number (see note), delete the port
number in the Configuration dialog and restart the Workstation Agent.
If you change the port number, you must also change the port number specified in the ISPF GUI
initialization.
Note: The default port number is 15339.
Set SNA TP Name
Displays the Workstation Agent Configuration dialog. The Configuration dialog enables you to change
the SNA Transaction Program name. From an SNA APPC perspective, the TP name represents the
ISPF Client/Server Workstation Agent.
If specified, the name is used to construct the names of the two transaction programs required to
support an ISPF Client/Server connection. The ISPF Client/Server function appends different single
letters to the supplied name to form the actual names of the two APPC transaction programs. The
letter S is appended to the name selected to indicate the send conversation TP name used on the
workstation and host. The letter R is appended to the name to indicate the receive conversation TP
name.

166 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Installing the Client/Server component

This option is available if your workstation operating system is Windows APPC. For all other operating
systems this option is disabled.
If a TP name is not specified in the Configuration dialog, the default ISPF Client/Server TP name is
used. If you specify a TP name, the change takes effect after the ISPF Workstation Agent is closed and
restarted. The change remains in effect for subsequent invocations of the ISPF Workstation Agent. If
you later decide to change back to the ISPF Client/Server default TP name, delete the TP name in the
Configuration dialog and restart the ISPF Workstation Agent.
If you change the TP name, you must also change the TP name specified in the ISPF GUI initialization.
Set WINSOCK Path
This option enables you to specify an explicit path to the socket DLL used by the active TCP/IP
subsystem in a Microsoft Windows workstation environment. The specification of an explicit path
overrides the default DLL search order for Windows.
For example, if the desired DLL is located in directory D:\TCPDOS\BIN then the path would be
specified as follows:

D:\TCPDOS\BIN

The setting takes effect after the ISPF Client/Server workstation agent is closed and restarted. The
setting remains in effect for subsequent invocations of the ISPF workstation agent.
This option is only available in a Microsoft Windows environment. For other operating systems this
option is disabled.
Set Font
This option enables you to specify the font of your connection through the Workstation Agent window.
When you choose "Set font" from the Options pull-down, the Font dialog window appears. Choose
from one of the available fonts and sizes that appear in the list. The list of fonts shows the fonts that
are registered with your operating system. The change takes place after you re-start the agent, and
affects all text in the interface windows except the menu bar and title bar text.
Because the layout of the data in a workstation panel is based on row and column positions, you
should use a non-proportional (that is, fixed width or monospaced) font. Using a non-proportional font
ensures that the data within the panels lines up correctly. If you use a proportional font, data within
columns might not align correctly.
Note: If you are using an AIX platform, you can change the font of the Workstation Agent by entering
this in your .Xdefaults file:

DtProcess*dtFont: <font name>

For example:

DtProcess*dtFont: fixed

gives you a fixed font for the Workstation Agent application. However, this setting is overridden when
you use the Set Font option on the Workstation Agent window.
System Register
This option enables you to bypass the Workstation Agent connection panel when you make a client/
server connection. Choosing this function on the Options pull-down on the Workstation Agent window
displays the System Register panel.

The System Register panel

Figure 50 on page 168 shows the System Register panel, which is displayed when you select System
Register from the Options pull-down on the Workstation Agent panel. The main panel is divided into four
parts.

Installing the Client/Server component 167

Installing the Client/Server component

Figure 50. System Register Panel

The Systems section of the panel is where you name the system you want to connect from. Click the Add
pushbutton to add a new entry to the systems list. A pop-up dialog box like the one shown in Figure 51 on
page 168 appears.

Figure 51. Add System Pop-up Dialog

There are entry fields for the system name and an IP or SNA address. If you do not know the system
address, you can get it from the WSA connection panel. Until you set up the system register to bypass that
panel, it will show you the address of the system that you are connecting from. Simply make your client/
server connection, and before accepting the connection, note the address of the system.
After filling in the appropriate information, click OK. After you finish your session with the System Register
panel, this system will be available to the users you select without it being necessary for them to see the
Workstation Agent connection panel.
You can update or delete system information in the same area of this panel. To update a system, first
highlight it in the list by clicking on it. Then click the Update pushbutton. A Change System pop-up dialog
box, similar to the Add System window, appears on your screen with the system name and its IP or SNA
address already filled in. Modify the information, then click OK.

168 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Installing the Client/Server component

To delete a system from the System Register files, first highlight the desired system in the list by clicking
on it. Then, click the Delete pushbutton. The system and any user IDs associated with it in the System
Register files are deleted.
The Connections part of the panel enables you to define how to set the connections that you want to
make. The Connections choices are:
No Auto Connect
Selecting this choice means that no one connecting to the Workstation Agent can bypass the WSA
connection panel for the specified system. In other words, everyone connecting to the WSA must use
the connection panel to accept the connection from that system before continuing.
Auto Connect All
Everyone connecting to the WSA from the specified system will bypass the connection panel.
Auto Connect List
Selecting this choice activates the User IDs section of the System Register panel. When you make this
selection, you must enter the ID of at least one user you want to be able to bypass the WSA
connection panel when connecting from the specified system. Enter user IDs by clicking on the Add
button in the User IDs section of the panel. A pop-up dialog like the one shown here is displayed.

Figure 52. Add User Pop-up Dialog

Enter the user ID of each user you want to automatically connect from the highlighted system. If you
are entering only one user ID at this time, click OK to update the list and return to the System Register
panel. If you are entering a list of IDs, click Apply after each entry, then click OK after the last one. As
you enter IDs, they are added to the list appearing in this section of the System Register panel.
To delete IDs from the list, highlight the line in the list, then click on the Delete button located next
to the list.
The System Information section of the System Register panel shows the name of the system highlighted
in the Systems section of the panel, and its IP or SNA address. This is the system that you are currently
working with on the System Register panel. You cannot change the information in the System Information
section.
When you are finished working with the System Register panel, you can dismiss it by clicking the OK
button at the bottom of the panel. During long sessions where you are making many entries, it is
recommended that you occasionally click Apply to save your entries.

Installing the Client/Server component 169

Installing the Client/Server component

170 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

Appendix B. Configuring communications for the
ISPF Client/Server

Either a TCP/IP or an SNA APPC connection must be enabled to support ISPF Client/Server (C/S)
communication between an MVS host and a workstation. Subsequent topics describe what must be
configured at the host and at a workstation for both TCP/IP and SNA APPC connections. Configuration of
3270 terminal type connections that support user logon to MVS TSO is not described here. A configuration
fast path is provided at the beginning of the discussion of each type of connection.
Although a few elements of ISPF C/S configuration must be coordinated between a workstation and the
MVS host, ISPF users will generally be more concerned with workstation requirements. MVS system or
network support personnel will generally be more concerned with MVS host requirements.
Note: All necessary TCP/IP or APPC communications software must be initialized fully before starting the
ISPF Workstation Agent component. The WSA does not attempt to initialize the communications protocol
again after it receives the first initialization error.

Configuring TCP/IP connections

The table shown in “TCP/IP requirements fast path” on page 171 provides a fast path for configuring
TCP/IP communications to support ISPF C/S.

TCP/IP requirements fast path

Table 24. TCP/IP workstation and host requirements

Workstation MVS host
A numeric internet address must be The numeric internet address defined for TCP/IP on the
defined for TCP/IP on the workstation workstation must be specified on the ISPSTART command or
(such as, 9.67.224.96). from the GUI settings panel to invoke ISPF WSA.
No workstation requirement matching It must be possible for ISPF to locate the TCP/IP configuration
this host requirement ► data set containing the TCP/IP started task name. See z/OS
Communications Server: IP Configuration Guide for a description
of the search order for the TCP/IP configuration data set.

TCP/IP requirements detail

An internet address is the 32-bit address assigned to a TCP/IP host and usually represented in dotted
decimal form. For example: 9.67.224.96. The address identifies both a physical network within the
internet and an individual host within that network.
A TCP/IP host can be an MVS system or a Windows or UNIX workstation. To configure ISPF C/S
communications you need to know the dotted decimal internet address associated with the workstation
on which the ISPF WSA graphical user interface is to be displayed. In many enterprises the workstation
internet address is obtained from a network administrator and assigned to the workstation during
installation and customization of the TCP/IP workstation software. For information about installing and
customizing the TCP/IP software used on your workstation, consult the documentation supplied by your
TCP/IP software vendor. If you have already installed TCP/IP on your workstation and you do not know
your TCP/IP internet address, but you do know your TCP/IP workstation host name (such as JSMITH,
ACCT23), you can determine the internet address as follows:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 171

 Table 25. Determining the Internet address
If you have this TCP/IP
workstation software do this on the workstation

• Windows TCP/IP From a Windows command prompt enter ipconfig (or winipcfg in
some systems). The numeric internet address of the workstation should
display in the IP Configuration panel.

• AIX TCP/IP From the AIX command prompt enter host <hostname>. The numeric
internet address of the workstation identified by <hostname> should
appear in the reply.

UNIX users might need to specify a unique port on the workstation to be used for communication, in
addition to the internet address. This is necessary because multiple ISPF WSA components can run on
any one UNIX workstation at the same time. The port is specified by appending :<port#> to the end of the
internet address. By default, all of the TCP/IP protocols are defined in the /etc/services file. This file can
be viewed so you can choose a port that is not currently reserved by another application. Ports 0 through
1024 are reserved for system use. The port number must also be specified in the ISPF WSA graphical user
interface. Do this through the Options pull-down menu, Set TCP/IP Port choice. The port number specified
on the host must be the same as the port entered in the ISPF WSA graphical user interface.
The ISPF C/S component uses the C-socket interface for TCP/IP communications and supports z/OS
Communications Server: IP. ISPF C/S does not support IPV6 connections.
See z/OS Communications Server: IP Configuration Guide for a description of how the TCP/IP started task
procedure name is resolved from the TCPIPJOBNAME statement in the TCPIP.DATA configuration data
set.

TCP/IP additional tips

The ISPF Workstation Agent is not linked with the application programming interface (API) modules
provided by any specific communications software vendor.
The default behavior for accessing a TCP/IP subsystem in Microsoft Windows environments is for the ISPF
WSA to try to locate WINSOCK.DLL. In the Microsoft Windows environment, many different vendors
supply a winsock.dll so it is critical that the first winsock.dll located by the ISPF WSA contains the TCP/IP
API modules actually used by the active TCP/IP subsystem on the workstation. The difficulty of managing
multiple winsock.dll files in a given workstation environment is compounded by the fact that the search
order used by Windows to locate a dynamic link library is not constrained by something equivalent to the
CONFIG.SYS LIBPATH statement in OS/2. The Windows search order is as follows:
1. current directory
2. WINDOWS directory
3. WINDOWS\SYSTEM directory
4. directory containing the executable file for the current task
5. directories listed in the PATH environment variable
6. list of directories mapped in a network
If the dynamic link library cannot be located or if the TCP/IP API modules cannot be loaded successfully
from the selected library then TCP/IP communication will be inoperative.
You can specify an explicit path to the socket DLL used by the active TCP/IP subsystem in a Microsoft
Windows workstation environment. Specifying an explicit path overrides the default DLL search order for
Windows. The directory defined by the explicit path is searched for WINSOCK.DLL. The explicit path to the
TCP/IP socket DLL is specified by using the Set WINSOCK Path function available from the Options pull-
down found on the Client/Server Agent Window (see “The Workstation Agent window” on page 166). This
function is useful in environments such as those using LAN operating systems, in which the directories
containing software from several TCP/IP vendors can be accessed by a workstation.

172 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 The Client/Server feature of ISPF (ISPF WSA) takes advantage of the TCP/IP keepalive socket option to
enable ISPF on the host to detect an abnormal end to a session with the ISPF Workstation Agent on the
workstation. Abnormal endings include such events as powering off or rebooting the workstation before
closing the session with the ISPF WSA agent. The behavior of the keepalive facility differs for each
workstation platform and TCP/IP product supported by ISPF:
Workstation Platform
Keepalive behavior
Windows
Reboot (CTRL-ALT-DELETE), power off, and Program Manager close are detected.
AIX
Reboot, power off, and shutdown of an AIX host are detected. Reboot (CTRL-ALT-BACKSPACE) of an
X-station client is detected, but power off of an X-station client is detected only when the X-station is
powered on again.
If no transmissions have been received over a socket connection to the workstation during the specified
timer interval, TCP/IP sends a keepalive packet to the workstation. If there is no response on the socket
connection or if the socket connection has been reset, an error is returned and the ISPF C/S session ends
on MVS.
The keepalive timer value for z/OS Communications Server: IP is controlled by the KEEPALIVEOPTIONS
statement in the TCP/IP configuration data set. The INTERVAL parameter specifies the number of minutes
that TCP/IP waits after the last transmission from the workstation before sending a keepalive packet. The
SENDGARBAGE parameter specifies whether the packet contains any data. ISPF C/S was tested with the
INTERVAL value set to 1 and the SENDGARBAGE value set to TRUE.

Enabling the z/OS Communications Server: IP interface

The TCP/IP started task must be active for you to use ISPF Client/Server.
The TSO/ISPF userid must be authorized to use z/OS UNIX services. Failure to obtain proper authorization
will result in message ISPPO22 when an ISPF Client/Server connection is attempted. The "network data"
portion of this message will show a TCP/IP socket error code of 156 (EMVSINITIAL).
Authorization status for basic z/OS UNIX services can be determined by entering the OMVS command from
the TSO READY prompt. This example indicates that the TSO user is not authorized to use z/OS UNIX
services:

READY
omvs
FSUM2057I No session was started. This TSO/E user ID does not have
access to OpenMVS.+
READY

It is not necessary to run the z/OS UNIX shell to use the z/OS UNIX socket implementation with ISPF.

Understanding socket TCP/IP error codes

ISPF returns a TCP/IP error code in the "network data" portion of ISPF messages indicating a TCP/IP
communication failure. The TCP/IP error codes returned for failing socket calls are documented in z/OS
Communications Server: IP Sockets Application Programming Interface Guide and Reference.

Configuring APPC connections

The table shown in “APPC requirements fast path” on page 173 provides a fast path for configuring APPC
communications to support ISPF C/S.

APPC requirements fast path

Configuring communications for the ISPF Client/Server 173

 Table 26. APPC workstation and host requirements
Workstation MVS host
A fully qualified network name must The fully qualified network name defined for an SNA-
be defined for an SNA-independent independent LU type 6.2 on the workstation must be included in
LU type 6.2 on the workstation (for an MVS VTAM® definition for the workstation node and must be
example, USIBMNR.NRI41G00). specified on the ISPSTART command or from the GUI settings
panel to invoke ISPF WSA.
No workstation requirement matching Either a NOSCHED LU defined with the BASE option or a LU
this host requirement ► defined with the BASE and SCHED(ASCH) options in the MVS
parmlib member APPCPMxx is required to support outbound
conversation requests from ISPF to the workstation.
No workstation requirement matching A VTAM application LU must be defined such that the label of the
this host requirement ► APPL definition statement and its ACBNAME parameter value
match the ACBNAME of the APPC LU defined in MVS parmlib
member APPCPMxx.
The mode #INTER must be defined The mode #INTER must be defined as an entry in a MVS VTAM
on the workstation. mode table associated with the VTAM definition of the
workstation node.
No workstation requirement matching The SYS1.CSSLIB data set containing the APPC callable system
this host requirement ► services modules must be accessible by ISPF.

APPC requirements detail

A fully qualified SNA network name is an identifier up to 17 bytes in length assigned to a SNA logical unit
(LU) and represented as two symbols, each up to 8 bytes in length, separated by a period. For example:

USIBMNR.NRI41G00

The symbol preceding the period specifies the name of an SNA network and the symbol following the
period specifies the name of an LU within that network. For ISPF C/S communications you need to know
the fully qualified network name of an independent SNA LU type 6.2 associated with the workstation on
which the ISPF WSA graphical user interface is to be displayed. The LU type 6.2 is required by the SNA
communications software to support APPC connections to the workstation. for information about
installation and customization of the SNA APPC software used on your workstation consult the
documentation supplied by your software vendor. If you have already installed SNA APPC
communications software on your workstation and you do not know the fully qualified network name of an
independent SNA LU type 6.2 you can identify a candidate name as follows:

Table 27. Identifying a candidate name

If you have this SNA APPC
workstation software do this on the workstation

• IBM APPC Networking Services From the "IBM APPC Networking Services" program group select the
for Windows 1.00.02 (base icon for the Configure program item. Select the Step 1 pushbutton
product with CSD #2). from the Networking Services Configuration window. The fully
qualified local LU name for APPC communications will appear in the
General Configuration window.

The fully qualified name of the independent LU selected for the ISPF WSA connection on the workstation
must also be identified to VTAM on the MVS system on which the ISPF C/S host agent will be invoked. The
workstation independent LU can be identified to VTAM by one of these methods:
• by dynamic definition by VTAM during session establishment

174 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 • by CDRSC definition statements
• by standard LU definition statements with LOCADDR=0 coded
The VTAM Network Implementation Guide and the VTAM Resource Definition Reference provide details on
each method.
An LU definition must also be associated with the ISPF C/S agent on the MVS host to enable the
connection to an ISPF WSA agent on a workstation. This LU must be made available to ISPF C/S by an
APPC/MVS definition of a base LU to handle outbound connection requests from MVS to the workstation.
The LU can be defined in one of two ways in the APPCPMxx member of the MVS parmlib data set by using
a LUADD statement that includes one of these combinations of parameters:
• The NOSCHED and BASE parameters
• The SCHED(ASCH) and BASE parameters
If neither LU option is defined outbound session requests from the ISPF C/S agent on the MVS host will be
rejected.
A VTAM application LU must be defined in VTAMLST to match the definition in APPCPMxx. Both the label
of the APPL statement and the ACBNAME= parameter value must be identical to the value specified for
the ACBNAME parameter on the LUADD statement for the APPC/MVS LU defined in MVS parmlib member
APPCPMxx.
A logical connection called a session must exist between the LU associated with the ISPF C/S agent on the
MVS host and the LU associated with the ISPF WSA agent on the workstation to support APPC
communication. To establish a session the LU on the MVS host must send a set of session control
parameters called a bind to the LU on the workstation. The parameters are selected based on a mode
definition. The ISPF C/S agent on MVS uses the #INTER definition, which is located in the IBM-supplied
default VTAM mode table ISTINCLM. The #INTER mode definition is also included among the default
definitions supplied by the supported APPC communications software for workstations.
The VTAM node definition for the independent LU used by APPC Networking services for Windows cannot
be the same VTAM node definition used for your native or emulated 3270 terminal support. A single node
definition cannot be shared by APPC Networking Services for Windows and your 3270 terminal support.
Likewise, if you are using a 3270 emulator on the Windows system on which you intend to use APPC
Networking Services for Windows you must ensure that different local SNA service access point (SAP)
addresses are used by the 3270 emulator and by APPC Networking Services for Windows.
To change the local SAP address for APPC Networking Services for Windows, select the icon for the
Configure program item from the IBM APPC Networking Services program group. Select the Step 2
pushbutton from the Networking Services Configuration window, then select Advanced from the LAN
Configuration window. The local SAP can be changed on the Advanced LAN Configuration window.

APPC additional tips

To activate APPC Networking Services for Windows and Personal Communications/3270 in any order in
that environment it was necessary to increase the values of the MINSAP and MINLINK parameters for the
IEEE 802.2 protocol driver for NDIS in the CONFIG.SYS file as follows:

DEVICEHIGH = C:\LSP\DXME0MOD.SYS N ,,,2,2

where C:\LSP specifies the LAN Support Program directory in which the IEEE 802.2 protocol driver
(DXME0MOD.SYS) was installed.
The final two positional parameters specify the minimum service access point and minimum link station
values required to support activation of an independent LU 6.2 for APPC Networking Services for Windows
and activation of a dependent LU 2 for Personal Communications/3270. If additional LUs are required, for
example to support additional dependent LU 2 connections, the minimum service access point and
minimum link station values might need to be increased.
Configuration of network support for SNA APPC communications is somewhat more complex than
configuration for TCP/IP owing largely to the transition that SNA has made from an essentially static
hierarchical networking model to a dynamic peer-to-peer networking model. Recognizing the difficulty

Configuring communications for the ISPF Client/Server 175

 that this transition presents to customers trying to configure APPC application support and APPN network
support, networking specialists at IBM have produced the Multi-platform APPC Configuration Guide
(GG24-4485). This guide is a valuable aid for anyone who wants to understand how to configure APPC
and APPN communications in any of the environments in which the ISPF C/S capability can be enabled. It
is available from IBM Redbooks (www.ibm.com/redbooks).
One way to simplify APPC configuration is to use the fully qualified network name of the SNA control point
defined for your workstation as the independent SNA LU type 6.2 that will support ISPF C/S connections.
The control point for your workstation represents various subsystem functions associated with your
communications software. The fully qualified network name for the control point can be used not only to
identify that set of subsystem capabilities but also to support applications such as the ISPF workstation
agent that use an independent SNA LU type 6.2. If you do not know, or cannot remember, the fully
qualified name associated with your workstation control point you can determine the name as follows:

Table 28. Determining the full qualified name

If you have this SNA APPC
workstation software do this on the workstation

• IBM APPC Networking Services for From the "IBM APPC Networking Services" program group select
Windows 1.00.02 (base product the icon for the Configure program item. Select the Step 1
with CSD #2). pushbutton from the Networking Services Configuration window.
The fully qualified local LU name for APPC communications will
appear in the General Configuration window.

176 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Source and index listings

Appendix C. Listing formats

This topic describes and displays the kinds of listings you can produce using ISPF. The sample listings
shown are for illustration purposes only. They are not intended to be exact replicas, because printouts of
ISPF listings vary according to the kind of printer you are using.

Source and index listings

If autolist mode is on, the ISPF editor automatically generates a source listing when you finish editing.
You can also get source listings and index listings by using these utility options:
Library (3.1)
P - Print member
Move/Copy (3.3)
CP - Copy and print
MP - Move and print
Data Set List (3.4)
P - Print data set list
PV - Print VTOC entries
Hardcopy (3.6)
PK - Print and keep data set
PD - Print and delete data set
Outlist (3.8)
P - Print job output

Source listings
Figure 53 on page 177 shows a sample source listing.

Figure 53. Sample Source Listing

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 177

Source and index listings

Information at the top of the page includes project, group, type, and member name, current version and
modification level, user ID, date and time that the listing was produced, and page number.
A column-positioning line is printed following the heading and preceding the actual data. The start column
is printed to the left of each line, indicating the position of the first character in each line that is not a
blank.
For ISPF library members with statistics, asterisks are either printed or not printed to the right of each line
according to the setting of the modification flag, as follows:
• If the modification flag (columns 79-80) in the line is 00, no asterisks are printed.
• If the modification flag is nonzero but differs from the current modification level of the member, a single
asterisk (*) is printed.
• If the modification flag is nonzero and has the same value as the current modification level of the
member, two asterisks (**) are printed.
The asterisks allow you to scan the listing quickly for lines that were added or changed since the version
was created (*) and for lines that were added or changed during the last update (**).

Index listings
ISPF provides index listings at your request through the X (Print index listing) option of the Library utility
(3.1), or the X or PX options of the Data Set List utility (3.4).

Index listings for source libraries

Figure 54 on page 178 shows a sample index listing for an ISPF library.

Figure 54. Sample Index Listing - Managed Source Library

The sample index listing shown here is for a source library that is managed by the Storage Management
Subsystem.
Note: This index listing format is available only when DFSMSdfp is installed and available, and when
Storage Management Subsystem is active.
The heading information includes:

178 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Source and index listings

• Project, group (library), and type

• Date and time the listing was produced
• Page number.
This is followed by general information about the data set, including current space allocation and
utilization. The only differences between this index listing and one for a non-managed source library are:
• Management, storage, and data classes are shown under the GENERAL DATA heading.
• The 1st extent size, secondary quantity, current allocation, and current utilization sizes can be shown in
bytes, kilobytes, or megabytes, in addition to tracks, blocks, or cylinders.
The 1st extent quantity, secondary quantity, current allocation, and current utilization sizes are shown in
tracks for data sets that are allocated in bytes, kilobytes, or megabytes on a non-managed volume.
Following this, the member name and statistics are printed for each member in the data set, arranged in
alphabetical order. For sequential data sets, the index listing contains only the general information.

Index listings for load libraries

An index listing for an OBJ library is similar to an index listing for a source library, except that no statistics
are maintained. A sample index listing for a LOAD library that is managed by the Storage Management
Subsystem is shown in Figure 55 on page 179.
Note: This index listing format is available only when DFSMSdfp is installed and available, and when
Storage Management Subsystem is active.
Here, the module attributes are printed to the right of each member name.

Figure 55. Sample Index Listing - Managed Load Library

Listing formats 179

ISPF Log Listings

The only differences between this index listing and one for a non-managed LOAD library are:
• Management, storage, and data classes are shown under the GENERAL DATA heading.
• The 1st extent size, secondary quantity, current allocation, and current utilization sizes can be shown in
bytes, kilobytes, or megabytes, in addition to tracks, blocks, or cylinders.
As in the source library index listing, the 1st extent quantity, secondary quantity, current allocation, and
current utilization sizes are shown in tracks for data sets that are allocated in bytes, kilobytes, or
megabytes on a non-managed volume.

ISPF log listings

Figure 56 on page 180 shows a sample ISPF log listing. The log contains a message for each significant
user action, such as saving edited data, moving members from one data set to another, or submitting a
batch job.

Figure 56. Sample ISPF Log Listing

Member list listings

This topic shows samples of member list listings created by the SAVE command. With this command, you
can create listings for both source and load libraries.
The sample listings show the format used when you do not specify a list ID.

Member list listings for source libraries

Figure 57 on page 181 shows a sample member list listing for a source library. These listings contain the
relative block address of each member, shown in hexadecimal format, and other characteristics when
available.

180 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Member List Listings

Figure 57. Sample Member List Listing for a Source Library

Member list listings for load libraries

Figure 58 on page 181 shows a sample member list listing for a source library. These listings contain the
size of each load module, shown in hexadecimal format, and other characteristics when available.

Figure 58. Sample Member List Listing for a Load Library

Listing formats 181

Data Set List Listings

Formats for member list listings

Shown here is the format used by the SAVE command to create a member list listing for a source library.
The members of a source library have formatted records (RECFM≠U).

Table 29. Format of Source Library Member List Listing

Starting Column Length in Characters Description
4 8 Member name
19 6 Relative block address in hexadecimal format
25 2 Version number
28 2 Modification level
31 8 Creation date
40 8 Date last modified
49 5 Time last modified
55 5 Current number of lines
61 5 Initial number of lines
67 5 Number of modified lines
73 7 User ID

Shown here is the format used by the SAVE command to create a member list listing for a load library. The
members of a load library have unformatted records (RECFM=U).

Table 30. Format of Load Library Member List Listing

Starting Column Length in Characters Description
4 8 Member name
24 6 Load module size in hexadecimal format
33 6 Load module relative block address in hexadecimal
format
40 8 Alias
49 2 Authorization code
53 3 Addressing mode
56 3 Residency mode
61 18 Load module attributes

Data set list listings

The sample listing in Figure 59 on page 183 shows the format used when you do not specify a data set list
ID.

182 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Data Set List Listings

Figure 59. Sample Data Set List Listing

Format for data set list listings

Table 31 on page 183 shows the format of the data set list written by the SAVE command when a data set
list ID is specified.

Table 31. Format of Data Set List Listing

Starting Column Length in Characters Description
1 44 Data set name
46 7 Volume and volume indicator
53 4 Data set organization
58 5 Data set record format
64 5 Data set logical record length
70 5 Data set block size
76 6 Data set size in tracks
83 3 Percentage of used tracks or pages (PDSE)
87 3 Number of extents used
91 8 Device type
100 10 Creation date
111 10 Expiration date
122 10 Last reference date

Listing formats 183

Data Set List Listings

184 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 APL and TEXT character conversion

Appendix D. APL and TEXT character conversion

You can use APL keyboards for all models of 3270 terminals, and TEXT keyboards for 3278 and 3279
terminals with ISPF. Figure 60 on page 185 and Figure 61 on page 186 show that the 2-byte transmission
codes for APL and TEXT characters are converted by ISPF into 1-byte codes for internal storage.

Figure 60. Internal Character Representations for APL Keyboards

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 185

APL and TEXT character conversion

Figure 61. Internal Character Representations for Text Keyboards

186 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Command and Field Value Abbreviations

Appendix E. Abbreviations for commands and other

values

The list shown in “Command abbreviations” on page 187 includes the commands, field values, keywords/
operands, and scroll amounts that can be abbreviated, followed by the allowable abbreviations. To
improve readability, avoid using abbreviations in edit macros.

Command abbreviations
BACK B
BROWSE BRO
CANCEL CAN
COLUMNS COLS COL
CONFIRM CON C

DISPLAY DISPL DISP DIS

FIND F
INDEX I
LOCATE LOC L
RESUME RES

SELECT SEL S
SHOWCMD SHOW
SKIP S
TOP T
UP U

Field value abbreviations

%USED %
AFTER AFT A
ALIAS-OF ALIAS
ATTRIBUTES ATTR
BEFORE BEF B

BLOCK BLKS
BOTTOM BOT B
CHANGED CHA CHG C
CREATED CRE
CYLINDER CYLS

DEVICE DEV
EXPIRES EXP
GET G
MESSAGE MES
NO N

PUT P
REFERRED REF
TOP T 0
TRACK TRKS
VOLUME VOL
YES Y

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 187

Keyword/Operand Abbreviations

Keyword/Operand, Scroll Amount, and Programming Language

Abbreviations
CHANGE CHA CHG C
CHARS CHAR
COBOL COB
DISPLAY DISPL DIS

ERROR ERR
LABELS LABEL LAB
PREFIX PRE
SPECIAL SPE

STANDARD STD
SUFFIX SUF
VERTICAL VERT
VOLUME VOL

Scroll amount abbreviations

CUR CSR C
DATA D
HALF H
MAX M
PAGE P

Programming language abbreviations

ASSEMBLER ASSEMBLE ASSEM ASM
COBOL COB
FORTRAN FORT FOR FTN
PASCAL PAS
PLI PLIOPT PL1
SCRIPT SCR TEXT

188 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 SYSIN data set

Appendix F. Allocation data sets

ISPF issues ALLOC commands based on the ISPF libraries, data set names, list IDs, options, and
additional input libraries you enter on the Foreground Assembler H and Foreground VS COBOL II Compile
panels. All allocations are done before Assembler H and the VS COBOL II compiler are called.
Because Assembler H and VS COBOL II do not provide a language prompter, ISPF allocates the required
data sets for you. Subsequent topics describe the data sets ISPF allocates when you use Assembler H or
the VS COBOL II compiler.

SYSIN data set

The SYSIN data set is the main input into Assembler H and VS COBOL II. It contains the ISPF libraries or
other partitioned or sequential data sets that you enter on the Foreground Assembler H and VS COBOL II
Compile panels. This data set is used to find the member that contains the program to be assembled or
compiled. For a PDS, the ALLOC command would be:

ALLOC FI(SYSIN) DA('proj.lib.type(mem)')

For a sequential data set, the ALLOC command would be:

ALLOC FI(SYSIN) DA('proj.lib.type')

In both commands, lib is the library in which the member or data set was found.

SYSLIB data set

The SYSLIB data set contains the ISPF library concatenation sequence used to resolve any copy
statements specified in your program. It contains the ISPF libraries or other partitioned or sequential data
sets and the additional input libraries you specify on the Foreground Assembler H and VS COBOL II
Compile panels. For example:

ALLOC FI(SYSLIB) DA('SYS1.MACLIB','proj.lib1.type',...,

'proj.lib4.type','additional lib1','additional lib2')

SYSPRINT data set

The SYSPRINT data set contains the generated output listing. The entry in the List ID field determines the
destination of the output listing. If you enter a name in the List ID field, the output listing is stored in a
sequential data set:

ALLOC FI(SYSPRINT) DA('prefix.listid.LIST')

where listid is the name entered in the List ID field. However, if you leave the List ID field blank, ISPF
uses the name of the member being assembled or compiled instead of the list ID:

ALLOC FI(SYSPRINT) DA('prefix.member.LIST')

If you enter an asterisk (*) in the List ID field, ISPF displays the output listing at your terminal, using this
command:

ALLOC FI(SYSPRINT) DA(*)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 189

SYSTERM, SYSLIN, SYSPUNCH, and SYSUT1 Data Sets

See the information about list data sets in the Foreground (Option 4) topic in the z/OS ISPF User's Guide
Vol II for more information.

SYSTERM data set

The SYSTERM data set contains a summary of the information in the listing data set (SYSPRINT). It is
displayed at the terminal if the TERM option is used:

ALLOC FI(SYSTERM) DA(*)

SYSLIN data set

The SYSLIN data set must be preallocated before running Foreground (option 4) or Batch (option 5). The
SYSLIN data set contains the object module. This object module will be the input when you link-edit. For a
PDS, the ALLOC command would be:

ALLOC FI(SYSLIN) DA('proj.lib1.OBJ(mem)')

For a sequential data set, the ALLOC command would be:

ALLOC FI(SYSLIN) DA('proj.lib1.OBJ')

SYSPUNCH data set

The SYSPUNCH data set is the same as the SYSLIN data set. ISPF does not use this data set. The DUMMY
parameter on the ALLOC statement means it should not be used:

ALLOC FI(SYSPUNCH) DUMMY

SYSUT1 data set

The SYSUT1 data set is a temporary utility data set used during processing. It is deleted after it is used.
For Assembler H, the format is:

ALLOC FI(SYSUT1) UNIT(SYSDA) NEW DELETE

For VS COBOL II, the format is:

ALLOC FI(SYSUT1) UNIT(SYSDA) NEW DELETE SPACE(1,1) CYLINDER

SYSUT2 to SYSUT7 data sets

The SYSUT2, SYSUT3, …, SYSUT7 data sets are temporary utility data sets used by VS COBOL II only
during processing. They are deleted after they are used:

ALLOC FI(SYSUT2) UNIT(SYSDA) NEW DELETE SPACE(1,1) CYLINDER

ALLOC FI(SYSUT3) UNIT(SYSDA) NEW DELETE SPACE(1,1) CYLINDER
ALLOC FI(SYSUT4) UNIT(SYSDA) NEW DELETE SPACE(1,1) CYLINDER
ALLOC FI(SYSUT5) UNIT(SYSDA) NEW DELETE SPACE(1,1) CYLINDER
ALLOC FI(SYSUT6) UNIT(SYSDA) NEW DELETE SPACE(1,1) CYLINDER
ALLOC FI(SYSUT7) UNIT(SYSDA) NEW DELETE SPACE(1,1) CYLINDER

Note: SYSUT6 and SYSUT7 are required only if VS COBOL II Version 1, Release 3 is being used.

190 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

Appendix G. ISRDDN diagnostic utility

ISRDDN is a utility that assists IBM support in evaluating and solving problems. It provides a list of
allocated ddnames, a list of system ENQs, a list of data sets causing system ENQ contention, and a means
of viewing storage within a TSO user's address space. ISRDDN also provides some facilities for gathering
information about your system environment.
You can start ISRDDN by issuing the commands TSO ISRDDN or DDLIST from any ISPF command line.
The allocated ddname list shows you all of the ddnames allocated to your TSO session. From the list you
can perform functions such as Edit or Compress against individual data sets, ddnames, or sets of
ddnames. You can also perform actions against the entire list of displayed ddnames.
The ENQ list, available by typing ENQ on the allocation list command line, shows you ENQs on your
system. You can limit the size of the list by specifying the QNAME, RNAME, job, user or address space
name, and system name.
The ENQ contention list, available by typing CON on the allocation list command line, shows you ENQ
contentions on your system for data sets (QNAME SYSDSN).
You can Browse storage using the BROWSE primary command from the allocation list. You can only
browse storage which an unauthorized program can see (private and common).
ISRDDN can be used to manipulate the data sets that are allocated, but it also provides the ability to
answer questions like:
• Where did a module the user has loaded come from?
• What data sets contain a specific member?
• Are the I/O errors and ABENDs the user is getting due to mixed record format allocations?
• Who is currently allocated to "SYS1.BRODCAST"?
• What member names or LPA load modules are duplicated in the user's current allocations?
• How many members are in the allocated libraries and which libraries are empty?
• Is the user running ISPF out of LPA or from STEPLIB?
To invoke the ISRDDN program, type TSO ISRDDN on any ISPF command line.

The Current Data Set Allocations list

When you start ISRDDN, the Current Data Set Allocations list displays, as shown in Figure 62 on page 192.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 191

 Current Data Set Allocations Row 1 of 197

Volume Disposition Act DDname Data Set Name Actions: B E V M F C I Q

D$SY01 SHR,KEEP > _ ALLOCPDS SYS2.SYSPLEXD.ALLOCLIB
D$IS02 SHR,KEEP > _ ASMLANGX PDFTDEV.COMMON.WDBLANGX
D1SY01 SHR,KEEP > _ HASPINDX SYS2.ISD1.HASPINDX
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _ ISPILIB PDFTDEV.STG.GIF
D$IS03 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTDEV.INT.GIF
D$IS03 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTDEV.FVT.GIF
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTDEV.SVT.GIF
D$PP02 SHR,KEEP > _ ISPLLIB WDB.WDBDEV.LOAD
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTDEV.USERID.LOAD
D$IS03 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTOOL.COMMON.LOAD
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTDEV.STG.LOAD
D$IS02 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTDEV.INT.LOAD
D$IS02 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTDEV.FVT.LOAD
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
D$IS03 SHR,KEEP > _ [email protected]
D$IS05 SHR,KEEP > _ ISPFTEST.LOAD
$$SR40 SHR,KEEP > _ SYS1.DFQLLIB
$$SR40 SHR,KEEP > _ SYS1.DGTLLIB
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 62. Current Data Set Allocations List panel

On the right side of the display is a list of ddnames and their associated data sets. The list of data sets can
also contain indicators of DUMMY allocations, subsystem files, or allocations to the terminal. The ddname
is shown in white, unless the first data set in the concatenation is scrolled off the top of the screen. If the
first data set in a concatenation is not on the screen, the ddname is shown in yellow.
In the center of the display is a column of 1-character input fields, preceded by greater-than signs (>).
These input fields are used for line commands such as E for Edit and I for Information. For data set with
an XTIOT, this input field may be unavailable if XTIOT support is not enabled in the ISPF configuration
table. Data sets with an XTIOT have the data set name displayed in yellow. A column with a heading of X is
displayed next to the ENQW column. A value of Y is displayed in this column if the data set has an XTIOT.
This column is shown in Figure 64 on page 193.
The left side of the display contains columns of information about individual data sets. When you scroll
right or left, the left side of the screen changes. Initially, the left side of the screen contains the volume
name and disposition. If the disposition is red, there are other jobs waiting to use this data set as shown.
You can use the Q line command to see what jobs are waiting. You can view the VTOC information for a
volume by placing the cursor on the volume name and pressing the Enter key.
ISRDDN automatically checks for mixed concatenations when it is started. If you have concatenations of
mixed data set types or formats, you are shown a message to that effect when you press the Enter key or
scroll the first time. ISRDDN also checks for mixed concatenations when you use the RESET command.
If you scroll right once, you see the attributes of each data set, as shown in Figure 63 on page 193.

192 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 Current Data Set Allocations Row 1 of 197

Blksz Lrecl RCFM Org Act DDname Data Set Name Actions: B E V M F C I Q
27920 80 FB PO > _ ALLOCPDS
SYS2.SYSPLEXD.ALLOCLIB
27998 1017 VB PO > _ ASMLANGX
PDFTDEV.COMMON.WDBLANGX
4096 4096 F PS > _ HASPINDX
SYS2.ISD1.HASPINDX
27920 80 FB LIB > _ ISPILIBPDFTDEV.STG.GIF
27920 80 FB LIB > _ PDFTDEV.INT.GIF
27920 80 FB LIB > _ PDFTDEV.FVT.GIF
27920 80 FB PO > _ PDFTDEV.SVT.GIF
6144 ** U PO > _ ISPLLIB WDB.WDBDEV.LOAD
6144 ** U PO > _ PDFTDEV.USERID.LOAD
6144 ** U PO > _ PDFTOOL.COMMON.LOAD
6144 ** U LIB > _ PDFTDEV.STG.LOAD
6144 ** U LIB > _ PDFTDEV.INT.LOAD
6144 ** U LIB > _ PDFTDEV.FVT.LOAD
6144 ** U PO > _ PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
6144 ** U PO > _ [email protected]
6144 ** U LIB > _ ISPFTEST.LOAD
32760 ** U PO > _ SYS1.DFQLLIB
32760 ** U PO > _ SYS1.DGTLLIB
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 63. Data Set Attributes in ISRDDN

For some types of allocations, such as subsystem allocations, you might see different information. If you
have mixed concatenations, a message with this information appears when you press the Enter key or
scroll the first time. You can suppress this message for future innovations of ISRDDN by using the CHECK
OFF command.
If you scroll right a second time, you see information that includes whether the ddname is open and if so,
by how many active DCBs, as shown in Figure 64 on page 193.

Current Data Set Allocations Row 1 of 197

Open SMS ENQW X Act DDname Data Set Name Actions: B E V M F C I Q

> _ ALLOCPDS SYS2.SYSPLEXD.ALLOCLIB
SMS > _ ASMLANGX PDFTDEV.COMMON.WDBLANGX
> _ HASPINDX SYS2.ISD1.HASPINDX
SMS > _ ISPILIB PDFTDEV.STG.GIF
SMS > _ PDFTDEV.INT.GIF
SMS > _ PDFTDEV.FVT.GIF
SMS > _ PDFTDEV.SVT.GIF
Open(2) > _ ISPLLIB WDB.WDBDEV.LOAD
Open(2) SMS > _ PDFTDEV.USERID.LOAD
Open(2) SMS > _ PDFTOOL.COMMON.LOAD
Open(2) SMS > _ PDFTDEV.STG.LOAD
Open(2) SMS > _ PDFTDEV.INT.LOAD
Open(2) SMS > _ PDFTDEV.FVT.LOAD
Open(2) SMS > _ PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
Open(2) SMS > _ [email protected]
Open(2) SMS > _ ISPFTEST.LOAD
Open(2) > _ SYS1.DFQLLIB
Open(2) > _ SYS1.DGTLLIB
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 64. Additional DD Information

ISRDDN diagnostic utility 193

 You also see the indicator *SMS* if the data set is SMS-managed, and information about jobs waiting on
the resource. For JES files you might see additional information such as the class and the writer name.
Some primary commands, MEMBER and COUNT, for example, put messages in a fourth status screen
(Figure 65 on page 194).

Current Data Set Allocations Row 1 of 197

Message Act DDname Data Set Name Actions: B E V M F C I Q

Members: 10 > _ ALLOCPDS
SYS2.SYSPLEXD.ALLOCLIB
Members: 0 > _ ASMLANGX
PDFTDEV.COMMON.WDBLANGX
> _ HASPINDX
SYS2.ISD1.HASPINDX
Members: 0 > _ ISPILIBPDFTDEV.STG.GIF
Members: 0 > _ PDFTDEV.INT.GIF
Members: 0 > _ PDFTDEV.FVT.GIF
Members: 26 > _ PDFTDEV.SVT.GIF
Members: 2 > _ ISPLLIB WDB.WDBDEV.LOAD
Members: 1 > _ PDFTDEV.USERID.LOAD
Members: 138 > _ PDFTOOL.COMMON.LOAD
Members: 5 > _ PDFTDEV.STG.LOAD
Members: 0 > _ PDFTDEV.INT.LOAD
Members: 0 > _ PDFTDEV.FVT.LOAD
Members: 480 > _ PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
Members: 1 > _ [email protected]
Members: 5 > _ ISPFTEST.LOAD
Members: 13 > _ SYS1.DFQLLIB
Members: 568 > _ SYS1.DGTLLIB
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 65. Additional DD Information

If messages exist and you scroll right again, you see the messages. The message screen is only shown if
messages exist. If messages do not exist, a third scroll to the right returns you to the initial screen.

Using commands on the displayed list

The Current Data Set Allocations list supports both primary commands and line commands. The displayed
list is the list of ddnames that you can see by scrolling up and down. You can use primary commands to
limit what is displayed in the list. Many of the primary commands work only on the contents of the
displayed list.
ISRDDN can also create pseudo-ddnames that show useful data set names. For example, the LPA
command adds two pseudo-ddnames, LINKLIST and LPALIB, which contain lists of the current link list
and LPA libraries.

Allocation list primary commands

Primary commands are used to limit the contents of the displayed list, to add pseudo-ddnames, to
operate on all the contents of the displayed list and to invoke other ISRDDN options.
All primary commands can be invoked with their minimum unique names. For example, MEMBER can be
abbreviated as M, while CLIST can be abbreviated as CL. The allocation list primary commands follow.
You can specify an initial primary command when you start ISRDDN. For example, if you enter DDLISTB
10.??? on an ISPF command line, you will immediately browse the storage containing the TCB control
block. When you exit the Browse screen, you are not returned to the DD allocation list. This feature is
useful for calling ISRDDN from within a program when, for example, you want to limit the list to specific
dd names, view ENQs, save the current allocations, or browse storage.

194 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

Only (O) and Exclude (EX, X)
ONLY and EXCLUDE are used to limit the ddnames in the displayed list. They take one operand: a
whole or partial ddname. For example, the command O PLI causes the list to contain only ddnames
that contain the string "PLI", such as STEPLIB and ISPPLIB.
The ONLY and EXCLUDE commands are useful when you want to limit the ddnames or pseudo-
ddnames that are operated on by commands like MEMBER and DUPLICATES. They are also helpful in
reducing the size of the displayed list for easier viewing.
Find (F) and Locate (L))
FIND and LOCATE search the list for a string. LOCATE looks only at ddnames and always locates the
first matching ddname. FIND looks at everything currently in the displayed list and finds the next
occurrence of the string following the current cursor position. You can repeat a FIND operation by
pressing the RFIND key.
When a string is found by FIND, the string is highlighted and the cursor is placed on the string. When a
string is found by LOCATE, the string is highlighted and the cursor is placed in the line command area
next to the located ddname.
Reset (R))
The RESET command rebuilds the list. In most screen formats the list is automatically rebuilt when
you press Enter. However, if you have used the COUNT command or the MEMBER command and have
messages showing in the list, you might need to use the RESET command to refresh the list.
Short (S) and Long (LON)
The SHORT and LONG commands alter the format of the list. The SHORT command places the
ddname of a concatenation next to the first data set (as shown in Figure 62 on page 192). The LONG
command formats the list with ddnames of concatenations placed on a separate line before the data
set names (as shown in Figure 66 on page 195).

Current Data Set Allocations Row 1 of 206

Volume Disposition Act DDname Data Set Name Actions: B E V M F C I Q

D$SY01 SHR,KEEP > _ ALLOCPDS SYS2.SYSPLEXD.ALLOCLIB
D$IS02 SHR,KEEP > _ ASMLANGX PDFTDEV.COMMON.WDBLANGX
D1SY01 SHR,KEEP > _ HASPINDX SYS2.ISD1.HASPINDX
> _ ISPILIB
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTDEV.STG.GIF
D$IS03 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTDEV.INT.GIF
D$IS03 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTDEV.FVT.GIF
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTDEV.SVT.GIF
> _ ISPLLIB
D$PP02 SHR,KEEP > _ WDB.WDBDEV.LOAD
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTDEV.USERID.LOAD
D$IS03 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTOOL.COMMON.LOAD
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTDEV.STG.LOAD
D$IS02 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTDEV.INT.LOAD
D$IS02 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTDEV.FVT.LOAD
D$IS04 SHR,KEEP > _ PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
D$IS03 SHR,KEEP > _ [email protected]
D$IS05 SHR,KEEP > _ ISPFTEST.LOAD
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 66. Current Data Set Allocations List in LONG Format

The SHORT format shows more information on one screen. Use the LONG format when you want to
use line commands that operate on whole concatenations, such as E and V, on only the first data set
in a concatenation.
Member (M)
The MEMBER command is a very useful command in ISRDDN. MEMBER searches the displayed list (or
just ddnames containing a given string) for a member whose name matches a pattern. For example,
the command M ISRSUBS searches the data sets in the displayed list, the job pack area, and the link
pack directory for members named ISRSUBS. Data sets that contain the member are flagged with a
message on the left side of the list, as shown in Figure 67 on page 196.

ISRDDN diagnostic utility 195

 Current Data Set Allocation Member was found

Message Act DDname Data Set Name Actions: B E V M F C I Q

> _ ALLOCPDS
SYS2.SYSPLEXD.ALLOCLIB
> _ ASMLANGX
PDFTDEV.COMMON.WDBLANGX
> _ HASPINDX
SYS2.ISD1.HASPINDX
> _ ISPILIBPDFTDEV.STG.GIF
> _ PDFTDEV.INT.GIF
> _ PDFTDEV.FVT.GIF
> _ PDFTDEV.SVT.GIF
> _ ISPLLIB WDB.WDBDEV.LOAD
> _ PDFTDEV.USERID.LOAD
> _ PDFTOOL.COMMON.LOAD
Member: ISRSUBS > _ PDFTDEV.STG.LOAD
> _ PDFTDEV.INT.LOAD
> _ PDFTDEV.FVT.LOAD
Member: ISRSUBS > _ PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
> _ [email protected]
> _ ISPFTEST.LOAD
> _ SYS1.DFQLLIB
> _ SYS1.DGTLLIB
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 67. Results of the MEMBER Command

If the name is the name of a loaded module in the job pack area or LPA, you also see a panel similar to
the one in Figure 69 on page 198.
When a member name is used on the MEMBER command (such as, M ISRSUBS) and an E, V, or B line
command is used next to a data set in which that member is found, ONLY that member is Edited,
Viewed, or Browsed. When the M line command is used, the member list is shown with the selected
member at the top of the list.
When a member name pattern is used on the member command (such as, M ISR*), the E, V, B, and M
line commands display member lists with members that match the given pattern.
Use the MEMBER command in situations when you do not know from where a member is coming or
when you suspect that you might be accessing the wrong copy of a member. For example, if you are
developing ISPF panels and you do not see your version of the panel being displayed, you can issue
the MEMBER command to search for other copies of the panel.
Usually the MEMBER command operates on the entire displayed list. You can add a second operand
that is a partial ddname. For example, the command M ISRSUBS PL searches only ddnames
containing the string PL, such as ISPLLIB and STEPLIB. This avoids having to use the ONLY command
to limit the search.
Clist (CL) or Save (SA)
The CLIST command creates a CLIST that contains TSO ALLOCATE statements to reproduce the
allocations in the displayed list. The CLIST is saved in a sequential data set named
'userid.ISRDDN.CLIST' or 'prefix.userid.ISRDDN.CLIST'. If the ISPF configuration table field
USE_ADDITIONAL_QUAL_FOR_PDF_DATA_SETS is set to YES, an additional qualifier defined with the
ISPF_TEMPORARY_DATA_SET_QUALIFIER field is included before the ISRDDN qualifier. You can use
the command name SAVE instead of CLIST.
Use this command when you want to change allocations for testing purposes. For example, to add a
panel library to your ISPPLIB concatenation:
• Enter ISRDDN
• Type O ISPPLIB to limit the displayed list to ddname ISPPLIB
• Type CLIST to create and edit the ISRDDN.CLIST data set
• Change the ALLOCATE statement to add your data set
• Exit ISPF
• Execute the CLIST (that is, EX ISRDDN)
Like the MEMBER command, you can add a whole or partial ddname to limit the number of ddnames
that are included in the generated CLIST. For example, to create a CLIST that only contains allocation
statements for ddnames containing the string ISP, type CLIST ISP or SAVE ISP.

196 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

Check (CH)
The CHECK command turns on or off automatic checking for mixed concatenations. CHECK or CHECK
ON enables automatic checking, and CHECK OFF disables it. When checking for mixed concatenations
is enabled, ISRDDN checks for concatenations with mixed record formats, mixed fixed record lengths,
and mixed data set organizations. Because there are times when these concatenations are intended,
you might want to turn off the warning generated by ISRDDN.
Count (C)
The COUNT command displays the number of members in a partitioned data set. The number of
members is shown in the message area on the left side of the list.
COUNT can be used to find out if you have empty data sets in your concatenations. For example, if you
want to find out if all members of an SCLM-controlled library system were successfully promoted, you
can edit the hierarchy, invoke ISRDDN, and use the COUNT command to verify that all of the expected
libraries in the concatenation are empty.
Like the MEMBER command, you can add a whole or partial ddname to limit the number of ddnames
that are searched.
Duplicates (DUP)
The DUPLICATES command searches all of the partitioned data sets in the displayed list and the LPA
and displays a list of duplicate names. From the duplicates list, you can use the E (edit), B (browse),
and V (view) line commands to view the PDS member or LPA storage. Use the DUPLICATES command
to see where you might have potential conflicts with old or modified versions of load modules, REXX
or CLIST programs, ISPF panels, or other PDS members.
For module names found in the Link Pack directory, the address of the module and its size are shown
on the left side of the screen. If the name is an alias of a different module, the real name (major name)
is shown instead of the size.
The duplicates list is shown in Figure 68 on page 197. Like the MEMBER command, you can add a
whole or partial ddname to limit the number of ddnames that are searched. For example, to search
only ddnames that contain the string LLIB, enter DUP LLIB.

Duplicate members list Row 1 of 562

Address Siz/Maj DDname Act Member Data set name Actions: B, E, V

ISPLLIB > _ FLM$CP PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD
00D8A5F8 FLMIO24 --LPA--- > _

ISPLLIB > _ FLM$CPI PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD

04668F20 000000E0 --LPA--- > _

ISPLLIB > _ FLM$DE PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD

00D8B218 FLMIO24 --LPA--- > _

ISPLLIB > _ FLM$DT PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD

00D8B9D8 FLMIO24 --LPA--- > _

ISPLLIB > _ FLM$99 PDFTDEV.SVT.LOAD

00D88DF8 FLMIO24 --LPA--- > _

ISPLLIB > _ FLM@SCAN PDFTOOL.COMMON.LOAD

ISPLLIB > _ [email protected]

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 68. The Duplicates List Display

The SAVE command can be entered from the duplicate list display to have the duplicate member data
written to a sequential data set named 'userid.ISRDDN.DUPLICAT' or
'prefix.userid.ISRDDN.DUPLICAT'. If the ISPF configuration table field
USE_ADDITIONAL_QUAL_FOR_PDF_DATA_SETS is set to YES, an additional qualifier defined with the
ISPF_TEMPORARY_DATA_SET_QUALIFIER field is included before the ISRDDN qualifier.

ISRDDN diagnostic utility 197

 APF, Linklist (LI), Parmlib, and Lpa (LP)
The APF, LINKLIST, PARMLIB, and LPA commands add and remove pseudo-ddnames that show the
defined APF libraries, link list libraries, PARMLIB libraries, and LPA libraries respectively. These
pseudo-ddnames are shown as if they are allocated ddnames, but no actual allocation to the libraries
is made. You can use most of the primary and line commands with these names, just as you would
with real ddnames.
In the confirmation panel, you can type YES to process the libraries, or SKIP to process the libraries
and avoid the confirmation panel in the future. Dynamic LPA, Link lists, PARMLIB, and APF lists are all
supported.
The LINKLIST and LPA commands add both the LINKLIST and LPALIB pseudo-ddnames. To delete
any pseudo-ddname, enter the appropriate command a second time. For example, to add APF
libraries to the list, use the APF command. To remove the APF libraries from the list, enter the APF
command a second time.
Select (S) and Load (L)
The SELECT command searches the job pack area (JPA) and link pack area (LPA) to see if a module is
loaded. If the module is found, you see the CSVQUERY Results panel shown in Figure 69 on page 198.

┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ 197
│ CSVQUERY Results │
│ More: + │ Q
│ Module ISRSUBS was found to be already loaded. Note that │
│ invocations of this program name may pick up another copy from │
│ STEPLIB or a LIBDEF'ed data set or from a tasklib such as ISPLLIB. │
│ Tab to a box and press enter to view the module in storage. │
│ +-------------------------+ +-------------------------+ │
│ | Job pack area resident | | PLPA resident | │
│ | Resident above 16 Meg | | Resident above 16 Meg | │
│ | Loaded by program fetch | | Module address:05437000 | │
│ | from ISPLLIB (Lib 4) | | Module size: 000D03C0 | │
│ | PDFTDEV.STG.LOAD | | Reentrant | │
│ | Module address:15EC6000 | | Serially reusable | │
│ | Module size: 000D3000 | | Not loadable only | │
│ | Reentrant | | AMODE 31 | │
│ | Serially reusable | | Authorized library | │
│ | Not loadable only | | Not Authorized program | │
│ | AMODE 31 | +-------------------------+ │
│ | Not Authorized program | │
│ +-------------------------+ │
C │ Command ===> │ PAGE
│ F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F9=Swap F12=Cancel │
F ⋘─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Figure 69. The CSVQUERY Results Panel

The information shown in the CSVQUERY Results panel is mostly derived by issuing a CSVQUERY
macro. The data set name from which the module was loaded is shown if it can be determined.
However, because of the way this information is gathered, the data set name can be incorrect if the
original ddname from which the data set was loaded has been reallocated since the module was
loaded.
On the CSVQUERY Results panel, you can use the TAB key to place the cursor inside the boxes
describing the load module. If you then press Enter, you can browse the load module in storage.
The SELECT command is useful in situations where you need to know where a loaded program came
from, for example, when you think you might be running mixed levels of ISPF or of an application
under ISPF.
If a module is not loaded but you want to see its attributes, you can use the LOAD command instead of
the SELECT command. LOAD uses the current tasklib such as ISPLLIB, but you should verify that the
loaded module came from the source you were expecting it to come from. LOAD automatically
browses the load module storage.
Custom (CU)
The CUSTOM command shows several settings about your ISPF installation. It shows the values that
used to be set in the ISPDFLTS CSECT but are now in the ISPF Configuration table, and it shows the
values configured in module ISPTCM. This command is helpful when you are having trouble with the

198 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 way certain programs are invoked. For more information about ISPTCM, refer to z/OS ISPF Planning
and Customizing.
MList (ML)
The MLIST command displays the eyecatchers for some of the ISPF CSECTs contained in modules
ISPSUBS and ISRSUBS. This command can sometimes be used to verify that you are running with a
particular level of maintenance because the eyecatchers in most ISPF modules contain a release
number or a PTF level.
Browse (B)
ISRDDN provides a method of browsing storage using ISPF BROWSE. The storage can be browsed as
unformatted data, as minimally formatted data, or as a side-by-side hexadecimal and EBCDIC dump
format. ISRDDN also enables you to automatically chain lists, view arrays, and view the data pointed
to by control blocks that are mainly lists of pointers (such as CVT).
The BROWSE primary command accepts a storage address, module name, or TSO TEST address
locator string.

Table 32. Some examples invoking BROWSE

Command Explanation
B ISRSUBS Browse the already loaded module named ISRSUBS.
B 10. Browse storage at hexadecimal location 10. To distinguish hexadecimal
addresses from module names, absolute addresses must end with a
period.
B 0.+21c?+b4?+108?+8 Browse storage based on a TSO TEST style string. In this case, the
control block called the Protected Step Control Block or PSCB is
shown.
B ISRSUBS+60? Browse the address pointed to by the 4 bytes at offset hexadecimal 60
into module ISRSUBS.
B ? or B +0? When executed from within the storage browser, this command uses
the address 0 bytes from the beginning of the displayed storage as a
pointer and starts a new browse session to show that storage.

Enq (E)
You can view ENQs on the system using the ENQ command. A display similar to the one shown in
Figure 70 on page 199 appears. You can reduce the size of the list by specifying a QNAME, RNAME,
address space name, and a system name. All entries are treated as prefixes, so you might not need to
specify complete names.

System ENQ Status Row 1 of 183

Scroll LEFT or RIGHT to see type or system name.

Major name prefix . . . SYSDSN (SYSDSN, SPFEDIT, etc)

Minor name prefix . . . (dsn etc)
Address id prefix . . . USERID (Job name, User id, etc)
System prefix . . . . . (System name)
Major Minor Job Name
┌──────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────────┬──────────┐
│ SYSDSN │ AOP.SAOPEXEC │ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ AOP.SAOPMENU │ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ AOP.SAOPPENU │ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ AZZ.V1R1.SAZZCLIB │ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ AZZ.V1R1.SAZZMENU │ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ AZZ.V1R1.SAZZPENU │ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ AZZ.V1R1.SAZZSENU │ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ BZZ.SBZZCLIB │ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ BZZ.SBZZMENU │ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ BZZ.SBZZPENU │ USERID │
│ SYSDSN │ BZZ.SBZZSENU │ USERID │
Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F5=Rfind F7=Up F8=Down F9=Swap
F10=Left F11=Right F12=Cancel

Figure 70. The System ENQ Status List Panel

ISRDDN diagnostic utility 199

 The Major column shows the QNAME. The Minor field shows the RNAME and if the RNAME is 8 bytes
or less, it shows the hexadecimal representation of the RNAME next to the EBCDIC representation.
In the System ENQ Status list, the Job Name field is color-coded to indicate the type of ENQ that the
address space holds or is waiting for. Green indicates a shared ENQ. Red indicates an exclusive ENQ.
If an address space does not hold the ENQ but is waiting for it, the job name is shown highlighted in
reverse video.
On narrow screens, you can scroll right or left for more information. By scrolling left and right you see
the system name and ENQ options (SYS (system), SYSS (systems), STEP, G (global), and R (reserve)).
On wide screens you see all of the information on one screen without scrolling left or right.
On the System ENQ Status display, press END to return to the Current Data Set Allocations list, or
enter CON to view the System ENQ Contention display. You can also use the ALL command to view all
ENQs or use the RESET command to see only the data set ENQs (QNAME SYSDSN) for your TSO user
id.
Con (C)
You can view ENQ contention on the system by using the CON command. When ENQ contention
exists, you see a screen similar to the one in Figure 70 on page 199, but without the input fields. When
no contention exists, a message displays instead of the list.

Allocation list line commands

Allocation list line commands are entered next to a ddname or data set. By default the allocation list is in
short format. This means that for concatenations, the ddname is next to the first data set name in the
concatenation.
When a line command is entered next to a ddname, the command is intended to work on the DD
allocation rather than the data set name on that line. For example, an E command next to the ddname that
refers to a concatenation edits the whole concatenation. If you want to edit just the first data set in a
concatenation, use the LONG command to place the list in long format. In long format, the ddname for a
concatenation is on a separate line so that you can place line commands next to the first data set name in
the concatenation.
The Edit, Browse, View, and Member list commands are sensitive to the results of the MEMBER primary
command. When the MEMBER primary command searches the displayed list for a member or members
matching a name pattern, the member or pattern is shown in the list. Placing an E, B, V, or M next to a
name in which the member or pattern was found displays either a member list with member names
matching the pattern or the specific found member.
E - Edit
The E line command edits a data set or concatenation. It can be used on any data set or any ddname
allocated to a data set (real or VIO). You might want to use the E line command for editing temporary
files such as JCL that was created by file tailoring and written to the ISPCTLn ddname.
B - Browse
The B line command browses a data set or concatenation. It can be used on any data set or any
ddname allocated to a data set (real or VIO). You can use the B line command for browsing allocated
files. For example, the compress option in the PDF utilities, option 3.1, creates a listing data set that is
sometimes allocated to the ISPCTL1. When you press the HELP key after compressing a data set in
option 3.1, you might see that the listing was saved in a temporary data set. The B line command in
ISRDDN is an easy way to browse that data set.
V - View
Use the V line command to view a data set or concatenation. This is similar to E (Edit) but there is no
SAVE command. Use this when you want to view a data set and modify it for easier viewing without
risking changes to the data set.
M - Member list
The M command displays an enhanced member list for a data set or concatenation. This gives you
greater flexibility in working with allocated data sets. You might use this command when you have
several different operations to perform on members.

200 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 F - Free
Use the FREE command to free an allocation. The Free command must be specified next to a ddname.
F commands next to data sets in a concatenation with an F next to the ddname are ignored because
those data sets are removed from the list before the F commands are processed.
The F command uses SVC 99 (dynamic allocation) to free the ddname. However, if SVC 99 cannot free
the data set, ISRDDN invokes the TSO FREE command. The TSO FREE command might write a
message to the screen with information on why the free failed. This command is useful when you
need to free allocations such as those left by prematurely terminated or poorly behaved programs.
C or Z - Compress
Use the COMPRESS command to compress partitioned data sets. The COMPRESS command can be
used with data sets that are allocated as shared and can be used next to data set names or ddnames.
I - Information
The I command attempts to invoke the PDF data set information utility to display information about a
data set. It can be used next to any real data set name. VIO data sets are not supported. This
command can provide information such as the number of allocated directory blocks or a data set's
SMS management class, or other information that is not shown by scrolling the Current Data Set
Allocations list left or right.
Q - Query ENQs
The Q command shows all SYSDSN and SPFEDIT ENQs that exist for a data set. This command is
useful when you want to see what other users or jobs are using a data set you have allocated. Using
the Q command provides the same information as using the ENQ primary command and selecting an
RNAME of the data set name.
T - Test Directory
The T line command reads the directory of a PDS directly, and performs a BLDL command on each
member to see if the BLDL service returns accurate information for the directory. The results are
displayed in a separate Browse session. The T command can be used to debug problems such as I/O
errors or the need to refresh LLA or other directory caching systems.
K- VTOC Information
The K line command displays VTOC information for the first volume on which the data set resides. The
information returned is the same as in the Data Set List utility (option 3.4, command V). You can also
view VTOC information by placing the cursor on the volume name and pressing Enter. If the data set is
not on a physical volume, the K command does not provide any information.

Browsing storage and loaded modules

You can use the BROWSE command within ISRDDN to view the contents of storage within your address
space. When you are browsing storage, you can use any of the standard ISPF Browse primary commands.
In addition, there are several commands you can use to format and move around in the storage list.
If you are not using one of the special display formats (CHAIN, ARRAY, or ARRAYP), you can scroll UP even
when the "Top of Data" line is displayed so that you can see what data exists before your requested
storage location. After you scroll up once, you can scroll up or down to the limits of the contiguous
addressable storage.

ARRAY command
ARRAY
4
dimension
length

where:
dimension
The number of array elements in decimal.

ISRDDN diagnostic utility 201

 length
The length of each element in hexadecimal.
When you are viewing an array, you can show the array elements as separate blocks of storage.
For example, the static link list table is an array. Assuming that each element is 45 bytes (hexadecimal
2D) and that you want the first 30 entries, enter ISRDDN and type:

B 10.?+4DC?+8
ARRAY 30 2D

You see a screen similar to Figure 71 on page 202.

BROWSE STORAGE Start:00F3E6C0 Line 00000001 Col 001 080

+1 (00F3E6C0) 0CE2E8E2 F14BD3C9 D5D2D3C9 C2404040 * .SYS1.LINKLIB *
(00F3E6D0) 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 * *
(00F3E6E0) 40404040 40404040 40404040 40 * *

+2 (00F3E6ED) 0BE2E8E2 F14BD4C9 C7D3C9C2 40404040 * .SYS1.MIGLIB *

(00F3E6FD) 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 * *
(00F3E70D) 40404040 40404040 40404040 40 * *

+3 (00F3E71A) 0BE2E8E2 F14BC3E2 E2D3C9C2 40404040 * .SYS1.CSSLIB *

(00F3E72A) 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 * *
(00F3E73A) 40404040 40404040 40404040 40 * *

+4 (00F3E747) 11E2E8E2 E74BC9E2 C4F14BD3 C9D5D2D3 * .SYSX.ISD1.LINKL *

(00F3E757) C9C24040 40404040 40404040 40404040 * IB *
(00F3E767) 40404040 40404040 40404040 40 * *

+5 (00F3E774) 15E2E8E2 E74BE2E8 E2D7D3C5 E7C44BD3 * .SYSX.SYSPLEXD.L *

(00F3E784) C9D5D2D3 C9C24040 40404040 40404040 * INKLIB *
(00F3E794) 40404040 40404040 40404040 40 * *

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT

Figure 71. ARRAY Storage Format

In the ARRAY format display, the offsets on the left are the array element number followed by the address
of the displayed line.

ARRAYP command
ARRAYP
dim
length

where:
dim
The decimal number of pointers in the array.
length
The hexadecimal length of each element pointed to by the pointer. The default for length is whatever
fits on one line in the current display format.
Many control blocks are mainly list of pointers. For example, the Communications Vector Table (CVT) is an
MVS control block that points to many other control blocks. The ARRAYP command shows the data

202 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 pointed to by the pointers in a control block. Use the ARRAYP command when you are looking for the
offset of a pointer to a particular storage location.
For example, to see what is pointed to by the elements of CVT, enter ISRDDN and type

B 10.?
ARRAYP

You see a screen similar to Figure 72 on page 203.

In the ARRAYP format display, the offsets on the left are the offsets within the array of pointers followed
by the pointer itself. This is followed by the data to which the pointer refers.

BROWSE STORAGE Start:00FC6CB8 Line 00000001 Col 001 080

+0 (00000218) 00889E88 00889E88 00FC4D80 00F90100 * .hãh.hãh..(Ï.9.. *
+4 (00FDEFC4) 0DA01211 A7240008 10114111 00001111 * .Á..x.....á..... *
+8 (00FC6C34) 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 * ................ *
+C (00FC72A0) C1E4E2C3 C2010000 00FCA440 40404040 * AUSCB.....u *
+10 (00000000) 000A0000 000130E1 00000000 00000000 * .......¸........ *
+14 (00FEB70C) 00FEB63C 00FEB63C 00FEB63C 00FEB63C * .┌Â..┌Â..┌Â..┌Â. *
+18 (00FE7096) 58F00224 58F0F06C 58F0F070 58F0F004 * ý0..ý00%ý00°ý00. *
+1C (00FDA0E8) 47F0F028 47F0F034 47F0F020 47F0F018 * Õ00.Õ00.Õ00.Õ00. *
+20 (00FD9F1C) 47F0F028 47F0F0E6 47F0F020 47F0F018 * Õ00.Õ00WÕ00.Õ00. *
+24 (0181B7F8) D3D3C3C2 04820000 00000000 00F8BB00 * LLCB.b.......8]. *
+28 (0126F150) 47F0F01C 16C3E2E5 D3D3E3D9 D440F0F2 * Õ00..CSVLLTRM 02 *
+2C (00FD8C50) 05F047F0 F00600E6 05A04AF0 F00407FF * .0Õ00..W.Áó00... *
+30 (00F29C70) 0088FF8E FA0E0000 00000000 00E4C3C2 * .h.▪│........UCB *
+34 (00FDC2F0) 0DF058F0 F2020BEF 00FDC34C 00FDC360 * .0ý02..ı.┘C<.┘C- *
+38 (0103034F) 0C4104A0 045000E1 08961060 7E584000 * .á.Á.&.¸.o.-=ý . *
+3C (00FC72C8) 15C7A300 D4E2C5D9 15CD6B40 000000FF * .Gt.MSER.‗, .... *
+40 (00F16000) 02000000 52000000 00000000 1000263C * ....Û........... *
+44 (00FEDE78) 47F0F008 41EE0002 1FCC43CE 00009110 * Õ00.áË...÷õ¾..j. *
+48 (00FDEFE8) 0DF04111 00000BE0 58F0F00E 0BEF0000 * .0á....\ý00..ı.. *
+4C (00000000) 000A0000 000130E1 00000000 00000000 * .......¸........ *
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT

Figure 72. ARRAYP Storage Format

BROWSE command
BROWSE
modname

address.

where:
modname
The name of the module you want to browse.
address
The address of the module you want to browse. The address must be terminated with a period.
The BROWSE command lets you browse a module that is already loaded. If it is not loaded, you can use
the LOAD command to explicitly load and browse it.
You can also use the BROWSE command in "point and shoot" mode. Type BROWSE on the command line,
place the cursor over an address within the display, and press Enter. A new browse session is started to
view the storage pointed to by the cursor. If the cursor is not on a valid, accessible address, an error
message is displayed.
When the BROWSE command is invoked within an existing browse session, a new browse session is
started. The END command returns you to the previous browse session.

CANCEL command
CANCEL

ISRDDN diagnostic utility 203

 The CANCEL command ends all browse sessions and returns to the Current Data Set Allocations list.

CHAIN command
CHAIN
0

offset length

where:
offset
A hexadecimal offset of the 4-byte pointer to the next link.
length
The length of each element in hexadecimal. The default for length is whatever fits on one line in the
current display format.
When you are viewing a linked list, you can use the CHAIN command to view more than one link at a time.
The chain is considered terminated when one of these is found:
• A pointer of zero.
• A pointer to the first node.
• A pointer to unavailable storage.
Entering the CHAIN command a second time turns the chain formatting off.
For example, to see the current ASCB chain, enter ISRDDN and type

B 10.??+C?
CHAIN 4 20

You see a screen similar to Figure 73 on page 205.

204 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 BROWSE STORAGE Start:00F90100 Line 00000001 Col 001 080
+0 (00F90100) C1E2C3C2 00F92B80 00F90280 00000000 * ASCB.9.Ï.9.Ï.... *
+10 (00F90110) 008FD788 00029982 00000000 00000000 * ..Ph..rb........ *

+30 (00F92B80) C1E2C3C2 00F98500 00F90100 00000000 * ASCB.9e..9...... *

+40 (00F92B90) 008FD880 000005B4 00000000 00000000 * ..QÏ...®........ *

+60 (00F98500) C1E2C3C2 00F90700 00F92B80 00000000 * ASCB.9...9.Ï.... *

+70 (00F98510) 008FD598 0000E527 00000000 00000000 * ..Nq..V......... *

+90 (00F90700) C1E2C3C2 00F90580 00F98500 00000000 * ASCB.9.Ï.9e..... *

+A0 (00F90710) 008FD690 00009130 00000000 00000000 * ..O...j......... *

+C0 (00F90580) C1E2C3C2 00000000 00F90700 00000000 * ASCB.....9...... *

+D0 (00F90590) 008FD788 00007EC0 00000000 00000000 * ..Ph..={........ *

******************************** Bottom of Data

********************************

Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> PAGE

F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT

Figure 73. CHAIN Storage Format

In the CHAIN format display, the offsets on the left are the offsets within a particular link followed by the
actual address of the start of the line.

DATA command
DATA

The DATA command displays the storage as an unformatted string of data with offsets shown on the left
side of the screen. Use this format to give you a better context of the storage you are browsing.

DISASM command
ON
DISASM
OFF

where:
ON
Disassembles the load module being browsed.
OFF
Releases any resources acquired for the disassembly function and returns to the previous browse
mode.
While browsing a load module in storage, you can enter the DISASM command (with either no parameter
or the NO parameter) to disassemble the load module you are browsing being browsed and display the
resulting instructions.
When you have finished browsing the disassembly, you should issue the DISASM command again (this
time with the OFF parameter) to release the resources obtained to support the disassembly. If you
terminate the browse without issuing the DISASM OFF command, the resources are not freed until you
terminate the logical screen.

ISRDDN diagnostic utility 205

DUMP command
DUMP

The DUMP command lets you view storage in dump format.

Note: The DUMP command is analogous with the FORMAT command.

FORMAT command
FORMAT

The FORMAT command displays the storage in both hexadecimal and EBCDIC, the way you might see the
format in a data dump (see Figure 74 on page 206).
When data is displayed in wide format (see “WIDE command” on page 207), the format includes 16 bytes
per line (8 sets of 4 bytes). When data is displayed in narrow format (see “NARROW command” on page
207), the format contains 8 bytes per line (4 sets of 4 bytes).
FORMAT is the default format that appears whenever a storage browse session is started.

BROWSE ISPSUBS JPA Start:15D8C890 Size:000E5770 Line 00000000 Col 001 080
********************************* Top of Data **********************************
+0 (15D8C890) C9E2D7E3 E2C3F040 000003BC 15E03450 * ISPTSC0 ...».\.& *
+10 (15D8C8A0) 15DCE850 15DB0C48 15E1EDB0 15DE49A0 * .³Y&.¹.þ.¸Ê^.·±Á *
+20 (15D8C8B0) 15DE7BF8 15E21780 15E00E48 15E71848 * .·#8.S.Ï.\.þ.X.þ *
+30 (15D8C8C0) 15E1E1A0 15DCEA40 15E1F400 15E1FEE0 * .¸¸Á.³. .¸4..¸┌\ *
+40 (15D8C8D0) 15E0D540 15E0E148 15E20038 15E6BE98 * .\N .\¸þ.S...W┤q *
+50 (15D8C8E0) 15E106D0 15E202B8 15E0E950 15DDD380 * .¸.}.S.¢.\Z&.¨LÏ *
+60 (15D8C8F0) 15D8DC30 15E0F7C0 15E10308 15E0F1A0 * .Q³..\7{.¸...\1Á *
+70 (15D8C900) 15E1EB98 15E20700 15DBA490 15E0B518 * .¸Èq.S...¹u..\º. *
+80 (15D8C910) 15E6D018 15DA8AC0 15DA5D58 15E20AE0 * .W}...½{..)ý.S.\ *
+90 (15D8C920) 15E25D20 15DA9A30 15E6D3D0 15E6DB98 * .S)...¬..WL}.W¹q *
+A0 (15D8C930) 15E212C0 15E21540 15DFFB08 15E6F128 * .S.{.S. .....W1. *
+B0 (15D8C940) 15DAE7D8 15E083C8 15DB0428 15E0EFB0 * ..XQ.\cH.¹...\ı^ *
+C0 (15D8C950) 15E0F628 15E0F290 15E0AB60 15E209D8 * .\6..\2..\┐-.S.Q *
+D0 (15D8C960) 15E224F0 15DFDBE0 15E0D050 15DCD0B0 * .S.0..¹\.\}&.³}^ *
+E0 (15D8C970) 15DCD3D0 15DCD190 15E23A80 15E6F480 * .³L}.³J..S.Ï.W4Ï *
+F0 (15D8C980) 15E23B58 15E24BE8 15D8D630 15E24E40 * .S.ý.S.Y.QO..S+ *
+100 (15D8C990) 15D8CC50 15E252A8 15E25468 15E25B20 * .Q÷&.SÛy.SÞÃ.S$. *
+110 (15D8C9A0) 15E29E30 15E6FDA8 15E2B778 15E0D358 * .Sã..W┘y.S...\Lý *
+120 (15D8C9B0) 15E70AC8 15DCEB10 15E2B998 15DFF458 * .X.H.³È..S¥q..4ý *
Command ===> ________________________________________________ Scroll ===> PAGE
F1=HELP F2= F3=END F4=DATASETS F5=FIND F6=CHANGE
F9=SWAP F10=LEFT F11=RIGHT F12=SUBMIT

Figure 74. Storage Viewed in FORMAT Mode

LIMIT command
LIMIT

The LIMIT command shows the address limits and size of the contiguous storage area being browsed and
resets the currently browsed address to the lowest address in that storage.

LOAD command
LOAD modname

where:
modname
The name of the module you want to load and browse.
The LOAD command loads and browses a module.

206 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

NARROW command
NARROW

The NARROW command switches the display from wide format to narrow format.
To return to wide format, issue the WIDE command.
The wide or narrow format, set by the WIDE and NARROW commands respectively:
• Is maintained from one session to the next by means of a profile variable.
• Applies to data when it is displayed with a type setting of FORMAT, DATA, DUMP, or RAW. When data is
displayed with a type setting of DISASM, the WIDE and NARROW commands have no effect.

RAW command
RAW

The RAW command displays storage data as unformatted text. Storage is shown on the screen without
any formatting. The data on a line is the data that immediately follows the data on the previous line.
Because the FIND command is actually searching the screen image and not storage itself, it is best to
search storage while in the RAW display format. Note that even in unformatted displays, if your search
string would span lines, FIND does not locate the string. To avoid this, search for the string in RAW format,
then enter the command B +20 to find the string again. This shifts the display by 32 bytes (hexadecimal
20) and the line breaks occur in different places.

REFRESH command
REFRESH

Use the REFRESH command to scroll the display back to the +0 offset. REFRESH is useful if you have
scrolled up past the initial "Top of Data" line and want to return to your original referenced storage
location.
REFRESH is not available in CHAIN, ARRAY, or ARRAYP formatted displays.

SETDATA command
SETDATA
0

offset

where:
offset
The offset at which ISRDDN is to treat the code as data rather than as an instruction.
The SETDATA command lets you specify an offset at which you want ISRDDN to treat the code as data
rather than as an instruction.

WIDE command
WIDE

The WIDE command switches the display from narrow format to wide format.
If the screen is too narrow to handle the wide format, you must scroll right and left to see all of the data.
To return to narrow format, issue the NARROW command.

ISRDDN diagnostic utility 207

 The wide or narrow format, set by the WIDE and NARROW commands respectively:
• Is maintained from one session to the next by means of a profile variable.
• Applies to data when it is displayed with a type setting of FORMAT, DATA, DUMP, or RAW. When data is
displayed with a type setting of DISASM, the WIDE and NARROW commands have no effect.

Defining named storage locations

If you browse the same storage locations or control blocks frequently, you might want to set up a file that
names those storage locations so that you can use a name in the BROWSE command.
To enable the BROWSE command to use a named reference to storage, you must allocate a sequential file
to the ddname ISRDDN. Each line in that file is either a comment or a named storage location. Comments
start with a semi-colon (;).
Location definitions have a name as the first word, followed by a TSO TEST style locator string. Anything
after the locator string is ignored. The TSO TEST locator string can use another defined name as a starting
point. If the locator string cannot be resolved because of syntax or other errors, the line is ignored.
For example, if you allocate a sequential file like the one shown in Figure 75 on page 208 to ddname
ISRDDN, you could then browse your User Profile Table, which stores your TSO PROFILE settings, by
typing B UPT on the command line.

CVT 10.? Communications Vector Table

PSCB JSCB+108? TSO Protected Step Control Block
JSCB TCB+B4? Job/Step Control Block
TCB CVT?? Task Control Block
UPT PSCB+34? User Profile Table

Figure 75. Sample ISRDDN Named Storage File

208 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

Appendix H. Accessibility

Accessible publications for this product are offered through IBM Knowledge Center (www.ibm.com/
support/knowledgecenter/SSLTBW/welcome).
If you experience difficulty with the accessibility of any z/OS information, send a detailed email message
to [email protected].

Accessibility features

Accessibility features help users who have physical disabilities such as restricted mobility or limited vision
use software products successfully. The accessibility features in z/OS can help users do the following
tasks:
• Run assistive technology such as screen readers and screen magnifier software.
• Operate specific or equivalent features by using the keyboard.
• Customize display attributes such as color, contrast, and font size.

Consult assistive technologies

Assistive technology products such as screen readers function with the user interfaces found in z/OS.
Consult the product information for the specific assistive technology product that is used to access z/OS
interfaces.

Keyboard navigation of the user interface

You can access z/OS user interfaces with TSO/E or ISPF. The following information describes how to use
TSO/E and ISPF, including the use of keyboard shortcuts and function keys (PF keys). Each guide includes
the default settings for the PF keys.
• z/OS TSO/E Primer
• z/OS TSO/E User's Guide
• z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol I

Dotted decimal syntax diagrams

Syntax diagrams are provided in dotted decimal format for users who access IBM Knowledge Center with
a screen reader. In dotted decimal format, each syntax element is written on a separate line. If two or
more syntax elements are always present together (or always absent together), they can appear on the
same line because they are considered a single compound syntax element.
Each line starts with a dotted decimal number; for example, 3 or 3.1 or 3.1.1. To hear these numbers
correctly, make sure that the screen reader is set to read out punctuation. All the syntax elements that
have the same dotted decimal number (for example, all the syntax elements that have the number 3.1)
are mutually exclusive alternatives. If you hear the lines 3.1 USERID and 3.1 SYSTEMID, your syntax
can include either USERID or SYSTEMID, but not both.
The dotted decimal numbering level denotes the level of nesting. For example, if a syntax element with
dotted decimal number 3 is followed by a series of syntax elements with dotted decimal number 3.1, all
the syntax elements numbered 3.1 are subordinate to the syntax element numbered 3.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 209

 Certain words and symbols are used next to the dotted decimal numbers to add information about the
syntax elements. Occasionally, these words and symbols might occur at the beginning of the element
itself. For ease of identification, if the word or symbol is a part of the syntax element, it is preceded by the
backslash (\) character. The * symbol is placed next to a dotted decimal number to indicate that the
syntax element repeats. For example, syntax element *FILE with dotted decimal number 3 is given the
format 3 \* FILE. Format 3* FILE indicates that syntax element FILE repeats. Format 3* \* FILE
indicates that syntax element * FILE repeats.
Characters such as commas, which are used to separate a string of syntax elements, are shown in the
syntax just before the items they separate. These characters can appear on the same line as each item, or
on a separate line with the same dotted decimal number as the relevant items. The line can also show
another symbol to provide information about the syntax elements. For example, the lines 5.1*, 5.1
LASTRUN, and 5.1 DELETE mean that if you use more than one of the LASTRUN and DELETE syntax
elements, the elements must be separated by a comma. If no separator is given, assume that you use a
blank to separate each syntax element.
If a syntax element is preceded by the % symbol, it indicates a reference that is defined elsewhere. The
string that follows the % symbol is the name of a syntax fragment rather than a literal. For example, the
line 2.1 %OP1 means that you must refer to separate syntax fragment OP1.
The following symbols are used next to the dotted decimal numbers.
? indicates an optional syntax element
The question mark (?) symbol indicates an optional syntax element. A dotted decimal number
followed by the question mark symbol (?) indicates that all the syntax elements with a corresponding
dotted decimal number, and any subordinate syntax elements, are optional. If there is only one syntax
element with a dotted decimal number, the ? symbol is displayed on the same line as the syntax
element, (for example 5? NOTIFY). If there is more than one syntax element with a dotted decimal
number, the ? symbol is displayed on a line by itself, followed by the syntax elements that are
optional. For example, if you hear the lines 5 ?, 5 NOTIFY, and 5 UPDATE, you know that the
syntax elements NOTIFY and UPDATE are optional. That is, you can choose one or none of them.
The ? symbol is equivalent to a bypass line in a railroad diagram.
! indicates a default syntax element
The exclamation mark (!) symbol indicates a default syntax element. A dotted decimal number
followed by the ! symbol and a syntax element indicate that the syntax element is the default option
for all syntax elements that share the same dotted decimal number. Only one of the syntax elements
that share the dotted decimal number can specify the ! symbol. For example, if you hear the lines 2?
FILE, 2.1! (KEEP), and 2.1 (DELETE), you know that (KEEP) is the default option for the
FILE keyword. In the example, if you include the FILE keyword, but do not specify an option, the
default option KEEP is applied. A default option also applies to the next higher dotted decimal
number. In this example, if the FILE keyword is omitted, the default FILE(KEEP) is used. However, if
you hear the lines 2? FILE, 2.1, 2.1.1! (KEEP), and 2.1.1 (DELETE), the default option
KEEP applies only to the next higher dotted decimal number, 2.1 (which does not have an associated
keyword), and does not apply to 2? FILE. Nothing is used if the keyword FILE is omitted.
* indicates an optional syntax element that is repeatable
The asterisk or glyph (*) symbol indicates a syntax element that can be repeated zero or more times. A
dotted decimal number followed by the * symbol indicates that this syntax element can be used zero
or more times; that is, it is optional and can be repeated. For example, if you hear the line 5.1* data
area, you know that you can include one data area, more than one data area, or no data area. If you
hear the lines 3* , 3 HOST, 3 STATE, you know that you can include HOST, STATE, both
together, or nothing.
Notes:
1. If a dotted decimal number has an asterisk (*) next to it and there is only one item with that dotted
decimal number, you can repeat that same item more than once.
2. If a dotted decimal number has an asterisk next to it and several items have that dotted decimal
number, you can use more than one item from the list, but you cannot use the items more than
once each. In the previous example, you can write HOST STATE, but you cannot write HOST HOST.

210 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 3. The * symbol is equivalent to a loopback line in a railroad syntax diagram.
+ indicates a syntax element that must be included
The plus (+) symbol indicates a syntax element that must be included at least once. A dotted decimal
number followed by the + symbol indicates that the syntax element must be included one or more
times. That is, it must be included at least once and can be repeated. For example, if you hear the line
6.1+ data area, you must include at least one data area. If you hear the lines 2+, 2 HOST, and
2 STATE, you know that you must include HOST, STATE, or both. Similar to the * symbol, the +
symbol can repeat a particular item if it is the only item with that dotted decimal number. The +
symbol, like the * symbol, is equivalent to a loopback line in a railroad syntax diagram.

Accessibility 211
212 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I
Notices
This information was developed for products and services that are offered in the USA or elsewhere.
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries.
Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in
your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only
that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or
service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the
user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document.
The furnishing of this document does not grant you any license to these patents. You can send license
inquiries, in writing, to:

IBM Director of Licensing

IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive, MD-NC119
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
United States of America
For license inquiries regarding double-byte character set (DBCS) information, contact the IBM Intellectual
Property Department in your country or send inquiries, in writing, to:

Intellectual Property Licensing

Legal and Intellectual Property Law
IBM Japan Ltd.
19-21, Nihonbashi-Hakozakicho, Chuo-ku
Tokyo 103-8510, Japan

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such
provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION
PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of
express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically
made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication.
IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.
This information could include missing, incorrect, or broken hyperlinks. Hyperlinks are maintained in only
the HTML plug-in output for the Knowledge Centers. Use of hyperlinks in other output formats of this
information is at your own risk.
Any references in this information to non-IBM websites are provided for convenience only and do not in
any manner serve as an endorsement of those websites. The materials at those websites are not part of
the materials for this IBM product and use of those websites is at your own risk.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without
incurring any obligation to you.
Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling: (i) the
exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs (including this
one) and (ii) the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged, should contact:

IBM Corporation
Site Counsel
2455 South Road

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1980, 2019 213

 Poughkeepsie, NY 12601-5400
USA

Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions, including in some cases,
payment of a fee.
The licensed program described in this document and all licensed material available for it are provided by
IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement, IBM International Program License Agreement or any
equivalent agreement between us.
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the
results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have
been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the
same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated
through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data
for their specific environment.
Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their
published announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and
cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM
products. Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of
those products.
All statements regarding IBM's future direction or intent are subject to change or withdrawal without
notice, and represent goals and objectives only.
This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate
them as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and
products. All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an
actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental.
COPYRIGHT LICENSE:
This information contains sample application programs in source language, which illustrate programming
techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs
in any form without payment to IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing
application programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for
which the sample programs are written. These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all
conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these
programs. The sample programs are provided "AS IS", without warranty of any kind. IBM shall not be
liable for any damages arising out of your use of the sample programs.

Terms and conditions for product documentation

Permissions for the use of these publications are granted subject to the following terms and conditions.

Applicability
These terms and conditions are in addition to any terms of use for the IBM website.

Personal use
You may reproduce these publications for your personal, noncommercial use provided that all proprietary
notices are preserved. You may not distribute, display or make derivative work of these publications, or
any portion thereof, without the express consent of IBM.

Commercial use
You may reproduce, distribute and display these publications solely within your enterprise provided that
all proprietary notices are preserved. You may not make derivative works of these publications, or

214 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

 reproduce, distribute or display these publications or any portion thereof outside your enterprise, without
the express consent of IBM.

Rights
Except as expressly granted in this permission, no other permissions, licenses or rights are granted, either
express or implied, to the publications or any information, data, software or other intellectual property
contained therein.
IBM reserves the right to withdraw the permissions granted herein whenever, in its discretion, the use of
the publications is detrimental to its interest or, as determined by IBM, the above instructions are not
being properly followed.
You may not download, export or re-export this information except in full compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including all United States export laws and regulations.
IBM MAKES NO GUARANTEE ABOUT THE CONTENT OF THESE PUBLICATIONS. THE PUBLICATIONS ARE
PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT,
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

IBM Online Privacy Statement

IBM Software products, including software as a service solutions, ("Software Offerings") may use cookies
or other technologies to collect product usage information, to help improve the end user experience, to
tailor interactions with the end user, or for other purposes. In many cases no personally identifiable
information is collected by the Software Offerings. Some of our Software Offerings can help enable you to
collect personally identifiable information. If this Software Offering uses cookies to collect personally
identifiable information, specific information about this offering’s use of cookies is set forth below.
Depending upon the configurations deployed, this Software Offering may use session cookies that collect
each user’s name, email address, phone number, or other personally identifiable information for purposes
of enhanced user usability and single sign-on configuration. These cookies can be disabled, but disabling
them will also eliminate the functionality they enable.
If the configurations deployed for this Software Offering provide you as customer the ability to collect
personally identifiable information from end users via cookies and other technologies, you should seek
your own legal advice about any laws applicable to such data collection, including any requirements for
notice and consent.
For more information about the use of various technologies, including cookies, for these purposes, see
IBM’s Privacy Policy at ibm.com/privacy and IBM’s Online Privacy Statement at ibm.com/privacy/details in
the section entitled “Cookies, Web Beacons and Other Technologies,” and the “IBM Software Products
and Software-as-a-Service Privacy Statement” at ibm.com/software/info/product-privacy.

Policy for unsupported hardware

Various z/OS elements, such as DFSMS, JES2, JES3, and MVS, contain code that supports specific
hardware servers or devices. In some cases, this device-related element support remains in the product
even after the hardware devices pass their announced End of Service date. z/OS may continue to service
element code; however, it will not provide service related to unsupported hardware devices. Software
problems related to these devices will not be accepted for service, and current service activity will cease if
a problem is determined to be associated with out-of-support devices. In such cases, fixes will not be
issued.

Notices 215
Trademarks

Minimum supported hardware

The minimum supported hardware for z/OS releases identified in z/OS announcements can subsequently
change when service for particular servers or devices is withdrawn. Likewise, the levels of other software
products supported on a particular release of z/OS are subject to the service support lifecycle of those
products. Therefore, z/OS and its product publications (for example, panels, samples, messages, and
product documentation) can include references to hardware and software that is no longer supported.
• For information about software support lifecycle, see: IBM Lifecycle Support for z/OS (www.ibm.com/
software/support/systemsz/lifecycle)
• For information about currently-supported IBM hardware, contact your IBM representative.

Programming Interface Information

This publication primarily documents information that is NOT intended to be used as Programming
Interfaces of ISPF.
This publication also documents intended Programming Interfaces that allow the customer to write
programs to obtain the services of ISPF. This information is identified where it occurs, either by an
introductory statement to a chapter or section or by the following marking:

+---------------------Programming Interface information----------------------+

+------------------End of Programming Interface information------------------+

Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com® are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business
Machines Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide. Other product and service names might be
trademarks of IBM or other companies. A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the Web at
Copyright and Trademark information (www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml).

216 z/OS: ISPF User's Guide Volume I

Index

Special Characters Allocation List Primary Commands (continued)

Check 197
? (invalid load module directory fields) 129 Clist 196
{ } (one operand required) 28 Con 200
* (in source listing) 178 Count 197
//* lines, job statement information 151 Custom 198
= (equal sign), used to initiate jump function 97 Duplicates 197
= repeat command 139 Enq 199
> (greater than) Exclude 195
using to pass a command to a dialog function 104 Find 195
| (OR symbol) 28 Linklist 198
Load 198
Locate 195
Numerics Long 195
1 to 9999 parameter, Scroll field 17 LPA 198
3850 virtual volumes Member 195
accessing 118 Mlist 199
Only 195
Parmlib 198
A Reset 195
Save 196
abbreviations for commands and other values
Select 198
commands 187
Short 195
field values 187
Allocations List, Current Data Set 191
keywords/operands 188
alternate DBCS libraries 157
programming languages 188
APPC connections 173
scroll amounts 188
APPC requirements detail 174
AC field, load module library display 129
APPC requirements fast path 173
accelerator 36
application commands description 71
accessibility
Arabic language support 45
contact IBM 209
ARRAY, browsing storage command 201
features 209
ARRAYP, browsing storage command 202
ACCOUNT command, TSO 118
Assembler H (option 4.1) allocation data sets
action bar 25
SYSIN 189
ACTIONS system command 72
SYSLIB 189
activities
SYSLIN 190
nesting 30
SYSPRINT 189
ALIAS command action, specified by ZCTACT 100, 102
SYSPUNCH 190
Alias-of field, load module library display 129
SYSTERM 190
alias, as substitute for ISPF 19
SYSUT1 190
aliases for commands 102
assistive technologies 209
aliases for scrolling commands 103
asterisk (*) parameter, SELECT command 134
allocating ISPF libraries 155
attention field
allocating libraries, defined 115
command entry 104, 110
Allocation List Line Commands
selection 110
Browse 200
attention key (PA1) 110
Compress 201
ATTN keyword, defining attention fields 109
Edit 200
Attributes field, load module library display 129
Free 201
automatic completion
Information 201
data set and member names 111
Member list 200
AUTOTYPE
Query ENQs 201
automatic completion
Test Directory 201
data set name 111
View 200
member name 111
VTOC Information 201
cursor position sensitivity 112
Allocation List Primary Commands
enabling applications to use 113
APF 198
function key for 111
Browse 199

217
AUTOTYPE (continued) command line 29
restrictions 113 command notation 28
command retrieving 87
command stacking
B restriction with HELP command 71
B (browse) line command restriction with RETRIEVE command 72
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 138 command tables
Library utility (option 3.1) 138 action commands 100
Move/Copy utility (option 3.3) 138 dynamically specified command actions 105
BACKUP temporary data sets 150 format of 99
BACKWARD ISPCMDS system command table 99
scrolling command 72, 103 used for assigning command aliases 102
system command 72 used for overriding system commands 104
Batch (option 5) used for passing commands to a dialog function 71, 104
output listings 150 Command, SWITCH 49
overview 7 commands
Bi-directional file transfer limitations 46 aliases 102
Bi-directional language support 45 application 71
blank options 18 entering 17
block line command, defined 30 error processing 29
BOTTOM scrolling command 103 function 71
BOTTOM system command 72 how to enter 71
Browse Mode interception by ISPF 71
browsing DBCS data as EBCDIC data 143 ISPF notation 28
mixed mode 143 levels 71
overview 7 line 7, 28
BROWSE, browsing storage command 203 nesting 30
BUFNO parameter 3 passing to a dialog function 104
bypassing display using jump function 97 PDF command
bypassing menus 19 using an alias 19
bypassing the WSA connection panel 167 using option parameter 19
primary 7, 28
processing, by ISPF 71
C reading syntax diagrams xviii
specifying action dynamically 105
C-socket interface 172
stacking for execution 71
CANCEL system command 72
stacking with delimiter 28
CANCEL, browsing storage command 203
system 72
CHAIN, browsing storage command 204
commands, entering
Changed field, member list display 127
command error processing 29
Changing Member List Field Attributes 137
ISPF command notation 28
Changing the Default Sort Order for Member Lists 137
commands, member selection list 129
character conversion for APL and TEXT keyboards 185
Common User Access (CUA) guidelines 15
Character sets, in a GUI display 37
communications, configuring for client/server 171
check boxes, GUI mode 35
concatenation
client/server communications, configuring 171
during editing 120
CLIST
during language processing 120
allocating library 157
of function key-entered value with command entry,
restrictions 111
restrict 106
CMDE system command 72
conditional retrieve 73
CNTL temporary data sets 150
Configuring APPC connections 173
Codepages, in a GUI display 37
Configuring Communications for ISPF C/S 171
COLOR
Configuring TCP/IP connections 171
system command 73
CONFIRM command
combination box 36
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 131
Command (option 6)
parameters
overview 7
OFF 131
command abbreviations 187
ON 131
command alias 102
contact
command error processing 29
z/OS 209
command field
Control TSOGUI Query 44
entering commands 71
Created field
use with jump function 97
member list display 127
Command field, ISPF panels 17
CRETRIEV system command 73

218
CSR (cursor) scrolling amount 98 double-byte character set (DBCS) (continued)
CUA (Common User Access) guidelines 15 Edit and Browse 143
CUAATTR system command 73 format definition 142
Current Data Set Allocations List Format Specification utility (option 3.11) 142
line commands 200 formatted data, View, Edit, and Browse 142
primary commands 194 hexadecimal format 143
using commands 194 invalid mixed data 143
current lists Mixed Mode field 143
definition 53 DOWN system command 73, 98
cursor control of scrolling 98 drop-down list 35
CURSOR parameter, Scroll field 17 DSLIST displays 57
Cursor position sensitivity, AUTOTYPE 112 DSLIST system command 74
CURSOR system command 73 DTEST system command 74
cursor-select key dual command processing 29
processing of selected fields 110 DUMP, browsing storage command 206
selection of attention field 110 dynamic status area 25

D E
D (delete lines) Edit (option 2)
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 138 editing DBCS data as EBCDIC 143
Library utility (option 3.1) 138 mixed mode 143
data entry panels 18 overview 7
DATA parameter EDIT command 138
Scroll field 17 END
DATA scrolling amount 98 system command 74
Data Set Allocations List, Current 191 END command
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) ISPF 10
data set list listings 182 ending
member list line commands 138 a function or a dialog
primary commands END system command 74
CONFIRM 131 RETURN system command 87
source and index listings 177 display, END system command 74
data set lists ending ISPF or an ISPF function, Exit option (X) 10
personal 53, 55 ending member lists 123
reference 53 entering a command 71
Data Set Password field, library/data set entry panels 142 entering a command, defined 26
DATA, browsing storage command 205 ENVIRON system command 75
DBCS EPDF system command 75
allocating alternate libraries 157 equal sign used to initiate jump function 97
session messages in English 158 EXHELP system command 76
default function key assignments 106 Exit (option X)
default function key settings ending ISPF from the ISPF Primary Option Menu 10
ending ISPF or an ISPF function 9 overview 8
getting help 9 use of log/list defaults 10
default mode, defined 16 EXIT system command 76
default operands 28 EXPAND system command 76, 99
Default Sort Order for Member Lists, Changing 137 extended binary coded decimal interchange code (EBCDIC)
DELETE command, TSO 131 Browse or Edit DBCS data as EBCDIC 143
delimiters, used to stack commands 28 format definition 142
Diagnostic Utility, ISRDDN 191 hexadecimal format 143
dialog invalid mixed data 143
development of 153 Mixed Mode field 143
nested 96
recursive entry into 102
Dialog Test (option 7)
F
overview 7 feedback xxv
dialog, defined 1 field selection
direct access data sets 3 using cursor position 109
direct access storage device, using with packed data 143 field value abbreviations 187
DISASM, browsing storage command 205 field1 parameter, SORT command 135
display format 16 field2 parameter, SORT command 135
double-byte character set (DBCS) file tailoring
Browse or Edit DBCS data as EBCDIC data 143

219
file tailoring (continued) IKJEFT1I 43
allocating 156 image library, allocating 156
image library 156 Images, in a GUI display 37
output libraries 156 index listings
FKA system command 77 for load libraries 179
Fonts, in a GUI display 37 for source libraries 178
fonts, setting for WSA 167 Init field, member list display 127
Foreground (option 4) Installation
output listings 150 ISPF Client/Server (ISPF C/S)
overview 7 configuration parameters 160
format definition 142 ISPF Workstation Agent (ISPF WSA)
Format Name field assumptions 159
Edit Entry Panel 142 Installation program
effect on Mixed Mode field 142 Workstation agent 165
View Entry Panel 142 INT system command 77
Format Selection List panel 142 interactive application, defined 1
Format Specification utility (option 3.11) internal character representations
IBM 5550 terminal support 142 for APL keyboards 185
FORMAT, browsing storage command 206 ISPCMDS system command table 99, 103
format, panel 16 ISPDPTRC system command 78
FORWARD ISPDTLC system command 78
scrolling command 103 ISPF
system command 77 command notation 28
FORWARD system command 77 command types 27
fragments, syntax diagrams xviii ending 9
FTP download 161 entering commands 26
fullscreen TSO data 44 functions 1
function (F) keys, See function keys getting help 9
function commands 71 interacting with 4
function key member name conventions 4
AUTOTYPE 111 option selection 19
function keys overview 1
changing content and format (TAILOR) 83, 107 primary options, option selection 19
command entry 105 starting 5
defining functions 107 supported data types 3
PFSHOW system command 83 understanding panels 16
providing default settings 109 user profiles 8
saving definitions 109 ISPF C/S download 164
used for command entry 71, 105 ISPF C/S Download Utility
FTP method 161
Manual method 164
G ISPF C/S Install Utility
generation data group (GDG) data sets 3 ISPFINST.EXE 165
generation data sets 117 the C/S agent window 166
Group field, data entry panels 115 ISPF C/S installation, prerequisites
configuration parameters 160
ISPF client/server 173
H ISPF Client/Server Component
check boxes
HALF parameter, Scroll field 17
fonts 37
HALF scrolling amount 98
panel display CUA mode 36
Hardcopy utility (option 3.6)
PRINT command 36
source and index listings 177
WS command 37
Hebrew language support 45
GUI mode, how it looks
HELP command
action bars 34
ISPF 9
APL/TEXT character sets 37
HELP system command 71, 77
color, intensity, and highlighting 36
horizontal split-screen mode 46
cursor movement 35
Enter key 36
I Function keys 36
graphic areas 37
IBM Products (option 9) input fields 37
overview 7 long messages 35
ID field, member list display 127 mnemonics 35

220
ISPF Client/Server Component (continued) ISRROUTE system command 81
GUI mode, how it looks (continued)
pull-down menus 34
push buttons 35
J
sample screens 39 JCL for allocating libraries for MVS 155
short messages 35 job statement information
split screen 36 parameters
title bars 34 //* lines 151
WINDOW command 36 jump function 30, 97
Restrictions
closing the ISPF C/S component 46
ISPF commands K
END 10
keepalive socket option 173
HELP 9
keyboard
taking a screen snapshot 144
navigation 209
ISPF library names 115
PF keys 209
ISPF library setup 153
shortcut keys 209
ISPF library, defined 115
KEYLIST system command 81
ISPF log listings 180
KEYS system command 81
ISPF member statistics 123
KEYS system command, defining function key functions 107
ISPF Settings (option 0 ), overview 7
KEYSHELP system command 81
ISPF Workstation Agent installation, prerequisites
keyword/operand abbreviations 188
assumptions 159
keywords, syntax diagrams xviii
ISPFILE file tailoring output library 156
ISPFINST.EXE 165
ISPFTTRC system command 79 L
ISPFVAR system command 80
ISPFWORK system command 80 language for ISPF session, specifying 157
ISPILIB image input library 156 lcmd parameter, SELECT command 134
ISPLIBD system command 80 LEFT system command 81, 98
ISPLLIB link library 157 levels of ISPF commands 71
ISPMALT alternate message library 157 LIB field
ISPMLIB message library 153 load module library display 128
ISPPALT alternate panel library 157 member list display 127
ISPPLIB panel library 153 libraries and data sets
ISPPREP system command 80 data set passwords 142
ISPPROF default application profile pool 153 format definitions 142
ISPSALT alternate skeleton library 157 list and log data sets 144
ISPSLIB skeleton library 153 member selection lists 121
ISPSTART command, session language override 158 mixed mode 143
ISPTABL table output library 155 naming ISPF libraries and data sets 115
ISPTLIB table input library 153, 155 packed data sets 143
ISRDDN partitioned data set extended (PDSE) 143
allocation list primary commands 194 sample ISPF session 10
ISRDDN Diagnostic Utility library concatenation
Browsing storage commands during editing 120
ARRAY 201 during language processing 120
ARRAYP 202 functions that use concatenation 119
BROWSE 203 Group field 119
CANCEL 203 overview 119
CHAIN 204 library lists
DATA 205 personal 53
DISASM 205 library member
DUMP 206 definition of 115
FORMAT 206 Library utility (option 3.1)
LIMIT 206 member list line commands 138
LOAD 206 Library utility (option 3.1), source and index listings 177
NARROW 207 LIMIT, browsing storage command 206
RAW 207 limitations, bi-directional files 46
REFRESH 207 line command fields 29
SETDATA 207 line commands
WIDE 207 defined 7, 28
Browsing storage, loaded modules 201 definition of 130
ISRRLIST system command 80 member selection list 130

221
Line Commands, Allocation List 200 Member List Field Attributes, Changing 137
linking requirement for split-screen mode 157 member list listings
list and log data sets formats 182
foreground and batch output listings load libraries 181
list-id parameter 150 source libraries 180
prefix parameter 150 member list lists 180
userid parameter 150 Member List Positioning 141
job statement information 151 member list primary commands
list data set 144 SRCHFOR 136
log data set 144 Member Lists, Refreshing 137
other temporary data sets 150 member name conventions 4
prefix parameter 144 member selection list
printing list/log data sets 148 defined 121
taking a screen snapshot 144 displaying member lists 122
temporary names 144 ending member lists 123
userid parameter 144 fields
list box 35 load module library 128
list data set source library 126
list-id 133 ISPF member statistics 123
prefix 133 line commands
processing 145 B (browse) 138
list modes 54 C (copy) 138
LIST system command 82 D (delete) 138
LIST temporary data sets 150 E (edit) 138
list-id parameter G (reset statistics) 138
Foreground and Batch output listings 150 I (display data set information) 138
SAVE command 133 J (submit) 138
List, Current Data Set Allocations 191 M (move) 138
LIST, system command P (print) 138
conditions for using 147 R (rename) 138
description 145 S (select) 134, 138
using 145 T (invoke TSO command) 138
listing formats V (view) 138
data set list listings 183 W (invoke workstation command) 138
ISPF log listings 180 list data set 133
member list listings 182 load module library member statistics 128
source and index listings 177 primary commands
load module library LOCATE 133
invalid directory fields (?) 129 RESET 133
member statistics 128 SAVE 133
LOAD, browsing storage command 206 SELECT 134
LOCATE command SORT 135
member selection list 133 table of differences 121
parameters updating a member list 141
string 133 Member selection list commands 129
log data set Member Selection List Primary Commands
processing 145 MLC 137
LOG system command MLS 137
conditions for using 147 Refresh 137
description 82, 145 menu 18
Log/List (option 0) Menu pull-down 20
changing defaults 8 messages
effect on Exit (X) option 10 as means of communication 4
logical screens (split-screen mode) 46 conditions for display 29
Long Message field, ISPF panels 17 displayed by HELP command 9
English for DBCS session 158
failure to enter required value 18
M inconsistent values 18
managed data set Long Message field 17
defined 143 Short Message field 17
Manual download 164 mixed data
MAX parameter, Scroll field 17 assumed 143
MAX scrolling amount 98 format definition 142
Member field, data entry panels 116 invalid, examples of 143

222
mixed data (continued) operand notation (continued)
Mixed Mode field 143 uppercase 28
non-mixed mode 143 operating system, passing commands 71
unformatted 143 Option field, ISPF panels 17
Mixed Mode field option number 25
Edit Entry Panel 143 option selection
View Entry Panel 143 0 - ISPF Settings 7
MLC Command 137 1 - View 7
MLS Command 137 10 - SCLM 8
mnemonics, GUI mode 35 2 - Edit 7
Mod field, member list display 127 3 - Utilities 7
MOUNT authority 118 4 - Foreground 7
move members 120 5 - Batch 7
Move/Copy utility (option 3.3) 6 - Command 7
member list line commands 138 7 - Dialog Test 7
Move/Copy utility (option 3.3), source and index listings 177 9 - IBM Products 7
MSGID system command 82 X - Exit 8
multicultural support 28, 135 optional ISPF libraries 155, 156
multiple, defined for line commands 121 Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Names 116
multivolume data sets 3 other temporary data sets 150
OUTLINE keyword
fields affected by 84
N on PRINT system command 84
Name field OUTLIST temporary data sets 150
load module library display 128 Outlist utility (option 3.8), source and index listings 177
member list display 126 OV parameter, Attributes field 129
naming ISPF libraries and data sets overriding, system commands 104
ISPF library names 115 overview of ISPF
Other Partitioned or Sequential Data Set Names 116 commands, entering 26
volume serials 118 interacting with ISPF 4
NARROW, browsing storage command 207 ISPF primary options 6
national language for ISPF session 157 starting ISPF 5
National Language Support, See multicultural support understanding ISPF panels 16
native mode, defined 16 user profiles 8
navigation
keyboard 209 P
nested commands 30
nested dialogs 96 P (print) line command
NLS, See multicultural support Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 138
non-ISPF displays, using REFRESH 96 Library utility (option 3.1) 138
NOP action, specified using ZCTACT 100 PA keys
NOP system command 82 definition 110
notation conventions 28 PA1 110
NRETRIEV command PA2 110
SCLM considerations 64 packed data
NRETRIEV key 53 format defined 143
NRETRIEV system command 83 requirements for using 143
NX parameter, Attributes field 129 PAGE parameter, Scroll field 17
PAGE scrolling amount 98
panel format 16
O panel ID field, ISPF panels 17
OFF parameter panel types
CONFIRM command 131 data entry panels 18
OL parameter, Attributes field 129 menus 18
ON parameter overview 17
CONFIRM command 131 PANELID system command 83
operand notation panels
optional([ ]) 28 as means of communication 4
lowercase 28 basic types 18
one required({ }) 28 default mode 16
OR symbol (|) 28 defined 16
stacked 28 menus 18
underscored defaults 28 native mode 16
panel format 16

223
panels (continued) PRINTL system command 85
retaining previous values 18 PRINTLHI system command 85
what they display 4 profiles, user 8
parameter program access (PA) keys 110
parenthesis added to 102 program library, allocating 157
parenthesis, added to command parameter 102 program linking requirement for split-screen mode 157
partitioned data set extended (PDSE) 143 programming language abbreviations 188
partitioning the display, screen-split screen mode 46 Project field, data entry panels 115
passing commands PSCOLOR system command 85
to a dialog function 104
to the operating system 71
PASSTHRU action
Q
specified using ZCTACT 100, 104 Query ENQs 201
pattern parameter, SELECT command 134
pattern, defined 116
PDSE 143 R
personal data set list
R (rename) line command
action bar choices 58
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 138
how to create 56
Library utility (option 3.1) 138
how to display the list of lists 56
RACF (Resource Access Control Facility) 142
personal data set list panel
radio button 36
fields 59
RAW, browsing storage command 207
personal data set lists 53, 59
RCHANGE system command 85
personal data set lists panel
recursive entry into dialog functions 102
action bar choices 61
redisplaying contents of a screen using PA key 110
fields 62
REFACTD system command 85
personal library list 55
REFACTL system command 86
personal library lists 53
REFADDD system command 86
personal list commands
REFADDL system command 86
command line 65
reference data set list 55
function keys 66
reference data set lists 53
personal lists
reference library list 56
command interface (fast path) 65
reference library lists 53
example of ISPF panel using NRETRIEV 68
referral lists
function keys 66
example of ISPF panel using referral list 67
library 55
REFLISTD system command 86
NRETRIEV command 63
REFLISTL system command 86
personal data set list 55
RefMode 54
private lists 63
REFOPEND system command 86
reference data set list 55
REFOPENL system command 86
reference library list 56
Refresh Command 137
retrieving names from 57
REFRESH, browsing storage command 207
shared lists 63
Refreshing Member Lists 137
PFSHOW system command
Rename field on member list display 127, 128
changing content and format (TAILOR) 83, 107
repeatable items, syntax diagrams xviii
ZPFCTL system variable 108
repeating, commands (RETRIEVE) 87
ZPFFMT system variable 108
required ISPF libraries 153
ZPFSET system variable 108
RESET command
ZPRIKEYS system variable 108
member selection list 133
positioning, member list 141
RESET key
prefix parameter
description 111
Foreground and Batch output listings 150
reshow key (PA2) 110
list and log data sets 144
RESIZE system command 86
primary commands
Resource Access Control Facility (RACF) 142
defined 7, 28, 129
RETF system command 86, 95
member selection list 129
RETP system command 87, 96
Primary Commands, Allocation List 194
RETRIEVE system command 87, 94
PRINT command, in GUI mode 36
RETURN system command 87, 96
PRINT system command 83
REXX - allocating library 157
PRINT-HI system command 84
RF parameter, Attributes field 129
PRINTDS
RFIND system command 87
editing the command 149
RIGHT system command 81, 87, 98
printing the Log and List data sets 148
RN parameter, Attributes field 129
PRINTG system command 84

224
RU parameter, Attributes field 129 SORT command
rules for AUTOTYPE 112 member selection list 135
parameters
field1 135
S field2 135
S (select) line command Sort Order for Member Lists, Changing the Default 137
member selection list 134 source listings 177
Move/Copy utility (option 3.3) 138 source segments 121
sample ISPF session 10 specifying action dynamically 105
SAREA system command 87 SPFTEMP temporary data sets 150
SAVE command SPLIT command 46
Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 180 SPLIT system command 88
member selection list 133 split-screen mode
parameters entering 46
asterisk (*) 134 logical screens 46
lcmd 134 maximum number 46
list-id 133 partitioning display screen 46
pattern 134 program linking requirement 157
saving function key definitions 109 RETRIEVE function 94
SCLM (option 10) terminating 46
overview 8 VSAM restrictions 51
SCRNAME system command 88 split-screen mode, maximum number 46
scroll amount abbreviations 188 SPLITV system command 50, 88
Scroll field, ISPF panels 17 SRCHFOR command, Member List utility 136
scrolling stack - (RETRIEVE command) 94
command aliases 103 stacked operands 28
commands to control 98 stacking commands
scroll amount 98 for execution 71
tutorial panels 98 restrictions 71
SELECT action start column, defined 178
command 101 Start GUI Session 30
specified by ZCTACT 100 START system command 88
SELECT command statistics
member selection list 134 ISPF members 123
sending to IBM load module libraries 128
reader comments xxv storage, browsing commands
separator bar 36 ARRAY 201
SETDATA, browsing storage command 207 ARRAYP 202
Settings (option 0) BROWSE 203
changing default delimiter 28 CANCEL 203
overriding mode switching 16 CHAIN 204
SETTINGS system command 88 DATA 205
SETVERB action DISASM 205
specified by ZCTACT 100 DUMP 206
shared personal lists 63 FORMAT 206
shift-in characters LIMIT 206
DBCS character strings 143 LOAD 206
formatted data, Edit, View and Browse 142 NARROW 207
invalid mixed data, examples of 143 RAW 207
treatment in non-mixed mode 143 REFRESH 207
shift-out characters SETDATA 207
DBCS character strings 143 WIDE 207
formatted data Edit and Browse 142 string parameter
invalid mixed data, examples of 143 LOCATE command 133
treatment in non-mixed mode 143 summary of changes xxvii
Short Message field, ISPF panels 17 SuperC listing title lines
shortcut keys 209 index listings 178
single selection, defined for line commands 121 source listings 177
Size field suspending an activity 30
load module library display 128 SWAP system command 89
member list display 127 SWAPBAR options
skipping panel display using jump function 97 customizing 89
snapshot of a screen 144 SWAPBAR system command 89
sockets 172 SWITCH

225
SWITCH (continued) System Commands (continued)
system command 90 KEYLIST 81
SWITCH Command KEYS 81
3270 screens 49 KEYSHELP 81
GUI screens 49 LEFT 81
restrictions 49 LIST 82
rules for splitting and swapping 49 LOG 82
SWITCH system command 90 MSGID 82
syntax diagrams, how to read xviii NOP 82
SYSIN data set NRETRIEV 83
Assembler H 189 PANELID 83
VS COBOL II 189 PFSHOW 83
SYSLIB data set PRINT 83
Assembler H 189 PRINT-HI 84
VS COBOL II 189 PRINTG 84
SYSLIN data set PRINTL 85
Assembler H 190 PRINTLHI 85
VS COBOL II 190 PSCOLOR 85
SYSNAME RCHANGE 85
system command 91 REFACTD 85
SYSNAME system command 91 REFACTL 86
SYSPRINT data set REFADDD 86
Assembler H 189 REFADDL 86
VS COBOL II 189 REFLISTD 86
SYSPUNCH data set REFLISTL 86
Assembler H 190 REFOPEND 86
VS COBOL II 190 REFOPENL 86
system commands RESIZE 86
description 71 RETF 86
overriding by use of command tables 104 RETP 87
System commands RETRIEVE 87
function key defaults 72 RETURN 87
list of 72 RFIND 87
System Commands RIGHT 81, 87
ACTIONS 72 SAREA 87
BACKWARD 72 SCRNAME 88
BOTTOM 72 SETTINGS 88
CANCEL 72 SPLIT 88
CMDE 72 SPLITV 88
COLOR 73 START 88
CRETRIEV 73 SWAP 89
CUAATTR 73 SWAPBAR 89
CURSOR 73 SWITCH 90
DOWN 73 SYSNAME 91
DSLIST 74 TOP 91
DTEST 74 TSO 91
ENVIRON 75 TSOCMD 91
EPDF 75 TSOGUI 91
EXHELP 76 TUTOR 92
EXIT 76 UDLIST 92
EXPAND 76, 99 UP 92
FKA 77 USERID 92
FORWARD 77 WINDOW 92
HELP 77 WS 93
INT 77 WSCON 93
ISPDPTRC 78 WSDISCON 93
ISPDTLC 78 ZCLRSFLD 94
ISPFTTRC 79 ZEXPAND 76
ISPFVAR 80 ZKEYS 94
ISPFWORK 80 system register for WSA 167
ISPLIBD 80 system variables, saving function key definitions 109
ISPPREP 80 SYSTERM data set
ISRRLIST 80 Assembler H 190
ISRROUTE 81 VS COBOL II 190

226
SYSUT1 data set user interface
Assembler H 190 ISPF 209
VS COBOL II 190 TSO/E 209
SYSUT2 to SYSUT7 data sets, VS COBOL II 190 user profiles 8
USERID
system command 92
T userid parameter
table libraries, allocating 155 Foreground and Batch output listings 150
TAILOR operand on PFSHOW command 83, 107 list and log data sets 144
tape data sets, ISPF support for 3 USERID system command 92
TCP/IP communications 172 using AUTOTYPE 112
TCP/IP connections 171 Utilities (option 3)
TCP/IP requirements detail 171 overview 7
TCP/IP requirements fast path 171 Utilities pull-down menu 20
temporary data sets 150
terminating V
a function or dialog
END system command 74 V (view) line command
RETURN system command 87 Data Set List utility (option 3.4) 138
display by using END system command 74 Library utility (option 3.1) 138
TSO commands of CLIST by using PA Key 110 variable block spanned (VBS) data sets 3
Title field, ISPF panels 17 variables, syntax diagrams xviii
TOP vertical split-screen mode 50
scrolling command 103 VIO, allocating temporary data sets 150
system command 91 Volume Serial field
TOP system command 91 data entry panels 118
trademarks 216 VS COBOL II compiler (option 4.2)
transmission codes 185 allocation data sets
TS parameter, Attributes field, load module library 129 SYSIN 189
TSO SYSLIB 189
commands SYSLIN 190
ACCOUNT 118 SYSPRINT 189
DELETE 131 SYSPUNCH 190
TSO line mode support SYSTERM 190
alternate entry point 43 SYSUT1 190
fullscreen TSO data 44 SYSUT2 to SYSUT7 190
general information 42 VSAM data sets, ISPF support for 3
how to use 43 VSAM restrictions, split-screen mode 51
restrictions 44 VTOC Information 201
TSO system command 91 VV.MM field, member list display 127
TSOCMD system command 91
TSOGUI 91
TSOGUI system command 91
W
TTR field, load module library display 129 WIDE, browsing storage command 207
TUTOR system command 92 WINDOW system command 92
Tutorial (Option T), finding ISPF information 5 WORK temporary data sets 150
Type field, data entry panels 115 Workplace option description 8
workstation agent
U setting fonts 167
system register 167
UDLIST Workstation agent
INIX directory list command 92 installation program 165
system command 92 workstation agent window 166
unavailable choices 36 writing a list to a list data set
underscored operands 28 member list 133
understanding ISPF panels writing dialogs 153
overview 16 WS system command 93
panel format 16 WSCON system command 93
panel types 17 WSCON System command 31
UP WSDISCON system command 93
scroll command 92, 98
system command 92, 98
updating a member list 141

227
Z
z/OS Communications Server: IP 172
ZCLRSFLD system command 94
ZCTACT
command table field 102
system variable 99
ZCTDESC system variable 99
ZCTTRUNC system variable 99
ZCTVERB
command table field (alias value) 102
system variable 99
ZEXPAND system command 76
ZKEYS system command 94
ZLANG system variable 157
ZPARM system variable
parenthesis added to 102
ZPF01, ZPF02, ... ZPF24 system variables 109
ZPFCTL system variable, on PFSHOW 108
ZPFFMT system variable on PFSHOW 108
ZPFSET system variable, on PFSHOW 108
ZPRIKEYS system variable on PFSHOW system command
108
ZSCBR system variable 99
ZSCED system variable 99
ZSCML system variable 99
ZSCROLLA system variable 99
ZSCROLLD system variable 99
ZSCROLLN system variable 99
ZSCROLNL system variable 99
ZTEMPF system variable 156
ZTEMPN system variable 156
ZVERB system variable 105

228
IBM®

SC19-3627-30